EUREX Release Clearing User Guide

Transcription

1 EUREX Release 14.0

2 Eurex 2013 Deutsche Börse AG (DBAG), Clearstream Banking AG (Clearstream), Eurex Frankfurt AG, Eurex Clearing AG (Eurex Clearing) as well as Eurex Bonds GmbH (Eurex Bonds) and Eurex Repo GmbH (Eurex Repo) are corporate entities and are registered under German law. Eurex Zürich AG is a corporate entity and is registered under Swiss law. Clearstream Banking S.A. is a corporate entity and is registered under Luxembourg law. U.S. Exchange Holdings, Inc. and International Securities Exchange Holdings, Inc. (ISE) are corporate entities and are registered under U.S. American law. Eurex Frankfurt AG (Eurex) is the administrating and operating institution of Eurex Deutschland. Eurex Deutschland and Eurex Zürich AG are in the following referred to as the Eurex Exchanges. All intellectual property, proprietary and other rights and interests in this publication and the subject matter hereof (other than certain trademarks and service marks listed below) are owned by DBAG and its affiliates and subsidiaries including, without limitation, all patent, registered design, copyright, trademark and service mark rights. While reasonable care has been taken in the preparation of this publication to provide details that are accurate and not misleading at the time of publication DBAG, Clearstream, Eurex, Eurex Clearing, Eurex Bonds, Eurex Repo as well as the Eurex Exchanges and their respective servants and agents (a) do not make any representations or warranties regarding the information contained herein, whether express or implied, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or any warranty with respect to the accuracy, correctness, quality, completeness or timeliness of such information, and (b) shall not be responsible or liable for any third party s use of any information contained herein under any circumstances, including, without limitation, in connection with actual trading or otherwise or for any errors or omissions contained in this publication. This publication is published for information purposes only and shall not constitute investment advice respectively does not constitute an offer, solicitation or recommendation to acquire or dispose of any investment or to engage in any other transaction. This publication is not intended for solicitation purposes but only for use as general information. All descriptions, examples and calculations contained in this publication are for illustrative purposes only. Eurex and Eurex Clearing offer services directly to members of the Eurex exchanges respectively to clearing members of Eurex Clearing. Those who desire to trade any products available on the Eurex market or who desire to offer and sell any such products to others or who desire to possess a clearing license of Eurex Clearing in order to participate in the clearing process provided by Eurex Clearing, should consider legal and regulatory requirements of those jurisdictions relevant to them, as well as the risks associated with such products, before doing so. Eurex derivatives (other than EURO STOXX 50 Index Futures contracts, EURO STOXX Select Dividend 30 Index Futures contracts, STOXX Europe 50 Index Futures contracts, STOXX Europe 600 Banks/Industrial Goods & Services/Insurance/Media/Travel & Leisure/ Utilities Futures contracts, Dow Jones Global Titans 50 IndexSM Futures contracts, DAX Futures contracts, MDAX Futures contracts, TecDAX Futures contracts, SMIM Futures contracts, SLI Swiss Leader Index Futures contracts, Eurex inflation/commodity/weather/ property and interest rate derivatives) are currently not available for offer, sale or trading in the United States or by United States persons. Trademarks and Service Marks Buxl, DAX, DivDAX, eb.rexx, Eurex, Eurex Bonds, Eurex Repo, Eurex Strategy WizardSM, Euro GC Pooling, FDAX, FWB, GC Pooling,,GCPI, MDAX, ODAX, SDAX, TecDAX, USD GC Pooling, VDAX, VDAX-NEW and Xetra are registered trademarks of DBAG. Phelix Base and Phelix Peak are registered trademarks of European Energy Exchange AG (EEX). The service marks MSCI Russia and MSCI Japan are the exclusive property of MSCI Barra. itraxx is a registered trademark of International Index Company Limited (IIC) and has been licensed for the use by Eurex. IIC does not approve, endorse or recommend Eurex or itraxx Europe 5-year Index Futures, itraxx Europe HiVol 5-year Index Futures and itraxx Europe Crossover 5-year Index Futures. Eurex is solely responsible for the creation of the Eurex itraxx Credit Futures contracts, their trading and market surveillance. ISDA neither sponsors nor endorses the product s use. ISDA is a registered trademark of the International Swaps and Derivatives Association, Inc. IPD UK Annual All Property Index is a registered trademark of Investment Property Databank Ltd. IPD and has been licensed for the use by Eurex for derivatives. SLI, SMI and SMIM are registered trademarks of SIX Swiss Exchange AG. The STOXX indexes, the data included therein and the trademarks used in the index names are the intellectual property of STOXX Limited and/or its licensors Eurex derivatives based on the STOXX indexes are in no way sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by STOXX and its licensors and neither STOXX nor its licensors shall have any liability with respect thereto. Dow Jones, Dow Jones Global Titans 50 IndexSM and Dow Jones Sector Titans IndexesSM are service marks of Dow Jones & Company, Inc. Dow Jones-UBS Commodity IndexSM and any related sub-indexes are service marks of Dow Jones & Company, Inc. and UBS AG. All derivatives based on these indexes are not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Dow Jones & Company, Inc. or UBS AG, and neither party makes any representation regarding the advisability of trading or of investing in such products. All references to London Gold and Silver Fixing prices are used with the permission of The London Gold Market Fixing Limited as well as The London Silver Market Fixing Limited, which for the avoidance of doubt has no involvement with and accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the underlying product to which the Fixing prices may be referenced. PCS and Property Claim Services are registered trademarks of ISO Services, Inc. Korea Exchange, KRX, KOSPI and KOSPI 200 are registered trademarks of Korea Exchange Inc. BSE and SENSEX are trademarks/service marks of Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE) and all rights accruing from the same, statutory or otherwise, wholly vest with BSE. Any violation of the above would constitute an offence under the laws of India and international treaties governing the same. The names of other companies and third party products may be trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

3 Table of Contents Page 3 Table of Contents 1 Introduction Purpose Prerequisites How to Use Common Window Controls Overview Window Header Control Button Min/Max/Close Button Simulation/Production Distinction Menu Bar Menu Branding Logo Vertical Scroll Bar Horizontal Scroll Bar Buttons Message Bar Display Field Entry Field Table Field Group Radio Buttons Quick-Link Quick Find User Guide Conventions Menu Bar Table Field Group Context Menu Mouse Usage Global Context Shortcuts General Functions and Features Eurex Online Help Order ID and Trade ID Timeout Error Message Moving Columns Selecting Rows or Columns Default Buttons When Changes Affect Windows Message History Tool Bar - Access to Menu Actions Starting the Application Clearing Overview Clearing Accounts Structure

4 Table of Contents Page Types of Membership General Clearing Members Direct Clearing Members Non Clearing Members Registered Customers Member Product Assignments Account Types Position Accounts Premium Accounts Cash/Securities Account Overview of Member Type and Account Relationships Guarantees Margin Clearing Fund Company Capital Requirement Calculation Cash Transactions Client Asset Protection Activation of CAP Types of Client Asset Protection Solution Client Asset Protection Solutions The Pool Concept - Introduction The Pool Concept - In Detail Maintenance of Collateral Pools Collateral Processing Collaterals Pledged on Xemac Collateral Deposits Collateral Withdrawals Use of Windows and Reports Types of Membership As of Date Clearing Process and Feasible Transactions Position Management Exercise and Assignment of Stock Options Exercise and Assignment of Stock Options (Eurex/ISE Link) Notification and Allocation for Futures on Bonds Settlement of Cash Settled Futures Exercise and Assignment of Options on Futures Settlement of Cash Settled Options (other than Options on Stocks) Settlement of Futures Contracts on Energy Premiums and Fees Margin Daily Settlement Trade Transfers (Give-up Trades)

5 Table of Contents Page Historical Trade Transfers Clearing Procedure for Eurex/ISE Link Products Position Keeping of Options and Futures Purpose of Position Keeping Information on Position Balance and Movements Trade Adjustments Trade Separation Trade Open/Close Adjustment Trade Account Transfer Historical Trade Transfers (HiTT) Give-up and Take-up Trades [Modified] Position Adjustment Position Closing Adjustments Member Internal Position Adjustment Position Transfer between different Members Strategy Trade Position Maintenance Duties of the Exchange Duties of the Member Fulfillment of Obligations from Executed Trades Exercise and Assignment of Options Contracts Purpose Exercise Automatic Exercise Manual Exercise Assignments Exercise/Assignment of Positions in Eurex/ISE Link Products Duties of Eurex Duties of the Clearing Member Duties of the Exchange Member Delivery Notice and Allocation of Eurex Futures Contracts Purpose Delivery Notice Allocation Duties of the Clearing House Duties of the Clearing Members Duties of the Exchange Members Settlement of Eurex Options and Eurex Futures Contracts Delivery and Payment Cash Settlement Creation of Futures Positions Settlement of OTC Volatility Strategies for Equity Options

6 Table of Contents Page Settlement of KRX products Payment versus Payment Settlement of EEX Electricity Future Contracts Cascading Expiration for EEX Electricity Futures Cash Settled Electricity Future Contracts Physically Settled Electricity Future Contracts EEX EUA Futures VAT for Energy Deliveries Margin Deposits Intraday Margin Duties of Clearing Department Duties of the Clearing Members Duties of the Exchange Members Settlement of Options on Electricity Futures (EEX) Clearing of OTC Flexible Contracts Transactions OTC Flexible Contracts Parameters OTC Flexible Contracts Supported Transactions Premiums, Fees and Daily Variation Margin Traditional Style Option Premiums Fees Daily Variation Margin Additional Windows and Reports Duties of the Clearing House Duties of the Clearing Members Risk Protection Limit Maintenance Effects of Breaching Limits Risk-based Margining Summary Formation of Margin Classes and of Margin Groups Components of Margin Requirement Calculation of Margin Requirement Reporting the Total Margin Calculation for an Account Netting Reporting the Calculation of Futures Spread Margin Reporting the Calculation of the Premium Margin Reporting the Calculation of Current Liquidating Margin Reporting the Calculation of Additional Margin Margin Requirement for GC Pooling Trades Margining for OTC Flexible Contracts Transactions Margin Requirement for an Exchange Member Account Margin Requirement for a Clearing Member Interest on Cash Margin

7 Table of Contents Page Interest Rate Definition Interest Calculation Daily Settlement Purpose Management and Revaluation of the Pledged Collateral Management and Revaluation of Securities Collateral Cash Amounts Margin Cover Daily Settlement of Cascading EEX Futures Daily Settlement of the Eurex/KOSPI Product Duties of the Clearing House Duties of the Members Give-up Trades Purpose Specifying a Give-up Trade Acceptance of a Give-up Trade Refusing a Give-up Trade Unsuccessfully Processed Give-up Trade [Modified] Cancelling a Give-up Trade Duties of the Clearing House Duties of the Members Management of the GCM - NCM Relationship Purpose Duties of the Clearing House Duties of the Members Window Flow Clearing GUI Window Layouts and s Startup Windows System Connection Login/Logout Main Menu Message Log Trade Management Position Overview Clearing Filter Position Transfer Bulk Load Position Close Out Bulk Load Position Adjustment - Close Out and Position Adjustment - Account Transfer Position Transfer Entry Position Detail Overview Position Detail Filter Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer and O/C Adjustment Position Detail Maintenance - Text Position Transfer Overview

8 Table of Contents Page Position Transfer Filter Give-up Overview [Modified] Give-up Filter [Modified] Give-up Maintenance Take-up Overview Take-up Filter Take-up Maintenance OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing OTC Flexible Contracts Filter Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Settlement Exercise Overview Exercise Filter - Overview Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] Notification Overview Notification Detail Overview Notification Allocation Summary Overview Allocation Overview Futures Deliverable Position Overview Collateral Collateral Pool Overview Collateral Pool Relations Collateral Pool Status CSD Overview CSD Detail [Modified] Collateral Account Overview [Modified] Collateral Status Detail [Modified] Security Deposit Overview [Modified] Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] Security Cash Risk Management Daily Margin Overview Margined Position Overview Guarantee Overview Risk Monitoring Maintenance [Modified] Stop Release Tab Limit Maintenance Tab Action Level 1 - Warning Action Level 2 - Member Slowdown Action Level 3 - Member Stop Intraday Change of Settings Release of a Member

9 Table of Contents Page Manual Member Slowdown Event Log Tab Margin Requirement Information Cash Daily Cash Transaction Overview Info Clearing Board Market Supervision Messages Settlement Price Overview Ticker Board Product Selection Contract Selection External Underlying Selection Product Statistics Overview Contract Statistics Overview Collateral Security Information Deliverable Bonds Overview Option Margin Parameter Overview Exchange Rate Overview [Modified] Contract Mapping Member Member General Information Member Relationship Overview Settings Profile Selection Profile Maintenance Preferences General Text Field Member Change Password Security Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] Product Assignment Maintenance Import User Security Profile Maintenance PIN Maintenance Help On this window About What s new Auxiliary Windows Print Functionality Print Table Print Window Sort Table Find

10 Table of Contents Page Quick Find Column Selection Export Table Confirmation Dialogs Appendix Function Keys Mnemonics Window Menu Buttons Icon Names of Eurex Clearing GUI Table of OTC Flexible Contracts Maintenance Codes Table of Exchanges Glossary

11 Introduction Page 11 1 Introduction This document provides a detailed description of the Eurex front-end clearing which supports all clearing functions through its graphical user interface. Note: Data contained in the screenshots and samples in this publication are for illustrative purposes only and should not be relied upon as a true representation of the current market. 1.1 Purpose This document is intended for member clearing personnel using the system. The purpose of the "" is to: Identify the supported business functions Explain the structure and the content of the windows Familiarize the user with the "look and feel" and its features This user guide is intended to be a reference guide, where information windows can be quickly retrieved. The user guide focuses on giving detailed descriptions of all windows and related functions. The user guide consists of 4 chapters and an appendix: Chapter 1 Introduction introduces the user guide, generic functions and how to start the application. Chapter 2 Clearing Overview provides an overview of the clearing functions. Chapter 3 Window Flow Clearing GUI gives an overview of the Eurex clearing front-end system and window flow. Chapter 4 Window Layouts and s describes the Eurex clearing front-end windows in detail. The Appendix provides additional information. 1.2 Prerequisites To ensure that each user can clear electronically and effectively the following prerequisites need to be met: A full installation and configuration of Eurex. The user should check with his network and system administrators that all network, hardware and Eurex front-end software configuration requirements have been met. A valid user ID and password for the Eurex back-end. A login identification and password for the Eurex front-end. A valid clearer license for Eurex. User attended the clearing training on the new Java GUI.

12 Introduction Page How to Use This document covers use by readers of the exchanges Eurex, EEX and the Vienna Stock Exchange (WBAG - Wiener Börse AG), but does not describe WBAG-specific market and/or system settings. The applicability of chapters is stated at the respective places in the document. When referring to the electronic system the term Eurex is used in a generic way that can be applied to all exchanges that are valid in the respective context. 1.4 Common Window Controls Overview The following section provides an overview of the standard window components and introduces specific terms that are used in this document. The window snapshots shown in this user guide are taken from an Intel platform using Windows as operating system. The look and feel on your workstation may differ slightly from the snapshots shown in this user guide. Common window controls of Eurex windows

13 Introduction Page Window Header The window header displays the current window s title Control Button The Control button enables the user to manipulate the active window. Double clicking the left mouse button (assumption is a right-hand mouse) closes the window. Other typical window options are enabled via a single click, such as Move or Resize. Resizing the window is also possible by dragging the window corner which also enlarges the tables to display additional information Min/Max/Close Button Min. Button: When the user clicks the Min. button, the window and all its child windows are minimized to an icon. Max Button: When the user clicks the Max button, the window is maximized. Close Button: Clicking the Close button closes the window and all its child windows Simulation/Production Distinction Each window title of the simulation GUI application is preceded by the prefix "SIMU-". The production GUI application has no such prefix. Note: It is recommended that the simulation and production GUI application is distinguished by the use of different colors Menu Bar The menu bar contains the menus available in the window. Menus are accessible by either clicking with the left mouse button on the menu bar or pressing a mnemonic (<ALT> key + underlined letter) Menu Each menu of the menu bar contains several menu items that can be chosen by either clicking with the left mouse button on the menu item or pressing the mnemonic (underlined letter) on the keyboard. Note: When a menu item is pulled down and the user switches to another workspace without closing the menu, the menu is still visible in the new workspace due to specific Java behavior Branding Logo Each window contains the branding logo at the right side of the menu bar. By clicking once on the branding logo the Main menu is brought into the foreground. A double click brings all windows of this GUI instance into the foreground.

14 Introduction Page Vertical Scroll Bar The vertical scroll bar allows the user to scroll to and view the parts of a window that may currently not be on the screen, such as the list rows that are currently outside the visible boundary of the table Horizontal Scroll Bar The horizontal scroll bar allows the user to scroll to and view the parts of a window that may not be on the screen, such as the list of columns that are currently outside the visible boundary of the table Buttons Several windows contain buttons that can be used to execute the function indicated by the button label. For example, clicking the Submit button initiates a transaction and closes the window after its successful completion. Buttons are only enabled if their action is executable. Some buttons are disabled (shaded), unless valid data has been entered to all mandatory fields of the window Message Bar Responses and error messages related to an action in the window, or one of its child windows, are displayed in the message bar at the bottom of the window. The system provides messages also in message bubbles, which is useful for messages longer than the displayed window width. The message bubble is shown when remaining for a while with the mouse pointer above the message bar Display Field A window may contain one or more display fields showing information for the user. Values displayed within display fields cannot be changed Entry Field A window may contain one or more entry fields. In these fields, data can be entered and modified using the keyboard. In some cases, field specific context menus are available via the right mouse button to set or change data. In free editable text fields, valid values are all characters according to the ASCII character set (Range: 32 to 126) except the following characters, which are not allowed: (pipe symbol),! (exclamation mark) and the * (asterisk) as first character. A mandatory field must be filled before the dedicated action can be executed. An inquiry icon is placed next to some entry fields. A reinquiry of the window for the defined value is performed after clicking it. Note: When performing this some of the filter settings of the last inquiry may get lost.

15 Introduction Page Table Tables display information in the format of a table. This information cannot be edited Field Group A field group combines two or more display/entry fields logically belonging together and/or buttons, which allow the user to specify certain settings or functional selections Radio Buttons Radio buttons are used to make a selection where only one choice of many is allowed. They never initiate or conclude an action; they are only used to set choices Quick-Link A Quick-Link is added to each new/modified window and indicates that the window has changed. Click the link to open the appropriate section in the What's new online help window Quick Find The Quick Find field on the right end of the toolbar supports quick search functionality. This field is always enabled and optional. If the user starts to type into the Quick Find field, the table in the window shows only those lines containing the search criteria. If columns are selected before the user starts typing into the Quick Find field, the Quick Find only searches the selected columns for the entered search criteria. In order to indicate which columns are used for the search, these columns are highlighted. The text Filtered in the window name indicates that Quick Find filter is active. 1.5 User Guide Conventions To standardize Eurex front-end window descriptions and functions, this guide uses a standard set of terms, abbreviations, etc. The following paragraph explains the terms used for the window descriptions. Each window description provides the user with information about the specific structure of the window and its contents. Therefore, the description for each window includes one or more of the following items: Menu bar tables and specific mouse usage within the tables Field groups and specific mouse usage within the field groups Buttons Global context supporting specific mouse usage

16 Introduction Page Menu Bar The description of the window menu contains: (1) Menu bar commands (2) Menu items for each command (3) An explanation of the function (4) The corresponding keyboard shortcuts (if applicable) Menu Bar (1) Item (2) (3) Shortcut (4) Window Save Settings Save the current window settings. Ctrl+S Clear Settings Close Restores the window settings to the default. Close the window with no further action.... Help On this window... Opens the Help window. F1 Menu bar description example Table Tables display information. Table example The title and a description of the content describes the columns of a table. Also described is how to use the mouse to issue a command for each specific field or column. A column is selected by clicking the title of that column.

17 Introduction Page 17 The following features are supported in all tables: The window settings can be configured to meet the requirements of the individual users. The order of columns can be changed by dragging the column using the right mouse button to the desired position. A column can be deleted from the table display to temporarily hide information. These settings can be saved and restored using the Save Settings menu. The default settings of a window can be restored with the menu item Clear Settings. To improve the visual appearance of windows containing tables, the background color of all tables can be defined in the General tab of the Preferences window. The user can select different background colors for all tables in the system in the General tab of the Preferences window. The user can also set different background colors for individual columns by using the pop-up color menu, which is opened by clicking the right mouse button on the column header. The menu offers a set of seven colors that can be applied to the background color of this column. This coloring effect can be used together with the striping effect for tables and results in shadings of the background color. The color settings of the table can be saved together with all other table settings via the Window/ Save Settings menu action of the window that contains this table. This feature is not available for tables in logging windows such as the general Message Log and window specific message logs. Example of pop-up menu for table header color effect

18 Introduction Page 18 Position Overview Table Column (1) (2) Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member... Table description example Field Group A field group combines two or more fields. These allow the user to specify certain values. Mandatory entry fields appear different from regular entry fields. Mandatory fields have a yellow background in comparison to regular entry fields, which have a white background. Field group example As part of the window description, the field group description lists the following information for each of its elements: (1) Field identifier (2) Identifier type (3) Function/field description (4) Indicates whether a context menu is provided Values for the identifier type within a field group are as follows: B - Button D - Display field E - Entry field S - Selection If a field specific context menu exists for the field, an asterisk "*" is placed in the context menu column, "CT" (CT = ConText menu). A button allows the user to execute a certain command, e.g. submit an order. The button label and its corresponding command or action are described. An ellipsis (three dots) "..." after the button label indicate that clicking the button opens another window to execute that command. Buttons are enabled as soon as all mandatory entries/settings have been made.

19 Introduction Page 19 Position Detail Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT (4) Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract identification: Options - Call/Put, Underlying, Expiration month and year, Strike price, Version number * Field Group description example Context Menu Some entry fields have a context menu, which provides a list of possible values for the field and can be opened by clicking the right mouse button in the field. The maximum number of items which can be shown in a context menu can be configured in the General tab of the Preferences window. If there are more items in the list than can be displayed in the context menu, the marker more appears at the top and bottom of the menu; the scrollbar can be used to move to the desired items in the list. The right mouse button populates the entry field with the selected value. Display Context Menu example Mouse Usage The usage of a standard right hand mouse is described as follows: SC-L single click the left mouse button DC-L double click the left mouse button SC-R single click the right mouse button

20 Introduction Page Global Context Context menus that are not field-specific but affect the contents of the whole window are described in the last section of the window description. To access a global context menu or table click the right mouse button outside of any field groups within the window. Context menus are available only in active windows and fields Shortcuts Instead of using the mouse, the user can also initiate an action by using the keyboard. According to the conventions of this user guide, mnemonic letters are shown within the window description. Keyboard commands of the application do not overwrite the platform-specific commands. Therefore, handling may be different on the different platforms in some cases. W is a mnemonic. The combination of <ALT> + W allows the selection of the Window menu. Pressing the combination of the <ALT> key and the underlined letter of a menu item selects that menu command or function. Changing fields within a window is also possible by using the <TAB> key to move to the next field. Pressing the <SHIFT> + <TAB> key combination moves to the previous field. Pressing <ALT> + <TAB> key combination switches between windows. The arrow-up and arrow-down keys can be used to fill and modify the quantity and limit fields. Every window with a Cancel button can also be closed with the <ESC> key. On every window with a Submit button the <ENTER> key also triggers the submission of the corresponding request. The common window controls Ctrl+C for Copy, Ctrl+V for Paste and Ctrl+A for Select All are provided in windows which can support it.

21 Introduction Page General Functions and Features Eurex Online Help The window descriptions of this user guide are provided as an online help for Clearing GUI. This facility offers a rich source of information about the system and its functions, and is quickly available Order ID and Trade ID The nine digit order IDs and six digit trade IDs contain the characters 0-9 and A-Z. These alphanumeric formats for order and trade IDs allow large number of orders and trades Timeout Error Message The error message TIMEOUT DURING LOGIN, indicates that no response has been returned from back-end while logging in. The error message TIMEOUT OCCURRED is displayed in all overview windows after a specific time without a response from back-end Moving Columns It is possible to configure the tables in each window to an individually defined layout using the right mouse button. Click the column header and drag that column to the desired position to accomplish this. For some windows, it is also possible to change the sort order of the rows of the table using the Sort... menu function Selecting Rows or Columns Multiple rows or columns in a table can be selected by holding the control key <CTRL> and clicking the rows or columns to be selected. A closed set of rows or columns can be selected by left-clicking the first row or column to be selected, holding the shift key <SHIFT> and leftclicking the last row or column of the set to be selected. All the rows or columns between the selection are selected Default Buttons Some windows offer a default button. A border surrounding the button identifies default buttons. When all mandatory fields are filled, the user can press the enter key to trigger the default button, as an option to using the mouse.

22 Introduction Page When Changes Affect Windows Changes occur in active windows on the front-end: Immediately For most windows, changes take effect and can be seen immediately. After closing and reopening the window In some windows, changes occur after the active window is closed and reopened. After reselecting a profile When a profile is used, it needs to be reselected in order to effect changes on it to the current window. Saved changes in the window configuration are seen after starting the next clearing session. When the user's product assignment is changed, the user sees the change only by logging in after the nightly batch run on the back-end has finished. Some windows have a Reload icon. Clicking this icon refreshes the data in these windows Message History Double-clicking the message box of a window activates the Message Log window containing the last 50 window related messages that have been sent to the user since the window was last opened. 1.7 Tool Bar - Access to Menu Actions A set of icons provides access to menu actions. These icons make various menu functions available in any given window and can be accessed directly from the toolbar. Clicking an icon performs the corresponding function exactly as if the function had been chosen via the menu, shortcut, or hotkey (as applicable). The following is a sample of all possible icons (note that no window has all icons available as depicted here). Example of a toolbar The icons are left aligned and there is a separating space to form icon groups for Window, Select and Columns. The title of an icon appears in a pop-up field when the cursor is left to rest on it for a brief time. The icons also appear to the left of the corresponding pull-down menu items. A vertical toggle button, which is located on its left side, allows the user to collapse the toolbar. A collapsed toolbar is hidden and a horizontal toggle button is displayed which allows the user to expand the toolbar again. The state of the toolbar (expanded or collapsed) can be saved using the Window/Save Settings menu action.

23 Introduction Page 23 In the following sections, the individual icons are depicted in large size, and the related functions are briefly described. Function Tool Bar Icon Save Settings Saves the current window settings. Clear Settings Clears the current window settings. Sort Clicking this icon opens the Sort window. Find Opens the Find window to search for table content. Print Opens the Print Functionality dialog. Import Opens the Import Table window to import the table content. Export Opens the Export Table window to export the table content. Copy Copies the selection. Paste Pastes the selection.

24 Introduction Page 24 Filter Profile Selection Clicking this icon opens the filter which corresponds to the window. This icon is used in cases where there are no differentiated sort criteria in the filter window; otherwise the various criteria are presented separately (profile, product, contract, etc.) Clicking this icon opens the Profile Maintenance window. Product Selection Clicking this icon opens the Product Selection window. Contract Selection Clicking this icon opens the Contract Selection window. External Underlying Selection Clicking this icon opens the External Underlying Selection window. Strategy Selection Clicking this icon opens the Strategy Selection window. Delete Columns This icon is used to remove columns from a table. Select the column or columns to be deleted. The <SHIFT> key can be used to select a block of columns as follows: click the end left or right end of the desired block, hold down the <SHIFT> key and click the other end of the block, and the block is highlighted. Separate non-contiguous columns can be highlighted by holding down the <CTRL> key and clicking the desired columns. Clicking the Delete Columns icon deletes the highlighted columns in the table (actually the columns are only hidden; the underlying data is, of course, not affected).

25 Introduction Page 25 Add Columns This icon restores the original column configuration to the table. Select Columns Clicking this icon opens the Column Selection window. Freeze Columns Unfreeze All Columns This function allows the user to select a block of columns on the left side of a table which remain visible while the rest of the columns are scrolled to the back left. Select a column from which the block to remain visible is frozen (including the selected column), click the Freeze icon, and the scroll bar is reduced to the unfrozen block of columns to the right of the frozen block. Scrolling across in the unfrozen block leaves the frozen block visible; the scrolling columns disappear under the frozen block. This icon removes a frozen block setting as described above. The scroll bar is restored to full size under all columns, and the entire table scrolls as usual. Reload Stop The Reload icon Refreshes the content of the table. This button becomes a Stop button while long inquiries are performed. Stops the inquiry. Autofit All Adjusts the widths of all columns in the selected table to fit their respective content On this window... Opens the Help window. Quick Find Supports quick search functionality. This field is always enabled and optional. If the user starts typing into the field, the table displays only those lines containing the search criteria.

26 Introduction Page 26 Expand Expands the displayed groups. Collapse Collapses the displayed groups. The following icons support the separate features of the Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] window: Function Tool Bar Icon Assign Product Assigns the selected product or products. The assignment can be done for a trader or a group of traders. Deassign Product Add Group Delete Group De-assigns the selected product or products. The deassignment can be done for a trader or a group of traders. This function allows the user to add a new sub-group. The added sub-group is maintained in the user s local profile. This function allows the user to delete a sub-group. The user can only delete sub-groups maintained in the local profile.

27 Introduction Page Starting the Application The workstation contains three icons on the desktop. Start: StartGate The "StartGateR35" icon starts the communication links with X-tract The "Start Eurex 11.0 Clearing" icon starts the Eurex clearing GUI. Stop: StopGate The "StopGateR35" icon stops the communication links with Eurex. To start a clearing session, the communication links with the back-end have to be established using the StartGateR35 icon. Clicking icon starts the clearing application. At the end of the session, the StopGateR35 icon needs to be clicked and the communication with Eurex is closed.

28 Clearing Overview Page 28 2 Clearing Overview This chapter covers: An overview of the clearing structure, the clearing process, reports and feasible transactions Position keeping and fulfillment of obligations from executed trades Premiums, fees and daily variation margin Risk-based margining Daily settlement Give-up trades Member relationships 2.1 Clearing Accounts Structure In this section and its subsections, all statements for Eurex also apply to EEX, unless explicitly stated otherwise Types of Membership Four types of membership define the clearing house account structure: General Clearing Member (GCM): Also referred to as Clearing Members (CMs). Direct Clearing Member (DCM): Also referred to as Clearing Members (CMs). Non Clearing Member (NCM): NCMs are market participants without a clearing license. Non Clearing Member trades are cleared by the clearing house through a Clearing Member. Registered Customer (RC): RCs are not trading members of Eurex Clearing cleared markets 1. Registered Customer trades are cleared by the clearing house through a Clearing Member. If a member s: ISETradingAllowed flag is checked (on the Cooperations tab of the Member General Information window), they are able to trade on the ISE. OCCClearingAllowed flag is checked (on the same tab of the same window), they are able to clear their, and their NCM s, Eurex/ISE Link-related positions at Eurex. NCMs are only able to trade on the ISE if their ISETradingAllowed and their GCM s OCCClearingAllowed flags are checked. The three types of memberships imply different duties and requirements as described below. 1. RC solution is not available for FWB, XIM, Bonds and Repo

29 Clearing Overview Page General Clearing Members General Clearing Members who are also Exchange Members have the following duties and requirements: For Eurex (including Eurex/ISE Link) and EEX related transactions: GCMs can trade on the market and settle their own and their client transactions as well as the transactions of their Non Clearing Members/Registered Customers. GCMs are required to provide the clearing house with margin for their own, their client and their Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer positions. GCMs are responsible for the cash settlement of their own, their client and their Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer contracts of cash settled products. GCMs are responsible for providing and booking the variation margin resulting from the daily revaluation of their own, their client and their Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer futures contracts and futures style options contracts. GCMs pay and receive premiums (only for options) and pay transaction fees for themselves, their clients and their Non Clearing Members/Registered Customer. GCMs are responsible for the timely delivery of securities or payment for securities of their own, as well as their clients and their Non Clearing Members/Registered Customer cash market transactions. GCMs must provide access to central bank accounts (that is, for EURO payments RTGS accounts) GCMs are required to link for physical settlement with the Eurex Central Counterparty (CCP) or to arrange an agreement with a third party that is already linked to it. For Eurex (not applicable to EEX): GCMs guarantee and must effect delivery for all the exercises and assignments concerning their own, their client and their Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer positions. GCMs are responsible for the timeliness of delivery notices and assignments of government bonds, when settling their own as well as their client and their Non Clearing Member/ Registered Customer contracts. GCMs must hold an account with their home central securities depositories (CSD), with Clearstream Banking Frankfurt, with their home central bank (CB) and within one of the payment banks denominated by Eurex for the clearing of products in currencies different from Euro or Swiss Franc. The GCM can have additional accounts at the CSDs supported by Eurex. These accounts can be own accounts or custodian accounts. GCMs are supposed to provide a Power of Attorney for accounts at payment banks used for foreign currencies, so that Eurex Clearing AG is able to instruct payments on behalf of the Clearing Member.

30 Clearing Overview Page Direct Clearing Members Direct Clearing Members have the same duties and are subject to the same requirements as GCMs. However, a DCM may clear only for himself, his clients and for market participants that are part of affiliated companies. This is, for example, the case when a branch of a DCM is registered as a separate market participant Non Clearing Members Non Clearing Members are market participants in trading systems cleared by the clearing house who have no contractual relationship with the clearing house. A Clearing Member of the clearing house carries out their clearing. Eurex does not set any margin requirements for Non Clearing Members; rather, these are set by the GCM, in line with Eurex minimum requirements. Consequently, premiums, fee payments, variation margins, deliveries arising from cash market transactions, deliveries resulting from exercise or assignment of stock options, or delivery notices and assignments of futures contracts on bonds are settled through the GCM/DCM. Non Clearing Members do not need to have an account with a CSD Registered Customers Direct customers of the Clearing Member that do not have a trading license for Eurex or for EEX cooperation products can become Registered Customers to benefit from Client Asset Protection using the Individual Clearing Model. Positions and assets of the RC will be held in segregated accounts at Clearing House level. RCs will be able to monitor their positions and collateral through reports under their own RC ID. A Clearing Member of the clearing house carries out their clearing. For details please refer to Eurex Clearing Circular 092/ Member Product Assignments The member security coordinator assigns product groups as well as individual products to the member s traders and trader sub-groups. Please refer to the Eurex User Manual - System Security for more information on the product assignment function. The Clearing Member is responsible for setting the maximum order quantities for products and product groups for its Non Clearing Members and for its own traders and trader sub-groups by using the Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] window. Please refer to Trading User Guide for more information.

31 Clearing Overview Page Account Types This section describes the account structure in Eurex Clearing AG and its relation with the different types of membership. There are three types of accounts a member can have at the clearing house. These are position, premium and cash/securities accounts Position Accounts The options, futures and cash market trades executed by each member are held separately from other members in the clearing house system. A member's trades are further separated into principal, agent and market maker accounts. The accounts of each Non Clearing Member are associated with a single Clearing Member. For option transactions, each member has two principal accounts and one agent account. Those members who deal in options and are authorized market makers have two principal accounts, one agent account and two market maker accounts. However, in the futures market, each member has two market maker accounts, two principal accounts and one agent account. Principal Accounts Principal accounts comprise the current proprietary business of the Exchange Member. These accounts are designated P1 and P2 and are kept gross. This means within the same options series or futures contract, long as well as short positions are maintained. Long positions are open, exercised, or due positions, which have not yet been settled. Short positions are open or assigned positions for which settlement has not yet taken place. All assigned short positions and all exercised long positions are removed from member accounts in the end-of-day processing of the exercise/assignment day. They are replaced by margined delivery obligations (valid for all agent/principle/market maker accounts). Market Maker Accounts Market maker accounts are made up of the deals, entered into a market maker account, resulting from the acceptance by a member of a market maker's quotes in options or futures. Proprietary orders entered by a market maker in the options market can be posted to the market maker accounts or to the principal accounts. These are designated M1 and M2. M accounts are not available for Eurex/ISE Link products. Market maker accounts are held net, i.e. the position in an option series or a futures contract is either short or long. Corresponding bought and sold positions in the same options series (or in the same futures contracts) are netted. Market maker accounts can show open and exercised long positions when net-long positions are exercised. They can also contain open and assigned short positions that have not yet been settled. As above, all assigned short positions and all exercised long positions are removed from member accounts after delivery or payment for exercises and assignments.

32 Clearing Overview Page 32 Agent Accounts Agent accounts are available to trading members to hold transactions and positions executed on behalf of clients. As default setup, the agent account A1 is assigned to Trading and Clearing Members. The agent accounts (A2 - A9) are available for Clearing Members who either offer the Net Omnibus Solution to their clients or have specifically requested the assignment of the additional accounts to their Member ID. All agent accounts are kept gross. Note that the A9 account is designated as a dedicated Net Omnibus segregated account. As above, all assigned short positions and all exercised long positions are removed from member accounts after delivery or payment for exercises and assignments. The following processing principles apply to the agent accounts: In combination with the A1 account, A2 - A9 accounts allow for the separation of non-segregated agent business from segregated and affiliated agent business. For further information about the A2 - A9 accounts, refer to document X4104 System Overview and Information Manual. Any trades entered with account type G1/G2 accounts results in a position in the A1 account until the trade has been taken up. For a take up by order or take up by transaction, the take up member is able to select any agent account as long as the selected agent account has been assigned to the member ID. For example, a Clearing Member offering the Net Omnibus solution can accept take ups by order/ transaction for any of the nine agent accounts (A1 - A9) plus two proprietary accounts (P1 + P2). Give up by order is only possible for A1 accounts, while give-up by transaction is possible for all agent accounts (A1 - A9). For trades where the member type (determining the range of available agent accounts)/product does not fit to the new agent accounts, the following mapping applies: Available Agent Accounts for Clearing Members Product Destination Account No Agent Accounts Any P1 A1 Any A1 A1 - A9 Options Clearing Corporation Product A1 Mapping Table for Full Trade Using Additional Agent Accounts For EEX products, the value added tax for positions agent accounts is calculated on gross positions as per normal.

33 Clearing Overview Page 33 Using Agent Accounts The usage of the agent accounts depends on the selected Client Asset Protection solution and the internal preferences of the Clearing Member. As outlined above, independent of the Client Asset Protection solution, Clearing Members can request the assignment of additional agent accounts to their Eurex Derivatives Member ID. The table below provides an overview of how the additional accounts must be used depending on the setup applicable: General Clearing Member Setup A Account Usage Collateral Pool Coverage Clearing Member does not offer Net Omnibus solution to any clients Only A1 account A1 = Non-segregated client business Non-segregated collateral pool Clearing Member does not offer Net Omnibus solution Clearing Member has requested assignment of additional agent account to their Eurex derivatives member ID A1 - A9 accounts are available for Eurex derivatives Differentiation of different client types possible, e.g. to differentiate affiliated business A1 - A9 = Nonsegregated client business; accounts can be differentiated as needed by the CM Non-segregated collateral pool Clearing Member offers Net Omnibus segregation A1 - A9 accounts are available for Eurex derivatives A1-A8 = Non- Segregated client business Non-Segregated collateral pool Differentiation of different client types possible, e.g. to differentiate affiliated business A9 = Net Omnibus segregated client business Net Omnibus collateral pool

34 Clearing Overview Page Premium Accounts The clearing house runs a specific internal premium account for options transactions for all currencies for each member account. It posts the premiums of all option transactions executed on the exchange to the premium account that relates to the relevant position account and the corresponding currency. Premium accounts are settled daily. The clearing house communicates the balance of each premium account to the Non Clearing Member and to the Clearing Member who settles the account via the system. Clearing members pay and are liable for their own premiums and those of their Non Clearing Members. The total amounts per currency of all the premium accounts belonging to a Clearing Member are posted to the internal cash accounts overnight Cash/Securities Account For each Clearing Member, Eurex manages internal cash accounts for all currencies to which premiums, fees, margin requirements, cash settlements as well as other cash obligations resulting from the clearing procedure are posted. The daily balances of the Clearing Member currency accounts in a Eurex currency is cleared by debiting (or crediting) the Clearing Member central bank accounts or the central bank accounts of its correspondent bank. For GBP and USD, the debits or credits are performed using the payment banks in the corresponding countries. For transactions in USD performed in EEX, the corresponding CBF cash accounts are used. However, credit balances are only paid to the CM as described above if the clearing house does not require them as security for the cover of the CMs margin liabilities. The clearing house also manages multiple internal collateral accounts for each Clearing Member, which mirror the holding of securities in one of the Clearing Member's collateral accounts at the CSD. EUREX CM ACCOUNTS NCM ACCOUNTS POSITIONS PREMIUMS FEES POSITIONS PREMIUMS FEES PRINCIPAL CLIENTS MARKET MAKER PRINCIPAL CLIENTS MM PRINCIPAL CLIENTS MM PRINCIPAL CLIENTS MM PRINCIPAL CLIENTS MM PRINCIPAL CLIENTS MM CASH/ SECURITIES ACCOUNTS

35 Clearing Overview Page Overview of Member Type and Account Relationships The following diagram shows the member type and collateral account requirement matrix Guarantees The diagram below shows the different types of guarantees that are possible for Eurex members: Margin Clearing Fund Company Capital Cash Securities Cash Securities Cash Securities Company Capital To differentiate between the usage of cash and securities within the different types of guarantees, notations such as margin securities, (clearing) fund cash or capital securities are used. These are referenced with M for margin, F for clearing fund and C for company capital in windows and reports. Interest on Cash margin may be paid on the cash balances of Eurex currencies of all these accounts Margin Clearing Members can cover their margin requirements with securities or cash.

36 Clearing Overview Page Clearing Fund Securities and cash are possible as clearing fund assets. The clearing fund requirement is calculated daily, depending on the risk of the Clearing Member. The margin requirement is used as a measure for the risk of the Clearing Member. Eurex members who participate in the Eurex/ KRX Link need to make an additional contribution to the clearing fund Company Capital Cash, securities and the company capital itself are taken into account when determining the total capital of the member company. The company capital requirement is calculated daily, depending on the risk of the Clearing Member. The Clearing Member margin requirement is used as a scale for the risk Requirement Calculation The total margin requirement of a Clearing Member for the current business day and two average amounts (for n and m business days) are evaluated with the clearing fund margin factor or the company capital margin factor. Consequently, the calculation process results in three evaluated margin amounts. The highest amount of either of the evaluated margin amounts or the respective minimum amount defines the clearing fund or company capital requirement and is compared with the member current clearing fund or company capital contribution. Eurex Market Supervision determines and enters the following parameters for the calculation: Number of business days n and m (not to be greater than one year) Clearing fund margin factor Company capital margin factor Minimum amount for clearing fund contribution (DCM/GCM) Minimum amount for company capital contribution (DCM/GCM) Whether the member participates in the Eurex/KRX Link

37 Clearing Overview Page Cash Transactions Eurex Market Supervision initiates the following transactions as required: Clearing fund call, if the clearing fund contribution is less than the clearing fund requirement. Clearing fund withdrawal if the clearing fund contribution is more than the clearing fund requirement. Company capital call if company capital total is less than the company capital requirement. Company capital withdrawal if the company capital total is more than the company capital requirement. Each cash transaction is accumulated on the level of Clearing Member, currency, cash transaction type and value date. Mapping between different currencies exist and cash transactions are settled in the mapped currency. For each Clearing Member using CCORP as clearing house, the accumulated cash transactions are reported in the raw data report RPTCD310. Closing cash transactions (cash calls or cash withdrawal) are not calculated and therefore not reported in RPTCD310. The collateral reports RPTCD020 CASH AND SECURITY MOVEMENT and SPECIFIC EQUITY COLLATERAL as well as RPTCD031 DAILY CASH AND SECURITIES VALUATION provide the information about cash balances. A summary about the daily cash transactions is available in the report RPTCD009 DAILY CASH TRANSACTIONS. Correspondent banks can also receive the reports RPTCD011 DAILY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR ACCOUNT HOLDER and RPTCD071 MONTHLY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR ACCOUNT HOLDER displaying the resulting cash instructions. The cash balance displayed on the Daily Cash Transaction Overview window is the total of the margin cash balance used to cover margin requirements, the company capital cash balance and clearing fund cash balance. All cash movements including the cash transactions can be reviewed on the report RPTCD010 DAILY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR CLEARING MEMBER, report RPTCD070 MONTHLY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR CLEARING MEMBER and on the Daily Cash Transaction Overview window.

38 Clearing Overview Page Client Asset Protection Eurex Clearing s Client Asset Protection (CAP) solution allows Clearing Members and customers to select different levels of asset protection depending on individual risk-cost profiles. In cooperation with leading market players, a legal concept has been developed that offers the provision of client collateral to Eurex Clearing. In addition, the solution provides segregation for positions as well as for cash and securities collateral Activation of CAP The Client Asset Protection solution of Eurex Clearing for the Individual Clearing Model for NCMs was technically implemented with Eurex Release 13.0 on November 15, The CAP service for the Individual Clearing Model for Registered Customers was activated in November 2012, for details please refer to Eurex Clearing Circular 092/12. The CAP service for the Net Omnibus Clearing Model was activated on January 14, 2013, for details please refer to Eurex Clearing circular 118/ Types of Client Asset Protection Solution Eurex Clearing offers three types of segregation solution: Individual Clearing Model Net Omnibus Clearing Model Existing Elementary Clearing Model Individual Clearing Model for Non Clearing Members and Registered Customers Margin requirements for a given Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer are covered by a dedicated collateral pool which only holds the collateral of one specific Non Clearing Member/ Registered Customer. Net Omnibus Clearing Model Positions and collateral are separated from Clearing Member proprietary positions. Positions are held in a segregated Net Omnibus client account (A9) and/or on the Non Clearing Member account. The margin requirement is calculated on a net level for the Segregated Agent account; should a Non Clearing Member select Net Omnibus segregation, the Non Clearing Member s margin requirement will be added, and the total margin requirement must be covered by the segregated Net Omnibus collateral pool. Existing Solution Existing setup is maintained and Clearing Members use proprietary collateral to cover client (Non Clearing Members, Registered Customers and agent clients) and proprietary business. Portability of positions is possible, depending on the co-operation of the Clearing Member. Protection of client collateral is provided by the Clearing Member. Even where a given Clearing Member offers Client Asset Protection, clients (Non Clearing Members/Registered Customers and agent clients) can decide against segregation.

39 Clearing Overview Page 39 Please refer to the Eurex User Manual - System Overview and Information Manual for more information on Eurex Clearing Segregation Solutions Client Asset Protection Solutions Clearing Members are able to combine different Client Asset Protection solutions, thus Clearing Members active in products cleared by Eurex Clearing can choose between the following setups: Existing solution, i.e. Elementary Clearing Model for all Clearing Member clients (agent clients and Non Clearing Members). Individual Clearing Model for Non Clearing Members/Registered Customers (plus Elementary Clearing Solution for certain Clearing Member clients). Net Omnibus Clearing Model (plus existing solution for certain Clearing Member clients). Net Omnibus Clearing Model and Individual Clearing Model for Non Clearing Members (plus Elementary Clearing Model for certain Clearing Member clients). In the event of a multi-market setup, the following limitations apply: Non Clearing Members which clear through the same Clearing Member in several markets supported by Eurex Clearing will have the same Client Asset Protection for the Individual Clearing Model setup on all markets cleared by the particular Clearing Member. The Net Omnibus Clearing Model is only available for Eurex Transactions and Transactions in EEX cooperation products cleared with Eurex Clearing AG. The model allows Clearing Members located in the United Kingdom (UK) to apply the UK CASS rules in relation to their customers or Non-Clearing Members (NCMs). An NCM that clears through the same Clearing Member in several markets will have to use a separate member ID for the Eurex market to utilize the Net Omnibus Clearing Model. Only the derivatives clearing system allows Clearing Members to distinguish segregated agent clients from non-segregated agent clients. Participation in the General Clearing Member netting for Xetra International Markets may restrict participation in Client Asset Protection on Clearing House level. For further details please refer to the final release notes for CCP The Pool Concept - Introduction The main principle to enable client asset segregation within the Eurex Systems is the multiple pool concept. Currently, one collateral pool grouping multiple external collateral accounts and cash collaterals into one overall collateral balance was maintained in the Eurex System per Eurex Clearing Member. By introducing a pool ID, Clearing Members are able to maintain multiple collateral pools, each assigned to an external securities collateral account and grouping the appropriate cash transactions reflecting the cash collateral balances. Collateral assets, both securities collateral and cash collateral balances, can only be assigned to one collateral pool, as such allowing the Clearing Member to segregate its proprietary collateral assets from its client collateral assets.

40 Clearing Overview Page 40 Furthermore, with the introduction of the enhanced master data and the pool ID, cash payments are segregated The Pool Concept - In Detail The pool ID introduced with the pool concept is, on the one side, used to aggregate collateral according to the selected segregation model. At the same time, the pool ID governs the aggregation of margin requirements also according to the segregation model. A pool has two attributes: The attribute type is used to indicate for which segregation level this pool should be used. The following types are available: Default: Used for proprietary and non-segregated collateral. Omnibus Segregated: Used for Net Omnibus segregated collateral. Fully Segregated: Used for individually segregated NCM/RC collateral. The attribute usage is used to indicate the purpose of the collateral. They can be used to cover margin requirements out of daily business (margin), used to cover clearing fund requirements (clearing fund) and used to cover company capital requirements (company capital). No segregation is offered for usage clearing fund and company capital. Pool of usage clearing fund and company capital are therefore always of type default. For the usage margin, all three pool types ( Default, Omnibus Segregated and Fully Segregated ) are available. As a result a Clearing Member who chooses the existing solution, for example, has in total the maximum of three pools: one default pool per usage ( Clearing Fund, Company Capital and Margin ). In the Eurex Clearing System, pools are mapped with the Clearing Member ID and the beneficiary is displayed in the Owner field. Based on this mapping, the Clearing Member is able to maintain the collateral within the pools. The owner of the collaterals as set up in the system can only inquire collateral data. The Clearing Member is the owner of the default and Net Omnibus pool as defined for system purposes. Since, for the Net Omnibus pool, the ownership of the collateral is not known to Eurex Clearing. Only for pools of the type segregated the system defined owner is the individually segregated Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer. The collateral pools do apply to the margin requirement resulting from Eurex derivative business and additionally to margin requirements out of business where Eurex Clearing is used as clearing house. A pool can have different states: active, pending and marked for deletion. Furthermore, a pool does not need to be assigned to a Central Securities Depository (CSD) account since cash only is also accepted. The only exception is the margin default pool of a Clearing Member. For all pools other than those marked for deletion, it is possible to deposit and withdraw collateral.

41 Clearing Overview Page Maintenance of Collateral Pools Members can obtain information about the collateral pools via the Collateral Pool Overview window in the Clearing GUI. The collateral pools in the Eurex System are maintained by Eurex Market Supervision based on the instructions of the Clearing Member. The collateral pool relation master data are used to define the mapping between member accounts and collateral pools. In this context the related member is called Client - this is the Exchange Member to whom the positions belong. For instance, in case of an individually segregated pool, the Client is the Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer. This mapping defines the aggregation of margin requirements and cash transactions. For a Clearing Member offering segregation to his agent clients, the following mapping of agent accounts and collateral pools applies: Segregation Level Offered to Clearing Member Agent Clients No Segregation Net Omnibus Clearing Member Account Holding the Positions Mapped To A1-A9 mapped to Default Pool A9 mapped to Net Omnibus Pool Relation Between Agent Accounts and Collateral Pools for CM Offering Segregation to their Agent Clients Collateral Processing The processing of securities collateral deposit instructions is not different to that prior to the introduction of the Client Asset Protection. The processing of deposit and withdrawal instructions is described in the following sections. Note that the following sections outline the processing for all possible types of collateral Collaterals Pledged on Xemac New for Eurex Release 14.0: The ISIN based representation of collaterals pledged on Xemac is replaced by a claim amount based representation. On Xemac members can enter a claim amount to fulfill the margin requirements. Xemac itself selects the securities. Eurex just receives deposit/withdrawal instructions from Xemac which only contain the claim amount. Xemac users must maintain their collateral by adjusting their claim amount on Xemac. This is used to update the evaluated balance on Eurex. Xemac collaterals cannot be maintained on the Clearing GUI. The deposit instruction is processed automatically by Eurex. The received deposit request from Xemac is checked and if the validation succeeds, the corresponding collateral balance and the evaluated balance are updated to the new amount.

42 Clearing Overview Page 42 A withdrawal instruction requires an additional confirmation step. In this case Xemac sends a request containing the new claim amount. Eurex needs to check whether the remaining collateral will be sufficient to cover the minimum requirement or the margin requirement. As a result, either an approval or a rejection is sent back to Xemac. If the request is approved, the corresponding collateral balance and the evaluated balance are updated automatically. For each deposit and withdrawal requests a new collateral transaction entry is created. They can be monitored in the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window. For a successful collateral adjustment this entry shows the state CF (confirmed) to reflect the new balances. Otherwise the request is blocked. Withdrawal requests might be blocked because the remaining amount would not cover the minimum requirements or because Market Supervision has to approve the transaction manually Collateral Deposits New for Eurex Release 14.0: Cash collateral transactions can be entered for all pool types; i.e. the Net Omnibus pools can now be used for those transactions as well. CSD accounts for securities collateral are mapped in the Eurex System to the Clearing Member member ID. Furthermore, different CSD collateral accounts are used for the usages Clearing Fund, Company Capital and Margin. With the pool concept, the securities collateral accounts are related to a collateral pool in the Eurex System. The securities collateral balances are still maintained per CSD account. Taking this into consideration, together with the fact that one CSD account can only be assigned to one collateral pool, the Eurex System automatically maps the incoming security collateral deposit transaction to the correct pool using the account information contained in the confirmation received from the collateral location/csd. Incoming securities collateral transactions are still credited near-time to the respective collateral pool in the Eurex System. To deposit cash collateral, the Clearing Member can maintain the Permanent Cash Balance for their default collateral pool using the Collateral Pool Overview window in the Clearing GUI. The currencies Euro, CHF, GBP, USD are accepted by Eurex Clearing as cash collateral. However, it must be deposited from cash accounts that Clearing Members have communicated to Eurex Clearing as relevant cash settlement accounts. As of 10 October 2012, the procedure for maintaining the cash balance in cash collateral pools for segregated clients with pool type Omnibus Segregated and Fully Segregated has changed so that it will no longer be possible to use the PCB functionality. All cash deposited in a segregated pool will remain until its withdrawal is requested by the Clearing Member. Therefore, cash in the segregated pools will not be automatically returned to the Clearing Members the next day in the morning (based on the previous end-of-day processing). However, the change in maintaining the cash balance of cash collateral pools for segregated clients will not disable the PCB functionality in the Clearing GUI. Clearing Members will still have access to this functionality in the system, but the values entered for the PCB will be ignored and no booking (i.e. deposit or withdrawal) will be initiated by the system.

43 Clearing Overview Page 43 Therefore, all cash will remain in the segregated pools until it is withdrawn by the Clearing Member, regardless of the values entered for the PCB. The new procedure applies to all currencies (Swiss franc, euro, British pound, U.S. dollar) in segregated client pools. The general processing of (intraday) margin calls remains unchanged. Therefore, (intraday) margin calls are issued against the Clearing Member default pool regardless of which pool caused the under-collateralisation. As a result, cash collateral deposits to meet the (intraday) margin call are credited in the Eurex System in favour of the default pool of the Clearing Member unless a Clearing Member has specifically requested (via Eurex Market Supervision or via Eurex Clearing GUI) to credit cash collateral to any of the individually segregated collateral pools Collateral Withdrawals New for Eurex Release 14.0: Cash collateral transactions can be entered for all pool types; i.e. the Net Omnibus pools can now be used for those transactions as well. Withdrawals of security collaterals are triggered by the Clearing Member using the Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] window in the Clearing GUI. The Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] window displays the pool ID in order to withdraw securities collateral for a specific collateral pool. Cash collateral which has been deposited for the default collateral pool is automatically released as long as there is still sufficient collateral available. If the Permanent Cash Balance is used, the amount of cash collateral deposited can be reduced by amending the Permanent Cash Balance in the Collateral Pool Overview window. Cash Collateral deposited for the Net Omnibus and individually segregated pool will not automatically be re-paid to the Clearing Member during the overnight processing. Clearing Members can instead instruct the withdrawal of cash collateral via Eurex Market Supervision or via Eurex Clearing GUI. Before any withdrawal request (for securities and cash collateral) is processed on external accounts, the Eurex System checks whether there is still sufficient collateral available after the collateral release. To enable the deposit of securities collateral, a CSD account must be assigned to a pool using the Collateral Account Overview [Modified] window in the Clearing GUI. The assignment is done by Eurex Market Supervision based on the data provided by the Clearing Member. A CSD account can only be assigned to one pool. Once a CSD account is set up, securities collateral can be transferred into the collateral account. To delete a pool, the collateral balance must first be cleaned up. Thus, all collaterals assigned to this pool must be withdrawn and transferred into a new CSD account. After all balances are zero, the CSD accounts can be deleted by Eurex Market Supervision.

44 Clearing Overview Page Use of Windows and Reports The effective use of Eurex Clearing windows and reports, and understanding their availability, requires knowledge of the various memberships (GCM, DCM, NCM, RC) and account types. These are described in section 2.1 Clearing Accounts Structure on page 28. The As of Date that appears in each Eurex report is described in section As of Date on page Types of Membership The type of membership determines which inputs and inquiries a member can perform, and which information is displayed on the screens and reports. General and Direct Clearing Members only have access to read the data related to the accounts of their Non Clearing Members/ Registered Customers. To access information on its accounts, a Clearing Member must enter its member ID in the Clearing Member and the (Exchange) Member fields. To look up the information on a specific Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer, the Clearing Member must enter the member ID of the Non Clearing Member/Registered Customer in the (exchange) member field. Non Clearing Members have access to information concerning their own accounts only. Therefore, windows and reports provide information concerning the NCM itself or the relationship with its respective Clearing Member. There are further access restrictions on windows and reports for such Non Clearing Members; e.g. NCMs cannot see all field areas on some reports and have no access to some other windows and reports. In the description of windows and reports, those for which the Non Clearing Members have no access to are explained. NCMs that are not Eurex Exchange Members do not have direct access to windows and reports from Eurex Clearing AG. Corresponding reports are sent to their CMs for further distribution. Registered Customers are able to monitor their positions and collateral through reports. If a member s OCCClearingAllowed flag is checked (on the Cooperations tab of the Member General Information window), they are able to clear their, and their NCM s, Eurex/ISE Linkrelated positions at Eurex As of Date The As of Date is the data used in reports to describe how actual the information is. The As of Date refers to the date of the last overnight batch processing, i.e. the previous business day. The information contained in a report is as of the previous business day. When reading the report descriptions, it is important to remember that data like of today or of previous day refer to the As of Date and not to the day the report is made available.

45 Clearing Overview Page Clearing Process and Feasible Transactions The following charts provide a summary of the various types of transactions processed by the clearing house. The charts describe individual activities and the time when these become effective in the clearing process. Each chart covers one of the following areas: Transaction Process Chart: Eurex EEX Positions management X X Exercise, assignment and physical delivery of options Notification and allocation for futures on bonds X X Settlement of cash settled futures X X Settlement of cash market transactions X Exercise and assignment of options on futures X X Settlement of cash settled options X Settlement of futures contracts on energy (EEX) X Premiums and fees X X Margin X X Daily settlement X X Trade transfer (Give-up trades) X X Historical trade transfers X X The clearing process is divided into the following eight phases: A - Pre-Trading Period B - Opening Period (this phase consists of pre-opening and netting) C - Trading Period D - Post-Trading Period 1 E - Post-Trading Restricted Period F - Batch Processing G - Overnight (for Eurex/ISE Link products) H - Pre-Trading Period + 1 (for Eurex/ISE Link products) 1. The following optional product states may be scheduled between product states Post-Trading Full and Post-Trading Restricted: Post-Trading Late1 (POST1), where it is intended to prevent entry of OTC trades. All other system features supported in product state Post-Trading Full are intended to be available. Post-Trading Late2 (POST2), where it is intended to prevent entry of give-up/take-up transactions. All other system features supported in product state POST1 are intended to be available.

46 Clearing Overview Page 46 In each of these periods, certain transactions are permitted and processed. Certain processes in the functional areas "Exercise, Assignment and Delivery", as well as "Daily Settlement", are carried out manually and are subject to a different schedule, since they cannot be unequivocally associated with periods of the clearing process. The Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual describes precisely at which time these activities must take place in order to be processed by the exchange Position Management Processing Steps Day x-1 Day x Day x+1 Day x+2 A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Non Clearing Member (NCM) Entry of Trade Adjustments Clearing Member (CM) Entry of Trade Adjustments NCM Entry of Position Adjustment Transfer between own accounts Close out of Positions CM Entry of Position Adjustment Transfer between own accounts Close out of positions Position transfers between various members Request of NCM Trader s confirmation Transfer by Eurex A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing

47 Clearing Overview Page Exercise and Assignment of Stock Options This section does not apply to EEX. Processing Steps Day x A B C D E F Entry of exercise/adjustments Clearing Member Non Clearing Member Assignment by Eurex Advice of assignment Report Inquiry Screen Eurex system sends delivery instructions to CCP Note: Exercise on Day x. A Pre-Trading Phase B Opening Phase C Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase F Batch Processing The handling of deliveries for stock options, share settled as well as cash settled, is performed by the CCP. Information about outstanding deliveries is available there.

48 Clearing Overview Page Exercise and Assignment of Stock Options (Eurex/ISE Link) This section does not apply to EEX. Processing Steps Day x A B C D E F Entry of exercise/adjustments Clearing Member Non Clearing Member Assignment by OCC Advice of assignment Report Inquiry Screen Note: Exercise on Day x. A Pre-Trading Phase B Opening Phase C Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase F Batch Processing Only Eurex/ISE Link cash settled contracts on their expiration day are assigned in the Post Restricted Trading Period. All others are assigned during the start phase of the following business day. For Eurex/ISE Link cash settled contracts on the last trading day of the contract, exercise/ assignment is processed as per section Exercise and Assignment of Stock Options on page 47.

49 Clearing Overview Page Notification and Allocation for Futures on Bonds Processing Steps Day x Clearing Members holding short positions issue delivery notifications for Government Bonds Allocation by Eurex Advice on Allocation A B C D E F Report Inquiry Screen Eurex system sends delivery instructions to the CCP Note: Exercise on Day x. A Pre-Trading Phase B Opening Phase C Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase F Batch Processing The handling of deliveries for futures on bonds is performed by the CCP. Information about outstanding deliveries is available there. Note: The processing steps displayed in the diagram represent product states and refer to Eurex Circular 167/06 for the detailed time schedule of the process Settlement of Cash Settled Futures Processing Steps Day x Day x+1 A B C D E F A B C D E F Entry of orders in the expiring futures contract Entry of trade adjustments in the expiring futures contract Clearing Member Non Clearing Member Entry of position close-out in the expiring futures contract Clearing Member Non Clearing Member Determination of open positions for final settlement by Eurex Determination of final settlement price Calculation of cash settlement amount Cash settlement until A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Period E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing

50 Clearing Overview Page Exercise and Assignment of Options on Futures Processing Steps Day x A B C D E F Entry of exercise/adjustments Clearing Member Non Clearing Member Assignment by Eurex Creation of Eurex position Advice of assignment Report Inquiry Screen Note: Exercise on Day x. A Pre-Trading Phase B Opening Phase C Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase F Batch Processing Settlement of Cash Settled Options (other than Options on Stocks) This section does not apply to EEX and to Eurex options on stocks, product type OSTK. Processing Steps Day x Day x+1 Day x+2 Day x+n A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Entry of exercise/adjustment Clearing Member Non Clearing Member Assignment by Eurex Posting of the cash settled amount to the cash account of the Clearing Member Advice on assignment Report Inquiry screen To be settled until Note: Exercise on day x; Product with delivery period n (n=number of days) A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing

51 Clearing Overview Page Settlement of Futures Contracts on Energy This section applies to energy futures. Processing Steps Day x Day x+1 Day x+2 Day x+n Entry of orders in the expiring energy futures contract A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Entry of trade adjustments in the expiring energy futures contract Entry of position close-out (EFP-Trades) in the expiring energy futures contract Determination of open positions for final settlement by Eurex Reporting of open positions Inquiries about outstanding deliveries Manual delivery margin calculation by Eurex Report Inquiry screen Note: Exercise on day x; Product with delivery period n (n=number of days) A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing

52 Clearing Overview Page Premiums and Fees Processing Steps Day x-1 Day x Day x+1 Day x+n I. Product with delivery period n A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Booking of the premium debits and credits resulting from a trade Booking of the net premium to the Clearing Member s cash account To be settled until II. Fees Booking of fees for transactions Booking of fees for transaction adjustments Booking of fees for position transfers within a Member s account from one Member to another Member Booking of fees for exercise Booking of fees for exercise adjustments Booking of the accumulated fees of the previous month on the cash account of the Clearing Member on the third trading day of the following month To be settled until A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing Margin Processing Steps Day x-1 Day x Day x+1 A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Calculation of the margin requirement Production of the margin report Margin requirement report available Coverage of the margin requirement A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing

53 Clearing Overview Page Daily Settlement Processing Steps Day x Day x+1 Day x+n I. Processing of collateral A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Eurex processes the collateral pledged to CSD security deposit by Clearing Member Eurex calculates the margin requirement Request to release pledged security Release of securities by Eurex CSD transfers security release II. Cash settlement at Central Bank CM makes cash available on Clearing Bank account in Eurex currency Eurex debits the CM CB account by the margin requirement in the CM currency To be settled at CB until A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing Trade Transfers (Give-up Trades) Processing Steps Day x-1 Day x Day x+1 A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Entry of pre-designated or designated trade with account G1 or G2 Historical trade with accounts A1-A9 Designation of a give-up trade (Give-up Overview and Give-Up windows) Posting a give-up trade in the executor account Deleting a give-up trade Taking up a give-up trade (take-up) Rejecting a give-up trade A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing

54 Clearing Overview Page Historical Trade Transfers Processing Steps Day x-2 Day x-1 Day x Day x+1 A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Match of a trade prior to HiTT Entry of a HiTT for accounts A1, P1, P2 Note: Based on trades on day x-1 A Pre-Trading Phase D Post-Full-Trading Phase B Opening Phase E Post-Restricted-Trading Phase C Trading Phase F Batch Processing Clearing Procedure for Eurex/ISE Link Products The Eurex Clearing/OCC clearing procedure is as follows: (1) All orders entered by Eurex members will be forwarded via a US broker/dealer and the ISE, where they will be processed and forwarded to the OCC. (2) OCC calculate the resulting positions and forward them, in the form of the original trades, to Eurex. Note: Exercises and assignments relating to ETF and share settled stock options will be sent to Eurex Clearing AG in the end-of-day stream, then published on the next business day. (3) Eurex Members are then able to maintain their trades and positions using the Clearing GUI. (4) Exercises and trade and position adjustments are forwarded to the OCC by the Eurex System Eurex will have access to all position accounts at the OCC in order to monitor every transaction real-time. Eurex Members must enter all their Eurex/ISE Link trade/position adjustments on Clearing GUI. Note, however, that M accounts are not available for Eurex/ISE Link products. Agent Positions transferred via the Eurex/ISE Link to Eurex are always assigned to the A1 account. Furthermore, any clearing activity (give-up, position transfer, etc.) via the link is restricted to the A1 account.

55 Clearing Overview Page Position Keeping of Options and Futures This section applies to Eurex and EEX Purpose of Position Keeping The position keeping of options and futures contracts enables members to inquire their current positions, enter adjustments to the day's trades (trade adjustments), and to enter adjustments to positions already in an account (position adjustments). The Eurex or EEX rules and regulations explain the limitations on trade and position adjustments. The parties involved in the trade receive the trade execution confirmation trade immediately on the screen and the respective position is posted to the relevant position account (proprietary, market maker or agent account) of each member 1. When the position is posted, a back office transaction is produced and sent to the parties involved in the posted trade. On the day when an NCM changes his Clearing Member (this may be a GCM or a DCM), the new Clearing Member does not receive the member full position transfer messages for the NCM. The new Clearing Member can obtain the trade information by either analyzing report RPTCB010/RAWCB010 or by placing a request for the Historical Trade Confirmations. For trade and position adjustments (trade transfer, trade separation and position transfer), the clearing house debits a transaction fee in the corresponding currency to the Clearing Member, which is posted to the relevant fee account. For further details, please refer to the section 2.8 Premiums, Fees and Daily Variation Margin on page 90. The Options Clearing Corporation (OCC) product and contract ID structure differs from the Eurex ID structure. Therefore, when transactions are received from OCC, OCC product and contract IDs are mapped to Eurex product IDs (and vice versa). This translates the OCC/ISE product/series information into Eurex product/series information. Mapping is also used when instructions are sent from the Eurex System back to OCC. Furthermore, the ISE Trade ID is displayed in the OriginOrdID field of the Eurex position transaction records, while the OCC TranID is displayed in the OriginTradID field. 1. For Eurex/ISE Link trades, members receive a trade execution confirmation as soon as possible after the trade arrives at Eurex and is booked to the relevant position account.

56 Clearing Overview Page Information on Position Balance and Movements Exchange members can inquire and alter their positions and position movements during the day, but alterations can only be made until the start of the post-trading-restricted period. The Position Overview window allows members to see the daily position movements and the current positions in an options series or a futures contract. From the Position Overview window, the user can call the Position Detail Overview window. Starting from the initial position, this window shows the position movements on a transaction level. This window also shows the resulting positions. The position balance at the start of the overnight batch processing, as well as all preceding position movements, are documented on the following reports: RPTCB020 POSITION SUMMARY, RPTCB021 POSITION/ACTIVE TRD SUMMARY, RPTCB010 POSITION DETAIL and RPTCB011 STD AND FLX CNTR DLY TRANSACTN. Trade closing errors occur whenever a trader enters a closing trade instruction into the system and the principal or agent account does not show a sufficient number of open positions in this option series or futures contract. The contracts exceeding the number of open positions (minus pending give-up trades) are converted into an opening trade. The new opening trade, which is shown as a trade closing error, corresponds to the number of contracts that could not be liquidated. This system-generated correction is shown in RPTCB120 MEMBER EXCEPTION - PART A: POSITIONS REPORT. Part I of this report contains a list of transactions that are adjusted because of trade closing errors. Trade closing errors are also shown in the Position Detail Overview window and in the RPTCB010 POSITION DETAIL and RPTCB011 STD AND FLX CNTR DLY TRANSACTN reports.

57 Clearing Overview Page Trade Adjustments Trade adjustments can be entered in active series for same-day transactions during the trading period and the post-trading full period. For historical trade transfers, trade adjustments are also possible during the pre-trading and opening periods. The same rules apply to trades imported from other exchanges. The reference date for historical trade adjustments is the TradDate given while uploading the trades to Eurex and not the original trade date. Clearing members can only perform trade adjustments for their own trades, not those of their NCMs. However, they are informed of adjustments made by their NCMs via the back office interface. Members can carry out the following types of trade adjustments: Trade separations Open or close adjustments Trade account transfers Historical trade transfers Changes to text attributes All trade adjustments available in the Eurex System, including give-up/take-up, are also available for ISE trades. Give-up/take-up, however, is only available if both give-up and take-up member are Eurex Members with appropriate OCC product assignments. The Eurex KOSPI Product cannot be exercised/assigned and the trading of flexible options, automatic series generation and position transfers will be disabled. Over-the-counter (OTC) block trading and all trade adjustment types, however, will be available. To enter individual adjustments, the Position Detail Overview window is used. This window shows a list of all the transactions available for adjustment. By selecting the desired transaction, the user automatically enters the appropriate window: either the Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation window for trade separations or the Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer and O/C Adjustment window for open or close adjustments and for trade account transfers. Historical trade transfers from the previous business day are performed directly from the Position Detail Overview window. The Eurex System processes trade adjustments in two steps. In the first step, a transaction is generated that reverses the original transaction. The second step is an adjusted transaction, which is then re-booked. The Eurex System allows up to 49,999 corrections of one trade. The system rejects adjustments that would lead to new errors. Pending give-up trades cannot be adjusted or exercised. An adjustment or exercise can only be made after the designation is deleted. Trade adjustments are possible for on-exchange trades, OTC Block trades, OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFP trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, OTC EFS, EFPI trades, EBI multilateral trades and legs of strategy trades. Reversed Trades cannot be adjusted.

58 Clearing Overview Page Trade Separation On the Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation window, a member can split one trade into several smaller ones. Valid account types for trade separations are A1 - A9, P1 and P2. On the Position Detail Overview window, the member selects the adjustment type to be performed. A list of available trades for that particular contract is displayed showing the transaction ID. After selecting a trade, the Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation window is displayed. On this window, the member is able to split the original trade into several smaller ones. The values of the trades after separation must add up to the total of the original trade. The trade is then rebooked and the original trade is reversed. A parent adjustment cannot be adjusted further; this is indicated by the adjustment/reverse indication (A/R), where A indicates an adjusted record, R indicates a reversal record and N indicates that this record is neither adjusted nor reversed. Further adjustments are solely feasible to records with an adjustment/reverse indication of N. The indication if an adjustment is a historical one is displayed in a separate column (HIT), which is different from HiTT (Historical Trade Transfer). An "H" indicates a historical trade and a blank field indicates a trade from the current business day. The example below shows the use of the suffix ID to reference each transaction adjustment. A trade is entered with transaction ID "123456". The relating suffix ID is "00000" as no adjustments are performed on this trade so far. This is also reflected in the adjustment/reversal indicator, which is set to "N". This trade is displayed as follows: Contract TranID Suffix ID Tran Typ O/C Long Parent SuffixID A/R HIT FGBL DEC Trade O N This trade is separated into three transactions. After that, the trade history shows, for each step, the original transaction ID and the suffix ID indicating each adjustment in sequence. The reversal trade is marked with suffix "1". The newly inserted trades have the suffix IDs "2" to "8". All resulting transactions refer back to the original transaction via the parent suffix ID. Since the original transaction is changed, its adjustment/reversal indicator is set to "A". Contract TranID Suffix ID Tran Typ O/C Long Parent SuffixID A/R HIT FGBL DEC Trade O A FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation O R O N

59 Clearing Overview Page 59 Contract TranID Suffix ID Tran Typ O/C Long Parent SuffixID A/R HIT FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation O N O N O N O N O N O N

60 Clearing Overview Page Trade Open/Close Adjustment On the Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer and O/C Adjustment windows, to change the Open/Close Flag for a specific transaction, members can perform a trade open/close adjustment, i.e. a member can adjust an opening trade into a closing trade and vice-versa. Also, opening trades that have been highlighted as trade closing errors can be corrected on this window. Adjustments that would lead to new errors are rejected by the system. The adjusted trades display a suffix ID as described for trade separation. Continuing from the above trade separation example, the O/C Flag is changed on one of the trades. When performing this adjustment, the original transaction is reversed by inserting a counter-trade with the next free suffix ID (In this case "00009"). For the insertion of the new updated transaction the suffix ID is simply increased. Both transactions contain the suffix ID of the original transaction in the parent suffix ID field. The adjustment indicator is changed to "A", as this transaction has been changed and cannot be further adjusted. Contract TranID Suffix ID Tran Typ O/C Long Parent SuffixID A/R HIT FGBL DEC Trade O A FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Separation O R O A O N O N O N O N O N

61 Clearing Overview Page 61 Contract TranID Suffix ID Tran Typ O/C Long Parent SuffixID A/R HIT FGBL DEC Trade Separation FGBL DEC Trade Open/ Close Adjustment FGBL DEC Trade Open/ Close Adjustment O N O R C N Trade Account Transfer On the Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer and O/C Adjustment windows, members can transfer same day transactions to another position account. However, this transaction is only possible within their own position accounts. The re-booking of a trade to a market maker account is not possible. Transferred trades display a modified suffix ID as described for Trade Separation. For trade account transfers, two cash transactions are created in the Eurex System and booked to the internal cash accounts of the Clearing Member. The first cash transaction corrects the cash balance related to the position account which was originally to the trade; the other cash transaction is the correction of the cash balance related to the position account which will hold the transaction after the transfer is completed.

62 Clearing Overview Page Historical Trade Transfers (HiTT) A historical trade transfer is the result of the transfer of existing trades from the last two business days to the current business day. Members can enter a historical trade transfer for their trades on the T+2 day. There are no HiTTs possible for the product on the first business day after its product holiday. Historical trade transfers are not possible for the Eurex KOSPI Product. In order for a HiTT to be carried out, the following conditions must be met: The trade must have been executed within the last two business day. The trade must exist in one of the following accounts: A1 - A9, P1 or P2. A HiTT is not valid for a trade within market maker accounts, M1 or M2. The trade concerned must NOT have the give-up status Undesignated. The trade concerned must NOT be the result of a previous HiTT. The trade concerned must NOT be the result of a previous historical give-up. The trade must NOT concern a series or contract that has expired (futures and options). The trade concerned must be available for further adjustments and NOT already adjusted. A sufficient number of positions must exist so that the entire existing trade can be subject to a HiTT.

63 Clearing Overview Page Give-up and Take-up Trades [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: Non Clearing Members can give up trades using the P1 and P2 account. Give-up trades which have not reached the state Take-Up Accepted or Rejected at the end of the day will be re-allocated on the next day. Members are able to give-up trades using the Give-up Overview [Modified] window. The give-up function allows members to transfer trades to other members, requiring the receiving member (and the respective Clearing Member) to accept or reject the give-up. When feeding trades from the global clearing link some designated give-ups (trading on the G2 account) may be designated to a non Eurex member. If a trade with an unidentifiable take-up member is encountered it is processed as a pre-designated G1 style transaction. All further processing of the give-up must take place after the import on the Eurex System. Therefore a designated give-up may end up on a G1 account instead of the wrongly (because of the nonexisting Eurex member) intended G2 account. Non Clearing Members are able to give-up trades via their proprietary accounts P1 and P2. Giveup trades from those accounts can only be taken up into the agent accounts A1-A9. Only transactions that originated on the trading day (current give-up) or the previous business day (historical give-up) may be designated. The acceptance of transferred trades is performed in the Take-up Overview window and the Take-up Maintenance window. It is not possible to giveup a closing transaction. All give-up and take-up transactions require the acceptance of the respective Clearing Member. Clearing Members must accept the give-ups and take-ups of their Non Clearing Members. Depending on the settings in the Member Relationship Overview window, acceptance is performed either automatically or manually. If a give-up trade is not fully processed at the end of the day and has not reached the state Take-Up Accepted or Rejected it will be re-allocated as a historical give-up on the next day; i.e. the state and the trade information are recovered for further processing. If the give-up status can not be recovered, it is set to U (undesignated). Exceptions: The respective contract does not mature on the trade day (t=0). The respective trade was entered on t=0. No capital adjustment is taking place for the respective product. The respective position is larger than or equal to the number of designated contracts. This might not be the case if short positions have been reduced due to an assignment or if a member position transfer was processed. As a result no manual re-allocation will be necessary for not fully processed give-ups from t-1. Give-up and take-up Clearing Members are able to inquire into (pending) trades that are designated for give-up or take-up. After a trade is given up to another member, the status of the transaction is marked with status G for reference. The trade is not transferred until the give-up Clearing Member accepts the give-up and the appointed take-up Exchange Member and his

64 Clearing Overview Page 64 Clearing Member accept or take-up the trade. The transaction receives the status T for takeup after both the take-up Clearing Member and the take-up Exchange Member accept the trade. The suffix ID (as mentioned above) is adjusted by 1 to refer to the reversal trade that is transferred and by 2 to refer to the take-up trade. A historical give-up and take-up is not possible for the first business day after a product holiday, but has to be performed on the product holiday itself Position Adjustment Transaction adjustments for same day business lead to immediate adjustments on the position accounts of the members. Corrections can also be carried out for already existing positions. The user can enter position closing adjustments, position account type adjustments, and position transfers between members into the system. Position closing adjustments are possible during the product states Pre-Trading, Trading, Post- Trading Full (incl. Post-Trading Late1 and Post-Trading Late2). Closed positions cannot be reversed into open positions. Position close outs can be uploaded in bulk using the Position Close Out Bulk Load window, accessible via the Upload Close Out... button on the Position Overview window. Classic position transfers between different members (no market maker positions) are allowed from the pre-trading until the end of the post-trading-full period. However, the actual adjustment is performed in the pre-batch assignment process or during batch processing. Real-time position transfers between different members (no market maker positions) are allowed from the pre trading until the end of the post-trading late1 period. However, the actual adjustment is performed as soon as all concerned parties approve the transfer. Exercised or assigned positions cannot be transferred. Position transfers can be uploaded in bulk using the Position Transfer Bulk Load window, accessible via the Upload Pos. Transf. button on the Position Overview window. As with trade adjustments, these corrections lead to an immediate adjustment of the corresponding positions. Position transfers between different members (no market maker positions) are allowed from the pre-trading until the end of the post-trading-full period. However, the actual adjustment is performed in the pre-batch assignment process or during batch processing. Real-time position transfers are allowed between different members, and are executed as soon as all concerned parties approve the transfer. Position Transfers are only available for Eurex/ISE Link trades if the source and destination member are Eurex Members with the assignment of the respective OCC product. Position adjustments are not possible for trades in the Eurex KOSPI Product. The RPTCB030 POSITION TRANSFER OVERVIEW REPORT lists the details of partial position transfer transactions for a member. The RPTCB120 MEMBER EXCEPTION - POSITIONS REPORT lists all unsuccessful position transfers, that is, those that are manually deleted or have insufficient approvals or insufficient positions.

65 Clearing Overview Page 65 Note: The features of account transfer, complete position transfer and full to agent account transfer are only supported for Eurex. The feature partial position transfer is supported for members and Eurex.

66 Clearing Overview Page Position Closing Adjustments In accordance with Eurex Conditions for Trading, section 3.1. Types of Orders and Quotes, paragraph 3, orders must be identified upon their entry as either orders as principal or on behalf of customer accounts and, for purposes of recording them, as opening or closing transactions. Because positions on the A and P accounts are not netted automatically, high numbers of open positions can be built on both the long and short side when orders are routinely recorded with the To open indicator. To provide a correct open interest reporting, the member accounts must reflect the true open position. Eurex therefore offers various trade and position adjustment features in order to adjust positions: Adjusting Open Positions: Accumulated positions can be reduced by: Recording a new trade as a closing transaction. Amending a trade using a Trading Close Adjustment. Carrying out a position closing adjustment to reduce the open long- and short- positions equally. Adjusting Closing Positions: An open position can be adjusted using the provided close out functionality on the Position Overview screen. This reduces the long and short side of the position equally. A distinction is made in the Eurex System between cost-free and fee-liable position closing adjustments, as follows: Cost-free Position Closing Adjustments: Close out of option positions (with the exceptions of options based on futures). Close out of futures and future-based options within the zero cost quantity range. Fee-liable Position Closing Adjustments: Futures and future-based options exceeding the zero cost quantity.

67 Clearing Overview Page 67 Zero Cost Quantity (ZCQ): Zero Cost Quantity is the potential number of contracts that can be closed out without late closing fees being charged. Trades Done On The Actual Trade Date (t): The Zero Cost Quantity is valid from 13:30 CET on t until 13:30 CET on t +1. From 13:30 CET until end-of-day on the trade date it is called Current ZCQ and is calculated as follows: Current Zero Cost Quantity = trades to open + trades booked to open after trade closing error + take-ups to open + trades booked to open after take-up closing error +/- trade account transfers for trades to open + trade to open adjustments - trade to close adjustments - current give-ups which were taken up - position closing adjustments. From start of the day on t+1 until 13:30 CET: The ZCQ is called Previous ZCQ and is calculated as follows: Previous Zero Cost Quantity = Remaining ZCQ from previous day if > 0, else 0 - historical give-ups which were taken up - historical trade transfers 1 of trades of the previous business day + futures positions created after exercise of options on futures + historical take ups - position closing adjustments. Within the Position Adjustment - Close Out and Position Adjustment - Account Transfer windows, the current and previous zero cost quantity is shown. If the member wishes to close out more contracts than available within the zero cost quantity, an additional window is displayed requesting confirmation. Position close outs can be uploaded in bulk using the Position Close Out Bulk Load window, accessible via the Upload Close Out... button on the Position Overview window Member Internal Position Adjustment Members can carry out the following types of adjustments in the Position Adjustment - Close Out and Position Adjustment - Account Transfer windows: Position adjustments for liquidation purposes. Position transfers between member position accounts. Positions in an options series or a futures contract can only be liquidated if those series or contracts have open long and open short positions that are not currently designated as pending give-up trades. 1. Only Historical Trade Transfers (HiTT) on t+1 are considered.

68 Clearing Overview Page Position Transfer between different Members The Position Transfer Overview window allows a member to confirm/cancel transfer positions to another member. All members concerned must agree to the transfer. Member position transfers are possible using any combination of P1, P2 and agent accounts for the source and destination accounts. Members can transfer positions via the real-time position transfer facility, which enables positions to be transferred real-time, or the classic position transfer, where positions are transferred during the state change to post-restricted. Appropriate: Classic position transfer transaction types are '106' (Partial Member Transfer) and '107' (Partial Position Transfer with Cash Amount) Real-time position transfer transaction types are 306 (Real-Time Position Transfer) and 307 (Real-Time Position Transfer With Cash). For position transfers with cash, members can, depending on their RAL settings, select whether to process the transfer using the four-eye principle. That is, when an initiator chooses to enter/ approve the transfer of their positions, depending on their RAL settings, an Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the transfer. Position transfers can be uploaded in bulk using the Position Transfer Bulk Load window, accessible via the Upload Pos. Transf. button on the Position Overview window. When a member enters a position transfer, the system issues a transaction number. This transaction number must be communicated to the other parties involved in the transaction as they must enter it into the system to indicate their acceptance. After all parties have agreed to the transfer, each member still has time, until the end of the post-full-trading period, for classic position transfers only, to cancel the request of transfer and consequently cancel its acceptance. This withdrawal is shown to the involved parties in RPTCB120 MEMBER EXCEPTION - POSITIONS REPORT, as are any deleted position transfers. Position transfers cannot be entered or cancelled in the post-restricted-trading period. Members can instruct Eurex to transfer all or part of their open positions to another member. This transaction is carried out as described above. The transfer type partial position transfer with cash amount on the existing Position Transfer Entry window allows the transfer of positions and related cash amounts between different members. The Cash Amount and Orig Trade Price fields on the Position Transfer Entry window deals for this purpose. The corresponding transaction types 107 (Partial Position Transfer with Cash Amount) and 307 (Real-Time Position Transfer With Cash) enable members to use a standard Eurex function to transfer a position and a related cash amount. The associated cash amount can be positive or negative. A positive amount indicates a debit transfer source; a negative amount indicates a credit transfer source. This means that if the initiating member enters a positive amount, a debit is associated on his side and the destination member receives this amount. Partial position transfers with cash amount can be entered and confirmed during the following trading phases: pre-trading, trading, fast market and post-trading full. The cash amounts entered are in the currency of the related product. The position and cash amount transfers are carried out between members using agent and proprietary (P1,P2) accounts.

69 Clearing Overview Page 69 The entry, as well as the confirmations of partial transfers with cash amounts, can be done on behalf by Eurex Market Supervision. Partial position transfers on positions in futures or option products, where the premium is settled futures-style, are executed with the previous day s settlement price. Partial position transfers for newly created series are rejected with an appropriate error message. For trades entered or transferred to the accounts A1 - A9, the user is able to enter a give-up/take-up transaction instead. For classic position transfers, if the position quantity remains empty for a chosen contract, only a cash amount can be transferred. A contract must be specified to determine the currency, even for a cash only transfer. Three additional optional text fields Customer, MIOrdNo and Text are added to the Position Transfer Entry window. These fields allow members to enter customer-related details associated with the position transfer, for example, when a member internal order number or a comment. These fields are also displayed on the relevant reports, for example, the RPTCB010 POSITION DETAIL REPORT. Multiple partial position transfers (with or without cash amounts) per contract and per day are possible between the same members Strategy Trade Position Maintenance Matched strategy trades create positions in the associated option and for some strategies future leg only. There are no positions for the specific strategy trade. Strategies are not used in any clearing or settlement activity. Only the positions in the future and in the option legs are used for clearing Duties of the Exchange Within the framework of position keeping, the Exchange is responsible for: booking all the transactions to the relevant position accounts of a member transaction and position adjustments upon request of a member Duties of the Member Market participants are responsible for: entering any transactions and position adjustments as may be necessary entering transaction and position adjustments in their own name through the exchange

70 Clearing Overview Page Fulfillment of Obligations from Executed Trades Exercise and Assignment of Options Contracts This section and its subsections apply to Eurex only. Note: See section Exercise/Assignment of Positions in Eurex/ISE Link Products on page 73 for details of the exercise/assignment of positions in Eurex/ISE Link products Purpose When a long option holder exercises the option, he exercises his right, depending on the type of options contract, to buy or sell the underlying (stock options), to create a corresponding futures position (options on futures) or to receive cash (cash-settled options, e.g. index options). Eurex undertakes the assignment of exercised contracts against the holders of short options. The delivery of exercised stock options is performed after the clearing house sends settlement instructions to the CSDs on a "delivery versus payment" basis. Since the clearing house is the central contractual counterparty for deliveries and payments, the members are protected against the default of other members Exercise When a long call position in options on stocks is exercised, the holder exercises his right to demand the delivery of the underlying against payment. When exercising a long put position, the holder uses his right to sell the underlying against payment. When exercising a long call position in options on futures, the holder uses his right to open a long position in the corresponding futures contract at the strike price. When exercising a corresponding put position, the holder uses his right to open a short position in the underlying futures contract at the agreed strike price. In the case of exercising a long call position or a long put position in options on indices, the holder uses his right to receive cash. Stock options (except on the day of a dividend declaration) and options on futures can be exercised by the buyer on each trading day (American style). Options on an index can only be exercised on the last trading day (European style). For details on expiration, see Eurex Rules and Regulations. Only a member with an open long position in one of the position accounts can exercise an option.

71 Clearing Overview Page Automatic Exercise An automatic exercise facility exercising open long option positions on expiration day is available to the members. The minimum in-the-money-amount specifies the amount a contract (not the single share) must be in-the-money to be automatically exercised. A default minimum in-themoney amount of is defined for all Eurex/EEX option products. The minimum in-the-money amount of Eurex products can be adapted individually per account (A1 - A9, P1, P2, M1, M2) via the Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance window. An absolute value of up to or a percentage of the exercise price of up to 9.99% can be set. For products in GBX, an absolute value of up to 9, can be set. The Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance window also supports setting automatic exercise parameters for product types. These values are set automatically for all newly introduced products of this type. Members can exclude individual positions from automatic exercise by using the AbandonAutoExer functionality of the Exercise Overview window. For agent accounts A2 - A9, only the default minimum in-the-money amount is set up. Any individual amounts set up by the Clearing Member for A1 are not automatically copied to A2 - A9 when the additional agent accounts are assigned. Note also that ISE values are used for in-the-money amounts to ensure automatic exercise at Eurex provides the same results as at OCC. In-the-money amounts are therefore fixed for ISE products. An optional four-eye principle prevents the unintended abandoning of in-the-money options from automatic exercise. When an initiator wishes to abandon their positions, depending on their RAL settings, an Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the abandon. If a user with an abandoned position wants it to be exercised automatically again, they must un-abandon it. This un-abandon action follows the two-eye principle. The users settings of the related RALs are automatically set such that a four-eye principle for the abandoning of positions is applied. If a member, according to the company s policy, chooses not to use this functionality, they can amend the RAL settings of their users as required. The NCM audit trail report RPTTT150 OPTIONAL FOUR EYE PRINCIPLE documents the abandonments to which the four-eye principle has been applied, the respective initiator and the confirmer. It is not possible to set automatic exercise parameters for ISE products in Clearing GUI. Positions must therefore be abandoned if they are to be excluded from automatic exercise. The KRX Option cannot be exercised.

72 Clearing Overview Page Manual Exercise In addition to the feature of automatic exercise on expiration day the Eurex System supports manual exercise of European style long option positions on expiration day and manual exercise of American style long option positions at any time. All exercises are randomly assigned to the writers of the exercised option series during the daily pre-batch assignment procedure. Exercise adjustments are possible on the day of exercise entry, though no exercise is possible for Eurex/ISE Link products on OCC holidays because no assignment takes place on these days. A fee is charged for the exercises and exercise adjustments. Exercises of all long positions and corresponding adjustments can be entered on the Exercise Overview window. The manual exercise of US options can be performed at Eurex on the Friday prior to Expiration Saturday. OCC exercises all ITM positions automatically in a special Expiration Saturday processing. The RPTC E090 OCC EXPIRATION SATURDAY REPORT shows further information on the Expiration Saturday processing, as well as listing Expiring Exercise Declarations and Do Not Exercise Declarations sent to OCC for expiring option contracts. No pre-batch assignment is possible for share settled ISE products. Long option positions can totally or partially be exercised by using the ExerciseManually functionality of the Exercise Overview window. In exceptional cases Eurex can enter requests on behalf of the member. The Exercise Overview window also supports the entry of exercise adjustments and shows the exercise transactions and adjustments in the various options series. An optional four-eye principle prevents the unintended exercise of out-of-the-money options. When an initiator wishes to confirm the exercise of an OTM option, depending on their RAL settings, a new Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the exercise. The users settings of the related RALs are automatically set such that a four-eye principle for the exercise of OTM options is applied. If a member, according to the company s policy, chooses not to use this functionality, they can amend the RAL settings of their users as required. An exercised position can be reversed as long as the product state is not in POST RESTRICTED. When an un-exercise is performed, it is not validated if the position is ITM or OTM. That is, regardless of whether the four-eye principle is enabled, the un-exercise actions follow the twoeye principle. Note: To request an on-behalf exercise of an out-of-the-money option contract, members must complete a formal request on headed paper showing their corporate design, have it signed by two qualified sign-offs and fax it to Eurex. Members receive two reports that enable them to monitor option series in the last days before expiration. The RPTCE030 MEMBER EXPIRATION REPORT displays all the option series whose expiration is imminent. The RPTCE010 IN-THE-MONEY ADVISORY REPORT shows only the inthe-money options series. The positions held by a member in expired series are shown in the daily RPTCE035 EXPIRED SERIES REPORT. The NCM audit trail report RPTTT150 OPTIONAL FOUR EYE PRINCIPLE documents the exercise to which the four-eye principle has been applied, the respective initiator and the confirmer. An Exercise is not possible for products on holiday (status HOLID). The KRX Option/Future cannot be Exercised.

73 Clearing Overview Page Assignments The following assignment scenarios are possible: For stock options, the assignment of a: Call position obliges the seller of a call option to deliver the underlying against payment. Put position obliges the seller of a put option to accept delivery of the underlying against payment. For options on futures, the seller of a: Call option is obliged to take a short position in the corresponding futures contract, or, in the case of options on an index, to settle in cash. Put option must take a long position in the corresponding futures contract or, for options on an index, settle in cash. Assignments are binding. The "Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual" contains a description of the assignment method. Members receive assignment information before the batch starts. The end of the assignment process, per option product, is indicated by transmission of a product-specific "end-ofassignment" message to the Eurex members. The Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] window enables members to see the number of assigned positions in a specific option series. Clearing Members can see the information on exercised and assigned positions, and the net position of individual option series on the Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] window or on the RPTCE070 DAILY EXERCISE AND ASSIGN SUMMARY REPORT. Eurex/ISE Link assignments are visible on the Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] window during the day and be reported in the on-line report RPTCE077 START-OF-DAY EXERCISE/ ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY REPORT Exercise/Assignment of Positions in Eurex/ISE Link Products Members are able to exercise their USD ISE option positions as usual via the Exercise Overview window in Clearing GUI. The Exercise/Assignment procedure of US options in Eurex can be divided into the following three categories: Manual Exercise of Options on Equities and ETFs prior to Expiration American style US options can be exercised daily in the Exercise Overview window. The exercised positions are visible in the Position Overview, Position Detail Overview and Exercise Overview windows where the affected positions are marked as exercised. Note: No exercise is possible for Eurex/ISE Link products on OCC holidays because no assignment takes place on these days.

74 Clearing Overview Page 74 Exercise of Options on Equities and ETFs on Expiration Day Manual exercise can be performed at Eurex on the Friday prior to Expiration Saturday. OCC exercises all ITM positions automatically in a special Expiration Saturday processing. The RPTCE090 OCC EXPIRATION SATURDAY REPORT shows additional information on the Expiration Saturday processing and is available for Clearing and Trading Members. Exercise of Index and FX Options on Expiration Day There is no change for cash-settled products. Note: It is not possible to set automatic exercise parameters for ISE products. Positions must therefore be abandoned if they are to be excluded from automatic exercise. Assignments are broadcast to members, are visible on the assignment windows and are reported in the following reports: RPTCE070 EXERCISE AND ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY Manual exercises are marked as preliminary on the Friday prior to the Expiration Saturday, and the series is EXPIRATION PENDING RPTCE077 START-OF-DAY EXERCISE/ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY This report will be created on a daily basis and be available for both Clearing and Trading Members. Assignments for physically settled contracts are listed and broadcast the day the respective OCC data is received and processed by Eurex. The Eurex back-end does not trigger delivery processing for exercised and assigned equity options. Instead, deliveries and cash payments are processed by OCC in connection with the Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation (DTCC) and Eurex Central Counterparty (CCP). This avoids the need for Cross-Border Deliveries. During the delivery process, DTCC becomes the central counterparty and acts as CSD (replacing OCC as counterparty for OCC Clearing Members).

75 Clearing Overview Page 75 Overview Process Of Value Chain Including DTCC

76 Clearing Overview Page Duties of Eurex Eurex has the following duties: Exercises To provide information on expiring option contracts in the last days before expiration Creation of new futures positions after exercise of options on futures Maintenance of an orderly market Assignment Assignment of exercises to short positions Inform members of their assignments Deliveries Send instructions to CCP for the generation of delivery instructions in time. (Note that this does not apply to ISE products.) Guarantee of deliveries vs. payment Cash settlement Definition of the prerequisites and conditions for cash settlement Send instructions to CCP for the generation of delivery instructions in time Duties of the Clearing Member Clearing members have the following duties: Delivery of the underlying or payment for contracts assigned by the clearing house To ensure that there is a sufficient amount of securities in their CSD account To ensure that there is a sufficient amount of cash in their CB or CBF accounts Duties of the Exchange Member In addition to the duties of a Clearing Member, the Exchange Members must fulfil the following duties: After exercises have been assigned to short positions of the agent accounts, the member must assign the exercised contracts to individual client positions according to one of the Eurex approved random methods Delivery of the underlying or cash payment for the assigned positions to the Clearing Member

77 Clearing Overview Page Delivery Notice and Allocation of Eurex Futures Contracts This section and its subsections apply to Eurex only Purpose The holder of short positions in government bond futures contracts indicates the bonds which are to be delivered. Non Clearing Members, their clients and the clients of a Clearing Member notify the Clearing Member. The Clearing Member then notifies the clearing house. The Clearing Member is free to notify the clearing house of the securities provided by clients and Non Clearing Members, or to choose other securities for delivery from the basket of deliverables announced by the clearing house. Once the delivery notices have been issued, the clearing house assigns the bonds to the holders of long positions in government bond futures contracts. Deliveries are made versus payment through the CSD. Since the clearing house is the legal central counterparty for all the members, it is responsible for the delivery and payment of all the transactions. Thereby, members are protected from the default of other members Delivery Notice By issuing the delivery notice, the holder of short positions in government bond futures contracts fulfils his obligation to nominate bonds for delivery via the CSD. The delivery notice is made on the last trading day of the futures contract, n trading days before the delivery day (n is the settlement period of the product). Delivery day is the tenth calendar day of the month. If this is not a trading day, the delivery is carried out on the next trading day. The clearing house ensures that there is a delivery notice for each open short position. If a Clearing Member does not fulfil its obligation to submit a delivery notice despite a request by the clearing house, the clearing house determines which bonds to deliver. During the expiration month of the futures contract, until the day of the delivery notice, members receive the RPTCBO31 SETTLING FUTURES CONTRACT POSITIONS REPORT, listing all open long and short positions in the expiring futures contract. During this time, the members still have the option of closing open positions through position adjustments. The RPTCEO38 DELIVERABLE BOND REPORT contains all deliverable securities that can be notified for delivery. Trading of the expiring futures contract closes at 12:30 on the last trading day, when the delivery notice must be submitted. The Clearing Member submits the delivery notices as soon as the trading in the expiring contract has finished. The Notification Overview window displays the short open positions, which have to be notified. The notifications are entered on the Notification Detail Overview window, accessible from there. The Clearing Members can notify any of the securities listed on the report RPTCEO38 DELIVERABLE BOND for delivery. Only one type of security can be used for each individual contract. Notification adjustments are possible before the allocation process is started, via the Notification Detail Overview window.

78 Clearing Overview Page Allocation The securities nominated in the delivery notices are randomly allocated to the holders of long positions in government bond futures contracts intraday. Clearing members must pay a fee for the allocation. Allocations do not depend on the type of membership or on the type of position account. The allocation of securities obliges the holder of long positions in government bond futures contracts to accept the security against payment of the final settlement price. Clearing members are informed of the allocations on the same business day. The Notification Allocation Summary Overview window displays the notified and the assigned securities of this day. The same information is given on the RPTCEO75 NOTIFICATION/ALLOCATION SUMMARY REPORT of the respective day. Note: Since the handling of deliveries resulting from notification/allocation is performed by the CCP, related information is not available on the Eurex System starting the day after the notification/allocation has been performed Duties of the Clearing House The clearing house has the following duties: Delivery notice Providing information on open positions before the day of the delivery notice Providing information on the bonds accepted as deliverable securities by the clearing house Allocation Random assignment of bonds to open long positions Information to the Clearing Members of the resulting allocation Deliveries Timely provision of information to the CSD in order to support timely settlement for deliveries Guarantee of a correct and timely settlement Duties of the Clearing Members Duties of the Clearing Members are as follows: Execution of the notification procedure between the Clearing Member and its own clients, and between the Clearing Member and the Non Clearing Members and their clients Delivery of securities or payment for assigned securities Delivery notice for short positions Holders of short positions in government bond futures contracts must ensure that there are sufficient securities in their account at the CSD. Holders of long positions in government bond futures contracts must ensure that there are sufficient funds in their account with CSD or CB.

79 Clearing Overview Page Duties of the Exchange Members In addition to the Clearing Member duties, Exchange Members have to fulfil the following obligations: Allocation of the receivable securities to individual client positions according to one of the random methods approved by the clearing house Delivery of the securities or payment for the assigned securities to the Clearing Member Settlement of Eurex Options and Eurex Futures Contracts This section and its subsections apply to Eurex only Delivery and Payment Deliveries arising from exercises and assignments of options, and from notifications and allocations of futures contracts, take place between Clearing Members under the control of the clearing house. It is the duty of the Clearing Member to pass on the deliveries to its own clients, as well as to the Non Clearing Members and their clients, or vice versa. At the same time, the Clearing Member is responsible for the payment to or from those mentioned above Cash Settlement In order to maintain an orderly market, as well as to allow capital adjustments, the exercise of options can lead to a payment in the form of a cash settlement instead of a physical delivery of stock. For cash settled options, this is always the case. In the case of stock options, the cash settlement amount is determined by the difference between the price of the underlying and the strike price of the options series, multiplied by the part of the trading unit which is not physically settled but cash settled (see Report TA111 ALL ACTIVE SERIES OVERVIEW). In the case of options on an index, the amount is determined by the difference between the final settlement price and the strike price. In the case of futures contracts on an index, and of three months interest rate futures contracts, the cash settlement is calculated using the difference between the previous day's settlement price, or the trade price on the last trading day, and the final settlement price Creation of Futures Positions Upon exercise of options on futures, the clearing house creates the corresponding futures positions using the strike price of the options series in the overnight batch processing. Instead of the options position, the member now has a position in the corresponding futures contract.

80 Clearing Overview Page Settlement of OTC Volatility Strategies for Equity Options Once an OTC volatility strategy trade for an equity option has been approved, a strategy matching event broadcast containing the derivative leg(s) and the equity cash leg is sent to the front office applications. A unique leg identifier allows the member to identify the different legs in their processing. Afterwards the trade is split. For the derivative leg(s), position(s) are generated in the Eurex System. For the equity cash leg, the delivery-versus-payment process is initiated by the Equity CCP of Eurex Clearing AG. The equity transactions resulting from an OTC volatility strategy trade on Eurex are cleared and settled analogous to those resulting from exercises/assignments. Thus, the already existing delivery-versus-payment settlement procedures triggered by the Equity CCP and provided to the corresponding CSDs including its associated settlement periods applies. Equity delivery instructions resulting from volatility strategy trades can be distinguished from those resulting from exercises/assignments by the delivery trade type VOLA. This trade type is provided to the CCP as well. In contrast to the end-of-day transfer of delivery instructions resulting from exercises/assignments, the equity delivery instructions resulting from equity options volatility strategies are transferred in real-time from Eurex to CCP. Thus, delivery instruction of trade type VOLA are intraday available on the CCP. The Equity CCP provides the trade reports CE260/CE261/CE262 - Pending Deliveries to Clearing Members notifying them about the equity trade as part of the OTC volatility strategy trade. The equity cash leg will also be displayed in the report CE Settlement of KRX products The Daily Futures Contract on the KOSPI 200 Option (the Eurex KOSPI Product ) is legally a futures contract which expires daily into a KOSPI 200 Option position at KRX market opening. Technically, however, the product is set up and traded as an option. The KOSPI 200 Option listed on KRX is legally the underlying for the daily futures on the Eurex KOSPI Product listed on Eurex, although technically, the underlying (option series) is actually traded itself. The daily futures on the KOSPI 200 Option is traded at Eurex through Eurex Members and is initially cleared at Eurex Clearing AG for daily settlement (of profits/losses). Settlement information, which is needed to open the respective KOSPI 200 Options positions in the KRX system, is transferred to KRX after each trading day. Settlement is then performed at KRX. Because positions are fully settled in Eurex and Eurex Clearing AG does not hold the positions overnight, there is no additional margin requirement in place nor is additional margin calculated. Only the variation margin (mark to market) is required in Korean Won. The RPTCB430 KRX POSITION report displays the end-of-day position in the products affected by the Eurex/KRX Link. It is created on a daily basis and is available for both Clearing and Trading Members.

81 Clearing Overview Page Payment versus Payment A payment-versus-payment settlement is applied in the case of physically settled currency products. In this case, the owner of the long position is debited by an amount in the delivery currency, defined by position and face value, and is credited by an amount in the product currency, calculated from the settlement price. Reverse payments apply to the owner of a short position. Results of the settlement procedure are displayed in the RPTCE050 EXPIRATION PAYMENT VERSUS PAYMENT REPORT Settlement of EEX Electricity Future Contracts This section applies to EEX only Cascading Expiration for EEX Electricity Futures Annual, seasonal and quarterly products are settled by the cascading position transfer. The delivery periods for cascading products are defined as follows: Annual contracts always begin in January. Seasonal products always begin in April or October. Quarterly contracts always begin in January, April, July or October. Monthly contracts begin at the beginning of a month. Annual, seasonal and quarterly contracts expire in the month before the delivery period. For example the FOBY Jan 03 contract expires in December The FOBQ Apr 03 contract expires in March The EEX contracts with cascade expiration have the settlement code T'. For electricity futures it is essential to know how much energy should be delivered in each time period. For EEX electricity future, a delivery calendar defines the days when electricity is to be delivered. It is fixed together with the number of delivery time units per day and the amount of electricity to be delivered per time unit. In the current situation, electricity futures are supported that can cover the delivery of electricity for an entire month. Having a position in an annual electricity future contract is equivalent to having a position in each of the electricity futures contracts that cover those months. To make use of this relation, it is desirable to settle the big contracts for one year by creating positions in the smaller monthly contracts. Only the monthly contracts are settled individually, which leads to the introduction of a settlement cascade. These cascades allow grouping of products with the same parameters, but different delivery periods, in a way that only the product with the shortest period is settled. Each existing EEX product is assigned to a product cascade. If there is not more than one product in the cascade, and this product is the finally settled base product (monthly settled product), the settlement is the same as in the non-cascaded case.

82 Clearing Overview Page 82 When a contract expires, it is checked whether the appropriate product is the product with the lowest level. In this case, the contract is settled as usual. For the higher level products, the positions are removed and new positions in each of the resulting contracts of the products of a deeper level are created. Cascading of the parent contract takes place on expiration day. A contract is deemed a "parent" if it has a subordinate level set, and an exact cascade pattern that indicates what position transitions are allowed for settlement. The following example shows the cascading expiration of an annual contract: Expiring Series New Series FOBY Jan 02 FOBQ Jan 02 FQBA Apr 02 FQBA Jul 02 FQBA Oct 02 FOBA Jan 02 FOBA Feb 02 FOBA Mar 02 FMBA Apr 02 FMBA May 02 FMBA Jun 02 FMBA Jul 02 FMBA Aug 02 FMBA Sep 02 FMBA Oct 02 FMBA Nov 02 FMBA Dec 02 For the example shown, the contract FOBY Jan 02 expires in December 01. On expiration day, positions in this annual product are cascaded down to positions in the first three monthly contracts, and positions in the second, third and fourth quarter. An annual contract can cascade only to quarterly and monthly contracts, but not to seasonal contracts. It is possible to process two cascading steps on the same day. A contract may cascade directly from an annual to a monthly contract. Seasonal contracts can cascade only to quarterly or monthly contracts. A seasonal contract cascades into the first three monthly contracts and the following quarter. The processing is the same for the expiration of annual contracts and seasonal contracts. For cash settled contracts, if the monthly contract expires on the current business day, the contract is cash settled in a normal manner. The same applies to the first month of an expiring seasonal contract. The expiration date of contracts for physically settled cascadable (yearly and quarterly) products is two business days before the last business day of the previous month. For example: April, 02 Quarter electricity futures: Expire in the month of March, 02 and positions are created in the month futures Apr/May/ Jun. Expire two business days before the last trading day in March, 02.

83 Clearing Overview Page Cash Settled Electricity Future Contracts For EEX monthly contracts that are cash settled, the holder of short positions is required to settle in cash to members with long positions after futures expiration. The Clearing Department tracks the payment of all these transactions. During the expiration month of the futures contract, until the last trading day, the members still have the option of closing open positions through position adjustments. Trading in expiring EEX electricity futures contracts closes at 15:00 on the last trading day. The allocations are done by the Eurex System. Allocations do not depend on the type of membership or on the type of account, but are done randomly. The allocations are reported to the Clearing Members. For the cash settled contracts (monthly) the settlement code is C' Physically Settled Electricity Future Contracts For all monthly contracts that are physically settled, the Final settlement is spread over the entire delivery month. The settlement is executed as a daily DvP (Delivery versus Payment). If there are any Exchange holidays (including weekends), delivery payment for that period is calculated along with the delivery day processing for the day after the holiday/weekend period. For example, in general, the settlement for Saturday/Sunday delivery is carried out along with the settlement of Monday's delivery. The actual calculation occurs at the end of the business day on Thursday, with the actual settlement on Friday. The Eurex System calculates the payment amount for the energy delivery and instructs the cash flow on a (business) daily basis. The complete physical energy delivery process and delivery failure management are covered by EEX. The energy delivery payment amount is calculated per Clearing-Member separated for the accounts A1 - A9 (customer account, long and short not netted) and PP (netted principal accounts P1, P2, M1 and M2). The daily payment amount is calculated based on the delivery size for the next delivery days and settlement price of the current day. Physically settled contracts (monthly) have the settlement code E EEX EUA Futures Eurex and EEX members are able to trade futures products on EUA (European Union Emission Allowances) at EEX Derivative Exchange on the Eurex platform. The underlying EUA is traded at the EEX Spot Market on the Xetra platform. Eurex assigns EEX Product Groups to members for trading and clearing activities. The OTC EFP Trade facility supported for EEX products is available for Eurex members. EEX EUA futures are single stock futures (product type: FSTK). The security settlement, delivery versus payment, is instructed by the CCP.

84 Clearing Overview Page VAT for Energy Deliveries The delivery of energy or of European emission allowances is subject to VAT. VAT payments are associated with the payment on energy delivery or on European emission allowances and are handled by the Eurex System. The VAT is charged as a percentage of the amount paid/received for the delivery. The Eurex System is able to handle different VAT parameters depending on the member, the product, the member s account and on buy or sell. VAT amounts for delivery of energy and of European emission allowances are reported in the report RPTCE120 ECC DELIVERY. Risk-based margining for pending VAT transactions is performed Margin Deposits The clearing participants can satisfy all margin requirements by depositing the appropriate amount of cash. Cash collateral can be paid into the account in various currencies. The EEX AG board of directors stipulates which currencies are permitted for the deposit of cash collateral. For additional margin, participants may deposit securities instead of cash. EEX AG does not pay interest on cash that has been deposited as collateral, so depositing securities that the clearing participant has in its own inventory offers the benefit that those instruments continue to provide returns. It is essential that coverage of variation margin (i.e. the daily settlement of profits and losses), as well as margin calls, be made in cash Intraday Margin Eurex Clearing AG and EEX AG, based on risk assessments carried out during the course of a given trading day, at all times reserve the right to demand from the Clearing Member a higher, or additional, amount of either cash collateral or those securities or rights to securities that are accepted by the exchange. Additional collateral must be deposited immediately in the appropriate currency into the Deutsche Bundesbank or Swiss National Bank account or for other accepted currencies in the payment bank accounts or, as the case may be, into the collateral account of CBF or SIS. The same right exists with respect to a General Clearing Member or a Direct Clearing Member vis-à-vis any Non Clearing Members with which they are associated.

85 Clearing Overview Page Duties of Clearing Department The Clearing Department has the following duties: Allocation Providing information on open positions before the day of the delivery notice Information to the Clearing Members of the resulting allocation Tracking of Deliveries Timely provision of delivery instructions to support timely settlement for deliveries Tracking of delivery confirmations and settlement Duties of the Clearing Members Duties of the Clearing Members are as follows: Payment of futures contracts To ensure that there is sufficient collateral in their account with CB for the open positions of their NCMs Duties of the Exchange Members In addition to the Clearing Member duties, Exchange Members have to fulfil the following obligations: Delivery of the underlying commodities Payment to the Clearing Member Allocation of the receivable commodities to individual client positions (if applicable) Settlement of Options on Electricity Futures (EEX) EEX options on electricity futures are European style. Positions in these products can only be exercised on the expiration day. The options are set up with derivative style settlement, i.e. exercise of a position by the buyer results in a respective underlying futures position for buyer and seller of the option. The futures positions are automatically opened on the position accounts of buyer and seller of the option during the nightly batch. The difference between strike price and settlement price of the future is itemized in the respective reports which are generated during batch on the options expiration day and the respective cash amount is credited and debited by a cash settlement on the day after expiration.

86 Clearing Overview Page Clearing of OTC Flexible Contracts Transactions This chapter applies to Eurex only. OTC Flexible Options and OTC Flexible Futures are together referred to as OTC Flexible Contracts OTC Flexible Contracts Parameters The user is enabled to define the following contract specific parameters: Expiry day All business days, with some special Eurex defined exceptions, which are prior to the latest expiry date of the related regular series, are accepted. Settlement Type The settlement type of OTC Flexible Contract trades is flexible. Members can choose to settle their OTC Flexible Contract trades either with cash or with the physical settlement type available for the product. Depending on the product type, one of the following physical settlement types is available: Share: This settlement type is available for products with stock as the underlying, i.e. OSTK and FSTK. Exercised trades with the settlement type Cash and Share have the new status Delivered to CCP. Derivative: This settlement type is available for products with an internal underlying, i.e. the underlying is a Eurex product. Payment-versus-Payment: This type of settlement is available for trades in currency products. In exceptional situations, the settlement type supported for a product may be changed by Eurex before an entered OTC Flexible Contracts trade is exercised or expired. In this situation, the settlement type of the trade is not modified but the settlement processing is adjusted. A confirmation dialog IS displayed at the time of exercise of these trades. If physical settlement is disabled for a product, the exercised OTC Flexible Contracts trades is settled in cash. In this case, the exercise of out-of-the-money series is not possible. Note: The settlement type 'notional' is not supported for Flexible Futures. The settlement types supported for a product are communicated by Eurex through appropriate circulars. Exercise price The exercise price, up to five pre-decimal and four decimal places, established by the user can be a percentage based range above the highest strike price of all maturities or a fixed lower limit below the strike price of standard series for the particular product. This percentage defined by Eurex is the same for and is communicated to members. For derivative settled options, the precision of the exercise price is aligned to the price precision of the underlying future. Exercise style (American or European)

87 Clearing Overview Page 87 The user is able to define the exercise style for OTC Flexible Options transactions for options of American exercise style. OTC Flexible Contracts trades are allowed for all account types and have a size of up to contracts OTC Flexible Contracts Supported Transactions The following clearing related features are supported for OTC Flexible Contracts. They are always applied to entire transactions: Modify an open OTC Flexible Contracts transaction Give-up OTC Flexible Contracts transactions Take-up OTC Flexible Contracts transactions Trade Separation of OTC Flexible Contracts transactions Exercise and Assignment for OTC Flexible Options transactions Close out of OTC Flexible Contracts transactions Position transfers for OTC Flexible Contracts transactions (with or without cash/optional foureye principle) Inquire OTC Flexible Contracts transactions OTC Flexible Contracts transactions, although guaranteed by the Eurex Clearing AG, are maintained as bilateral transactions and are not included in the regular Clearing Positions. Post-trade anonymity is in effect, that is, each party involved can only retrieve its own data. Following a Give-up, there is anonymity between the Take-up member and the initial counterparty of the Give-up member; the original counterparty is not informed whatsoever regarding the Give-up. The counterparty for the OTC Flexible Contracts transaction is neither displayed on any clearing report or window, nor can be retrieved via any VALUES API request. As for regular series, a Give-up/Take-up facility is supported for OTC Flexible Contracts transactions entered on the current business day or within the last two business days with the accounts A1 - A9. The Take-up member is able to take-up an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction in any of its member accounts, i.e. A1 - A9, P1 or P2. The account is defined while the take-up is performed. Give-ups are performed at the original trade price. The acceptance by the Take-up member and the respective Clearing Members may be made in any order. For OTC Flexible Contracts transactions not eligible for Give-up/Take-up, a position transfer mechanism is installed. For position transfers with cash, members can, depending on their RAL settings, select whether to process the transfer using the four-eye principle. That is, when an initiator chooses to enter/ approve the transfer of their positions, depending on their RAL settings, an Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the transfer. An automatic acceptance of Give-up/Take-up requests may be performed as defined for regular futures and options. Self addressed Give-ups and position transfers are supported, that is, a member receives the OTC Flexible Contracts transaction it has given up.

88 Clearing Overview Page 88 A Give-up or position transfer can only be deleted by the submitting member prior to the acceptance by the receiving member. Note: The Give-up/Take-up status indicators (Column GUStatus in the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window) are only visible on the Take-up member side. OTC Flexible Contracts trades can be split in up to 20 subtrades. Trade separations are possible for OTC Flexible Contracts transactions with the status Ratified. Members can maintain the separated subtrades individually, i.e. all functionality applied to complete OTC Flexible Contracts transactions is also supported for these subtrades. A trade separation request can be entered from the Flexible Contracts Trade Separation window. The transaction IDs of OTC Flexible Contracts trades are enhanced by a parent suffix to identify the interrelationship between the different subtrades. The parent suffix of all subtrades contains the suffix of the source subtrade. The parent suffix of the subtrade with suffix zero is also zero. Members involved in an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction can close their sides of the trade. On approving a trade to close, the counterparty always receives a new opening transaction. If required, this trade can be netted later using the close out functionality. Note that when attempting to close out a position, a window is displayed stating: The Close Out Cannot Be Reversed and requesting whether the user wishers to proceed (default: No). For flexible contracts account adjustment, details of the original account type in the Eurex System are maintained to allow a correct re-allocation of related cash payments, for example, premium and/or variation margin, between segregated client pools and non-segregated pools. To this end, an inverse record with trade status code I is introduced. This inverse record writes an inverse quantity for the old account. Furthermore, an adjusted record is written for the new account. Eurex enables members to perform close outs with subtrades on the buy and sell side of one OTC Flexible contract, even if they are not from the same parent transaction. This can only be performed on subtrades: Of equal quantity. Of Status Ratified. In the same member account. Members can use the trade separation functionality to create the subtrades with equal quantities for performing the close out. If an OTC Flexible Contracts and a regular series receive the same parameters, Eurex Market Supervision removes the OTC Flexible Contracts positions after receiving appropriate member requests and enters on-behalf trades for the generation of regular ones. During the lifecycle of an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction, the Associated Clearing Member can change. In this case, a full transfer of the OTC Flexible Contracts transaction to the new Clearing Member is performed. The transfer facilities are available only after T+2 day. The exercise style of OTC Flexible Options with derivative settlement is aligned to the standard option. The European and American exercise styles are supported if the standard option is of American exercise style. Otherwise only European exercise style is supported. OTC Flexible Options transactions retain their exercise style throughout their lifetime.

89 Clearing Overview Page 89 The assignment process for flexible contracts is aligned to the assignment process for standard contracts: First the internal assignments are processed, that is, short positions are assigned to the proprietary accounts (P1, P2) and market maker accounts (M1, M2) for the same member. Then short positions are assigned randomly across all flexible transaction IDs for the same flexible contract. An exercise can be canceled during the trading day. An automatic exercise may be performed on the expiration day as defined for regular options. Cash settled OTC Flexible Options transactions cannot be exercised if they are out-of-the-money. A confirmation dialog is displayed in case share settled OTC Flexible Options transactions, which are out-of-the-money, are exercised. During exercise of an OTC Flexible Option transaction, Give-up/Take-up, trade separation and position transfer of an OTC Flexible Contract transaction, the user can modify the text fields. The user is able to inquire all or only in-the-money OTC Flexible Options transactions. Notification and Allocation of transactions are supported for OTC Flexible Futures. For capital adjustments, the strike price and the trading unit of open OTC Flexible Options transactions are adapted, the version number is incremented by one. Refer to the Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual for further information. In the exceptional case when the expiration date of an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction was accepted by the system but changed later, for example, the expiration date is a holiday, it is reported with the same maintenance code as the capital adjustment. The RALs of all the clearing functionalities of OTC Flexible Contracts are aligned to the corresponding clearing RALs of standard contracts.

90 Clearing Overview Page Premiums, Fees and Daily Variation Margin The clearing house combines the option premiums payable and receivable in each currency in the corresponding premium accounts of the member, and guarantees the posting and distribution of these option premiums in the cash accounts of the relevant Clearing Members. In addition, the clearing house calculates all transaction fees. Transaction fees incurred by Exchange Members are posted in the product currency on a daily basis, and invoiced to Clearing Members in that same currency. Non-product related fees are calculated and invoiced in a currency determined by the clearing house. For existing futures positions and future style options positions, the clearing house calculates the profits and losses every trading day, following the mark-to-market procedure (see Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual). The profits and losses are then debited or credited to the Clearing Member cash accounts in the corresponding currency as variation margin Traditional Style Option Premiums The clearing house maintains internal option premium accounts in all necessary currencies for all position accounts for each member. Option premiums resulting from trades in option contracts that are subject to traditional style premium posting are posted to the corresponding option premium accounts in the product currency. Option premiums of individual transactions are booked as debits or credits, i.e. premium paid and premium received are calculated. There are two reports with detailed information about option premiums. The RPTCB080 PREMIUM SUMMARY REPORT gives a summary of the up-to-date net premiums of the day, as well as the net premiums of the current month/year by underlying. The RPTCB090 PREMIUM OVERALL SUMMARY REPORT lists this information not by underlying but by the Exchange Member and the account type. The Strike Price Multiplier is a parameter used in conjunction with the strike price when making calculations for premium, variation margin and in-the-money amounts. It is always identical to the Trade Unit for Eurex products, but replaces the Trade Unit for ITM, premium and variation margin calculations. While the Trade Unit and Strike Price Multiplier are usually equal, they may differ for Eurex/ ISE Link products after certain types of corporate actions, for example, stock dividends, or stock splits, which would result in fractional strike prices (3 for 2 splits, 4 for 3 splits, but not 2 for 1 splits).

91 Clearing Overview Page Fees The exchange maintains an internal fee account for each position account of a member on which the fees resulting from various transactions are booked. Position accounts are held for all currencies in which products are traded. The fees charged for a transaction are booked to the corresponding fee account. Fees are calculated in the product currency. Exceptions are nonproduct-related fees, which are booked in the Clearing Member currency. The Clearing Member cash accounts are debited by the amounts accrued in the fee accounts at the end of the month (for due dates of fees, see the clearing house rules & regulations). The clearing house calculates the fees for the following types of transactions according to the prevailing price list: Booking of a trade (clearing fee) (options, futures and cash market trades) Trade adjustment (trade adjustment fee) (options and futures) Exercise (exercise fee) (options) Assignments (assignment fee) (options on futures) Exercise adjustment (exercise adjustment fee) (options) Position adjustments (position adjustment fee) (options and futures) Delivery notice (notification fee) (government bond futures contracts) Allocation of government bonds (allocation fee) (government bond futures contracts) Cash settlement of futures contracts (cash settlement fee) Others (miscellaneous fee) Transactions where fees may be charged are listed above. Under Other, the clearing house combines all other costs and charges which do not result from a transaction. The billing system supports the following reports: RPTCB165 EUREX FEE STATEMENT - contains all daily transaction fees (except Late Closing Fees and OTC Flexible Contracts transaction Fees), all fee adjustments and mis-trades. RPTCB167 LATE CLOSING FEE - displays the Late Closing Fee incl. the respective details to the zero cost quantity. RPTCB169 MARKET MAKER FEE REFUND - monthly provides information about the Market Maker Refund. RPTCB192 MONTHLY FEE STATEMENT - contains all Eurex transaction fees including monthly and quarterly fees (Market Maker fee refunds and Minimum Transaction Fees). RPTCB195 OTC FLEXIBLE CONTRACTS FEE STATEMENT - contains the OTC Flexible Contracts transaction fees on transaction level as well as fee adjustments. RPTCB196 DAILY OVERALL FEE SUMMARY - shows a summary of all Eurex transaction fees of the current day, current month, and previous month for futures, options and OTC Flexible Contracts.

92 Clearing Overview Page Daily Variation Margin For futures and futures style options, a daily valuation related to the settlement price (following the mark-to-market method) is performed for open positions. An account is maintained for the daily variation margin for each position account of an Exchange Member. At the end of the trading period, the clearing house calculates the daily settlement price of a futures contract, the daily variation margin of each futures and options position following the mark-to-market method, and carries out the resulting bookings. (See Calculation of the Daily Variation Margin, in the Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual ). The variation margin is calculated in the product currency. On the RPTCB010 POSITION DETAIL REPORT, the daily variation margin is specified for each position account and for each individual futures and futures style options position, i.e. for held, newly bought and sold positions of a contract. Consequently, the report allows the user to see the exact daily variation margin for each futures and options position divided by Clearing Member, Exchange Member, currency and type of account. The RPTCB020 POSITION SUMMARY REPORT, RPTCB010 POSITION DETAIL REPORT, RPTCB011 STD AND FLX CNTR DLY TRANSACTN REPORT and RPTCB021 POSITION/ACTIVE TRD SUMMARY REPORT show the daily variation margin balance of each futures contract and options series without showing the single position movements of the day. The RPTCB011 STD AND FLX CNTR DLY TRANSACTN REPORT combines details of the existing reports RPTCB010 POSITION DETAIL REPORT and RPTCB064 FLEXIBLE CONTRACTS DAILY TRANSACTIONS REPORT. It lists the daily transactions for the standard and flexible option series and futures contracts, and provides such information as opening balance, daily position movements, transaction status changes, variation margin payments for the futures contracts; premiums on options calculated the traditional way and variation margins for the future-style settled options. The RPTCB021 POSITION/ACTIVE TRD SUMMARY REPORT combines details of the existing reports RPTCB020 POSITION SUMMARY REPORT and RPTCB063 FLX CNTR TRANSACTION OVERVIEW. It lists the previous positions, daily movements and current positions in the standard as well as flexible option series and futures contracts of the exchange member. The Strike Price Multiplier is a parameter used in conjunction with the strike price when making calculations for premium, variation margin and in-the-money amounts. It is always identical to the Trade Unit for Eurex products, but replaces the Trade Unit for ITM, premium and variation margin calculations. While the Trade Unit and Strike Price Multiplier are usually equal, they may differ for Eurex/ ISE Link products after certain types of corporate actions, for example, stock dividends, or stock splits, which would result in fractional strike prices (3 for 2 splits, 4 for 3 splits, but not 2 for 1 splits).

93 Clearing Overview Page Additional Windows and Reports For traditional style options, the premiums for each transaction in a series are displayed on the Position Detail Overview window. This window also shows the trade prices for futures contracts and futures style options. The same information can be found on the RPTCB010 POSITION DETAIL REPORT. The Position Overview window shows the net premiums and type of account for traditional style options. The RPTCB011 STD AND FLX CNTR DLY TRANSACTN REPORT lists the daily transactions for the standard and flexible option series and futures contracts, while the RPTCB021 POSITION/ ACTIVE TRD SUMMARY REPORT lists the previous positions, daily movements and current positions in the standard as well as flexible option series and futures contracts of the exchange member Duties of the Clearing House The clearing house has the following responsibilities regarding premiums and fees: Booking of all option premium credits or debits on the relevant Exchange Member premium accounts Settlement of the net premium, by debiting or crediting the cash accounts of the Clearing Members Calculation and posting of all fees Concerning the daily variation margin, the clearing house has the following duties: Calculation of the settlement price of each futures contract and options series on futures Calculation and booking of the daily variation margin of all open futures position and futures style options position Settlement of the net variation margin by debiting or crediting the cash account of each Clearing Member Duties of the Clearing Members Clearing members have the following duties: Collection of option premiums, transaction and other fees from their clients and Non Clearing Members (if any) Payment and collection of option premiums and of the daily variation margin for themselves, their clients and their Non Clearing Members (if any) Payment of transaction and other fees for themselves, their clients and their Non Clearing Members (if applicable)

94 Clearing Overview Page Risk Protection The Advanced Risk Protection facility allows for the definition of configurable risk limits as well as corresponding pre-defined measures following a breach of such limits. Limits are set both by Clearing Members for each of their Non Clearing Members and by any Exchange Member for itself. Should the intraday margin calculation reveal an excess of any such limits, Eurex Clearing s risk management will swiftly communicate the limit breach to the trading layer, where the appropriate action assigned to the specific limit will be taken Limit Maintenance Four pre-defined types of limits are available, each representing different aggregates of risk values, calculated on Eurex Clearing s near-real-time risk calculation ability: TMR = Total Margin Requirement CULI = Premium Margin + Current Liquidating Margin + Variation Margin + Option Premium CASH = Variation Margin + Option Premium NDM = Additional Margin + Future Spread Margin When setting any such limit, the member is able to choose from the following actions to be taken on breaching the limit: Level 1: Broadcasting an Alert Message to both maintenance member and affected member. Level 2: Limiting the member s frequency of Order/Quote Entry and Order/Quote Modification by enforcing a minimum delay between two such transactions in any single product. Level 3: Setting the member to state HALT, in line with the Stop Button procedure available prior to Eurex Release The minimum delay to be defined for Level 2 actions can be individually defined between 250 and 5,000 milliseconds or be deactivated by setting it to zero. While a Level 3 action by default includes the deletion of all open orders and quotes, Level 1 and Level 2 actions support the deletion of all open orders and quotes as an optional feature. If the Delete Orders/Quotes checkbox of the Risk Monitoring Maintenance [Modified] window is checked for Action Levels 1 or 2, an additional checkbox is available to restrict order entry to Persistent Orders Only. This means the General Clearing Member is able to ensure they receive comprehensive information on the Non Clearing Member s open orders following the deletion of all orders and quotes triggered by such a limit breach.

95 Clearing Overview Page 95 Risk Limit records are stored on the Eurex System with the following parameters: Maintenance Member Affected Member Risk Type Action Level Risk Limit [CM Currency] Delay [ms] Delete Orders and Quotes [Y/N] Limit Triggered Allow Persistent Orders Only ABCFR BBBLO 1 - TMR 3 20,000,000 Y ABCFR BBBLO 1 - TMR 2 8,000,000 3,000 N ABCFR BBBLO 1 - TMR 1 3,000,000 N BBBLO BBBLO 3 - CASH 2 1,500,000 1,000 Y Y BBBLO BBBLO 3 - CASH 1 1,000 Y Y Y BBBLO BBBLO 1 - TMR 3 7,000,000 Y Structure of Risk Limit Records Maintenance Member, Affected Member, Risk Type and Action Level are key components of a risk limit record. Consequently, for each pair of Maintenance Member/Affected Member up to 12 limit records can be configured (4 Risk Types 3 Action Levels). All limits can be set via the Risk Monitoring Maintenance [Modified] window. While entry and change of limits entered here become valid as of the next business day, changes to other parameters (delay; Order/Quote Delete) have an immediate effect. Intraday changes of risk limit values are supported via the Enhanced Risk Solution and Clearing GUI. Changes initiated here are effective only for the current day and are overwritten with the actual Eurex limits the next day. If this is not desired, the respective limit change must also be done on Eurex Effects of Breaching Limits There are three Trigger Event-Action Levels: Action Level 1, Action Level 2 and Action Level 3. Whenever a risk limit event is triggered, irrespective of the action level, an alert message is broadcast via VALUES private member messages to both Maintenance and Affected Member. Depending on the risk limit parameters set for this event, a deletion of the members orders and quotes is triggered and the respective entry in the risk limit table is marked as triggered. Trigger Event - Action Level 1: No further actions. Trigger Event - Action Level 2: The Eurex System determines the maximum of all delay parameters assigned to triggered Level 2 risk limits of the affected member. Order add or order modify requests are rejected as long as the previously processed order add or order modify request in the same product is not older than the so determined delay parameter requires.

96 Clearing Overview Page 96 Trigger Event - Action Level 3: Triggering a risk limit with Action Level 3 results in the affected member being set to HALT. If a member is set to HALT, it will be prevented from: Entering new orders. Entering new quotes. Clearing functions (that is, give-up/take-ups, position transfers, etc.). Note: A General Clearing Member cannot set an Action Level 3 limit for itself. The affected member is informed immediately through a broadcast via VALUES, and any of their open orders and quotes are deleted. The member is still able to inquire and monitor private data as well as public market data Risk-based Margining This section serves as an introduction to the complex subject of risk-based margining. A detailed description of the subject may be found in the Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual, the Eurex Risk-based Margining brochure and the EEX Futures Market Risk-based Margining document. The following description should be considered exclusively as a functional description Summary The risk-based margining system determines the necessary margin requirements for all positions of an Exchange Member. Eurex Members can access near-time risk data through the Eurex Realtime Risk Management system. They are able to inquire into their intraday and, where applicable, end-of-day risk data using a FIXML-based connection over an AMQP ( Advanced Message Queueing Protocol ) transport. Refer to the Enhanced Risk Solution Interface Specification for details about the interface. This system allows all the positions contained in a margin class or in a margin group to be brought together in one portfolio. The formation of margin classes and of margin groups is explained in section Formation of Margin Classes and of Margin Groups on page 97. The clearing house risk-based margining system compares the current market value of a portfolio with its potential market values, which are calculated for various assumed prices of the underlying or of the underlying security. The clearing house calculates the necessary margin requirements for an Exchange Member by allowing for a worst case loss meaning that the projected liquidation costs for the portfolio reflects the worst case loss of the underlying and underlying security. Margin requirements in a margin class of equity derivatives with upside risk (short call option or short single stock future positions) can be met by depositing specific equity collateral, which is valued at the current underlying price at the end of the margin period (without haircut). For products in holiday status, the margining calculation is done as usual, i.e. as if the product was not on holiday.

97 Clearing Overview Page Formation of Margin Classes and of Margin Groups This section applies to Eurex and EEX. The methodology of the clearing house risk-based margining requires that all the clearing house traded products first be allocated to a margin class. A margin class can contain more than one product. All index-based products can be brought together in the margin class of the underlying index (e.g. the products: options on the DAX and futures on the DAX Index, in the margin class DAX). In the same way, all the products based on the same type of security can be put together in a margin class (e.g. option on the BUND-future (OGBL) and BUND-future in the margin class FGBL). All option on energy series are set up in different Margin Classes, whereby a margin class is characterized by the delivery product (base, peak load), the delivery period (yearly, quarterly, monthly) and the maturity of the contract. An option product is in the same margin class as its underlying futures product. As long as the underlying instruments of two or more margin classes show a degree of positive price correlation, the margin classes can be assembled into a margin group. All the positions of a margin class or margin group are termed a portfolio for the purpose of calculating the necessary margin requirement. A margin class can contain only products with the same currency. A margin group, however, can contain classes where the class related currency is different Components of Margin Requirement This section applies to Eurex and EEX. For Eurex products, the margin requirement of a margin class is calculated every day based on the following four components: Futures Spread Margin: This covers the risk caused by the imperfect positive price correlation of various expiration months of the underlying security. Futures positions with different expirations can be offset against each other. Premium Margin: This is calculated for all the positions of the options products which are subject to traditional style premium posting and for which the options premium is to be settled in full at the opening of the relevant position. It covers the costs which would fall due in the case of the liquidation at the day's closing price of all the traditional style options positions contained in a margin class or margin group. No premium margin is calculated for the positions of the option products subject to futures style premium posting. The risk resulting from these positions is adjusted and settled daily through the mark-to-market process, variation margin, similar to the treatment of all futures positions. At exercise or maturity of an option position subject to futures style premium posting, the premium payment still unpaid becomes due, in addition to the variation margin.

98 Clearing Overview Page 98 Current Liquidating Margin: This is calculated daily for cash, bond and equity positions and is equal to the profits and losses in such positions at the time of calculation. This margin protects the clearing house in the event that it is required to close out cash, bond, repo and equity positions at any time, and is analogous to the Premium Margin for options. Additional Margin: This is the margin requirement that covers any additional potential liquidation costs for all options positions, cash market positions, and for non-spread futures positions of a margin class. These potential costs would arise if the current market value of the portfolio moved to the worst case loss price within 24 hours. For EEX products, the daily margin requirement of a margin class is calculated based on the following two components: Additional Margin EEX: This is the margin requirement that covers the potential additional liquidation costs due for all the futures positions of a margin class. These potential costs would arise if the actual market value of the portfolio moved to the worst case loss price within 24 hours. For EEX futures, positions can be held in annual, seasonal, quarterly and monthly contracts simultaneously. Here, long term contracts can fully overlap short-term contracts. In terms of the risk of a potential loss on the next trading day, it is possible that gains in one contract can partially compensate for losses in other overlapping contracts. Delivery Margin EEX: This is the margin requirement that covers the risk emerging from delivery of energy futures during a period. The delivery margin is carried forward during the margin processing. Delivery margin is calculated the first time on the expiration day when the calculation of the additional margin is disabled Calculation of Margin Requirement A detailed description of the calculation of margin requirement can be found in the Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual, the Eurex Risk-based Margining brochure and the EEX Futures Market Risk-based Margining document. Margin requirements are calculated based on derivative positions and positions arising from bond or equity trades. Positions arising from bond trades are determined, first, by separating repo transactions into two separate bond versus cash trades. Each bond versus cash trade, originating from a repo trade or from a cash bond trade, or equity versus cash trade is further broken down into a bond/equity position and a cash position. Each of these positions is defined by a date and by a quantity, of bonds/equity or of cash, to be delivered or received on such date. With the Enhanced Risk Solution, Margin Parameters are provided to the Eurex Members intraday via messages in FIXML format. They are also provided by the Eurex Real-time Risk Management system in the end-of-day FPPARM file sent to the Eurex Member Integration System Server (MISS), and are available on the Eurex Clearing AG website (

99 Clearing Overview Page Reporting the Total Margin Calculation for an Account The calculations of the total margin requirement and of the total margin credit of a margin class are presented in the RPTCC050 DAILY MARGIN REPORT and RPTCC055 DAILY MARGIN OFFSET REPORT. Refer to section Margining for OTC Flexible Contracts Transactions on page 101 for further information Netting The following applies to Eurex and EEX. First, with the exception of gross cash market positions, all the options and futures, bond and equity positions contained in a margin class are subject to netting. For options, open long positions are offset against open short positions. Similarly, with futures, long positions of a contract month are balanced against the short positions of the same contract month. Only the resulting net-long and the net-short positions of each options series or futures contract of a margin class are used to calculate the necessary margin requirement. The Margined Position Overview window shows the relevant information for the calculation of net positions for options and futures contracts Reporting the Calculation of Futures Spread Margin This section applies to Eurex only. Calculations of futures spread margins are given on the RPTCCO20 FUTURES SPREAD MARGIN REPORT. No spread margin calculation is available for EEX products Reporting the Calculation of the Premium Margin This section applies to Eurex and EEX. The calculation of the net premium margin is shown in the RPTCC010 PREMIUM MARGIN REPORT Reporting the Calculation of Current Liquidating Margin The current liquidating values of bond and related cash positions are shown in the RPTCC011 CURRENT LIQUIDATING VALUES REPORT.

100 Clearing Overview Page Reporting the Calculation of Additional Margin The calculation of the additional margin uses the following input parameters: Risk-free interest rate, which is used to calculate the theoretical options prices by the Option Pricing Model (OPM) Dividend information for underlying stocks Margin parameter (determined on the basis of volatility) for all underlying and underlying securities used to calculate margin intervals Offset factors for margin classes that are part of a margin group These parameters are displayed on the Option Margin Parameter Overview window. For EEX, margin parameters are adjusted per margin class from time to time by EEX and published in the form of circular notices on the Internet. Eurex Margin Parameters are additionally provided: In the end-of-day FPPARM and FPPARA files sent to the Eurex Member Integration System Server (MISS). On the Eurex Clearing AG website ( By the Enhanced Risk Solution, intraday, via messages in FIXML format. The Eurex Clearing AG website also provides the following additional parameters in the FPPARA and FPPARV files: Maturity factors used to adjust margin intervals based on time to maturity for maturity-dependent margin classes. Volatility offsets used to adjust the implied volatility of option series for different projected underlying prices. The volatility of the underlying instrument is an important parameter in the calculation of the theoretical price of an option series. To model the changes in implied volatility, Eurex applies: (1) The volatility offsets, and (2) The short option adjustment. The volatility values used for the theoretical price calculation of various projected underlying prices are displayed on the theoretical price file FPTHED. The calculation of additional margin is reported on the reports RPTCC040 LIQUIDATING VALUES and RPTCC045 ADDITIONAL MARGIN. For a detailed description of the calculations, please refer to the Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual Margin Requirement for GC Pooling Trades The margin requirements are incorporated in the risk-based margining report RPTCC050, represented by own margin classes, e.g. XE01.

101 Clearing Overview Page Margining for OTC Flexible Contracts Transactions This chapter applies to Eurex only. OTC Flexible Options transactions are considered as being within the margin class of the respective underlying for cross margining purposes. Traditional-style OTC Flexible Options transactions impose a premium margin requirement, while fixed income OTC Flexible Options impose a variation margin requirement. Both traditional-style and fixed income OTC Flexible Options require additional margin to cover a worst case scenario during the next trading day. OTC Flexible Futures transactions are included within the margin classes of the standard futures product. Margin information for OTC Flexible Contracts are included in the existing margin reports. In the reports RPTCC010 PREMIUM MARGIN, RPTCC040 LIQUIDATING VALUES and RPTCI140 VARIATION PREMIUM MARGIN, it is represented by separate rows. The report RPTCB064 FLEXIBLE CONTRACTS DAILY TRANSACTIONS contains the premium and variation margin calculation for OTC Flexible Contracts transactions. The margins are listed separately for each active subtrade and the subtrades of the same trade are grouped together. The resulting premium payment out of OTC Flexible Option transactions, i.e. premium for traditional style options and mark-to-market premium for future style options, is summarized in the report RPTCB090 PREMIUM OVERALL SUMMARY. A theoretical price file FPTHEF - Theoretical values for OTC Flexible Contracts, containing the theoretical prices for all open OTC Flexible Contracts transactions is provided. The theoretical price file FPTHED also lists the theoretical liquidation values for OTC Flexible Contracts on a per transaction basis. Please refer to the document Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual for additional information related to the margining of OTC Flexible Option transactions Margin Requirement for an Exchange Member Account This section applies to Eurex and EEX. The daily margin requirement of an account is the sum of all margin requirements from all margin classes of the account. If the result is a margin credit, it is used to offset margin requirements in other currencies. The calculation of the margin requirement of a member account is shown in the RPTCC050 DAILY MARGIN REPORT, RPTCC055 DAILY MARGIN OFFSET REPORT and RPTCC060 DAILY MARGIN SUMMARY REPORT. For EEX products, the premium margin (options on energy futures), additional margin and the delivery margin (futures) contribute to the margin requirement. Both are shown in the RPTCC050 DAILY MARGIN REPORT and the RPTCC060 DAILY MARGIN SUMMARY REPORT in the same way as Eurex products.

102 Clearing Overview Page Margin Requirement for a Clearing Member This section applies to Eurex and EEX. The aggregation of margin requirements for a Clearing Member depends on the Client Asset Protection Solution selected by the Clearing Member, while the calculation of the margin requirement of a Clearing Member is shown on the Daily Margin Overview window and the RPTCC060 DAILY MARGIN SUMMARY REPORT. For further information about margin requirements, refer to document X4104 System Overview and Information Manual Interest on Cash Margin This section only applies to Eurex. The interest on the members cash collaterals that has been received on a cash account of Eurex Clearing is calculated for every calendar day, including official holidays and weekends. The calculation is conducted at the end of the month, or on one of the first trading days of the following month. Immediately after the monthly interest calculation is finished, i.e. on the same day, the calculated interest is posted to the Clearing Member cash account. The Daily Cash Transaction Overview window shows the transaction details of the interest payments. If a Clearing Members has provided cash collateral for different collateral pools, the interest is calculated per collateral pool Interest Rate Definition The applicable interest rate is defined by Eurex Market Supervision. All valid Eurex currencies can earn interest, and the interest is denominated for each currency in the same currency as the cash balance earning the interest (i.e. EUR earns EUR interest, CHF earns CHF interest). There is one rate per Eurex currency, and the rate is valid for all Clearing Members. An interest-free limit per currency can be defined by Eurex Market Supervision. Only the cash amount exceeding the interest-free limit is used to calculate interest payment Interest Calculation Every trading day, at a pre-defined time, the Eurex System takes a snapshot of the Clearing Member cash balances. Only Eurex currencies are processed for the daily cash balance snapshot. By default, the last business day of the month is used for the monthly interest payment. After interest calculation, the interest is credited to the member accounts during the Eurex end-of-day batch of the same day. Calculation and payment of interest on cash margin is processed during the same end-of-day batch. The total interest per month is accumulated for every day of the month for which interest is calculated. Interest payment cash flows are shown on the Daily Cash Transaction Overview window.

103 Clearing Overview Page 103 Clearing members receive the RPTCD230 MONTHLY INTEREST REPORT, which is processed like other monthly reports except that no historical reports are available. A summary of the daily cash transactions is available on the RPTCD009 DAILY CASH TRANSACTIONS REPORT. The cash transactions are shown at the level of Clearing Member, currency, transaction type, value date and Exchange Member. For further information about interest calculation, refer to document X4104 System Overview and Information Manual Daily Settlement This section does not apply to participants of The Clearing Corporation using the Global Clearing Link. Eurex Clearing Members are able to enter collateral release requests real-time using the Clearing GUI. It further processes security collateral, cash collateral and guarantees to calculate the collateral balance for margin, clearing fund and company capital Purpose The purpose of the daily settlement is the management of the Clearing Member cash and securities accounts as well as covering the Clearing Member margin requirement with the collateral provided on these accounts. The clearing house carries out a revaluation of the securities pledged as collateral, daily, or as required, in order to determine the variations of value due to market fluctuations and thus to reduce the risk for the clearing house. Based on this revaluation of the deposited securities, and on changes in the Clearing Member cash accounts resulting from the daily business, the clearing house enters either a margin call or cash withdrawal on the Clearing Member central bank account Management and Revaluation of the Pledged Collateral As cover for their margin requirements, the Clearing Members can provide securities and/or cash collateral to the clearing house.

104 Clearing Overview Page Management and Revaluation of Securities Collateral At the very least, Clearing Members must have a collateral with the CSD pledged to the clearing house. Members can have multiple collateral accounts on different CSDs. The collateral pledged in favor of the clearing house is booked in this security deposit account. Securities are consigned to this account, on the Clearing Member instruction to the CSD, to transfer specific securities from the normal deposit account of the Clearing Members to the security deposit account. See Eurex User Manual - System Overview & Information Manual for a list of the securities accepted as collateral by the clearing house. For Client Asset Protection, the collateral of individually segregated Non Clearing Member and Net Omnibus segregated clients is held on specific separated collateral accounts with the CSDs. On the Security Deposit Overview [Modified] window, the Clearing Member can see which securities are deposited with the clearing house and how they are used. This window shows the securities found in the security deposit, their use as full cover of short positions, specific equity collateral or as cover of the margin requirement (bulk) and also lists the papers about to be released. From this window, the member can call up the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] and Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview windows. Clearing members assign specific equity collateral to positions in proprietary or agent margin accounts, view the quantity and price of pledged collateral and specify the pledge account and the CSD where the security is pledged while assigning cover on the Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window. A Clearing Member can perform this task on own account and on behalf of the related Non Clearing Members. Deposited equities are valued at their minimum expected underlying value as determined by Risk-based Margining and reduce the unadjusted margin requirement by this value for the given margin period. Note that since a margin surplus within a margin class is not permitted, remaining assigned equities are used as bulk collateral. The specific equity collateral assignments performed intraday get effective during the next overnight batch run. In case a relationship of a Non Clearing Member to a Clearing Member is terminated, we strongly recommend the Clearing Member to check and remove all remaining specific equity collateral allocations for this Non Clearing Member in order to guarantee optimized collateral usage. The Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window and the RPTCD020 DAILY SECURITY MOVEMENT AND COVERAGE REPORT give information on the movements in the security deposit account. In the RPTCD080 MONTHLY SECURITY MOVEMENT COVERAGE REPORT, the information is given on a monthly basis. On the Security Deposit Overview [Modified] window, the movements are summarized by security numbers for deposit and release, and are divided according to their use as full cover of short positions, specific equity collateral or as cover of the The Clearing Member must monitor the maturity dates of the bonds on deposit. The RPTCD030 SECURITY EXPIRATION REPORT provides a list of maturity dates for bonds used as margin cover and company capital/clearing fund cover. The clearing house values the collateral on the security deposit account of each Clearing Member. This value is calculated by using the closing prices of stock exchanges, adjusted by a discount. Individual information on the valuation of securities is contained in the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window, and in the RPTCD031 DAILY SECURITY VALUATION REPORT, which gives the market value and the cover amount of the entire security deposit.

105 Clearing Overview Page 105 Members can inquire about all commonly used collateral stored in the Eurex System on the Collateral Security Information window Cash Amounts Clearing members can deposit cash as collateral in a Eurex currency. The amounts are transferred from the central bank account, which each Clearing Member must have, to the clearing house central bank account. For each Clearing Member, the clearing house keeps internal cash accounts on which these payments, as well as the premiums and fees, are booked. If the value of the deposited collateral does not cover the margin requirements, a negative balance, the amount not covered is debited from the CB account of the Clearing Member. The clearing house effects a transfer from the CB account of the Clearing Member. A positive balance is used, when necessary, to cover the margin requirements. Cash balances are visible on the Collateral Status Detail [Modified] window. This window displays the current collateral status for a specific member either in one currency or aggregated to the clearing currency. The cash collateral transactions are visible on the reports RPTCD010 DAILY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR CLEARING MEMBER and RPTCD070 MONTHLY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR CLEARING MEMBER. The Exchange Rate Overview [Modified] window displays current and previous exchange rates, conversion units, settlement periods and the decimal shifts of the currencies used by the clearing house. Individual information on the monthly interest credits are delivered by the RPTCD230 INTEREST REPORT. Correspondent banks can receive the reports RPTCD011 DAILY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR ACCOUNT HOLDER and RPTCD071 MONTHLY CASH ACCOUNT STATEMENT FOR ACCOUNT HOLDER. The precondition to receive both the reports is a MISS-connection. For a selectable usage type, the Collateral Status Detail [Modified] window shows the start of day, the completed deposits and withdrawals and a balance. If a currency is provided, the amounts are shown for the selected currency and also converted to the members clearing currency. Cash amounts deposited for the collection of interest are shown in the report in RPTCD031 DAILY SECURITIES VALUATION under a separate ISIN for the accepted currencies as well as in the Security Deposit Overview [Modified] window.

106 Clearing Overview Page Margin Cover The margin requirement, calculated according to the procedure, is set against the deposited securities and cash collateral for the specific pool. In general, if the deposited securities are not sufficient, the deficit is debited from the central bank account of the Clearing Member. If segregated client collateral pools are setup, collateral shortages in the segregated client pools are covered by a surplus of the default (non-segregated) pool of the Clearing Member (if any). If the surplus in the default pool is not sufficient to cover the collateral shortages of all segregated pools, or if a shortage is calculated for the default pool, the overall deficit resulting from all collateral pools is debited from the central bank of the Clearing Member and credited in the Eurex System to the default pool. Members receive information about shortfall/surplus and always have an up-to-date overview of their pledged securities including the collateral value through the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window in case they are subscribed to the respective broadcast stream. In the event of deposit rejections (i.e. ISIN of collateral unknown) Eurex instructs near-time about a deposit reversal (back to the members main account) Daily Settlement of Cascading EEX Futures Detailed descriptions of the settlement of cascading EEX futures may be found in EEX Futures Market Contract Specifications. This document is on the web at in the Documentations section Daily Settlement of the Eurex/KOSPI Product The daily futures on the KOSPI 200 Option will be traded at Eurex through Eurex Members and will initially be cleared at Eurex Clearing AG for daily settlement (of profits/losses). Settlement information, which will be needed to open the respective KOSPI 200 Options positions in the KRX system, will be transferred from Eurex Clearing to KRX after each trading day. KRX will transfer the settlement information to the respective KRX member for entry of the respective KOSPI 200 Options in the KRX system via the OTC block trade functionality at KRX prior to the market opening at KRX. Settlement will therefore be performed at KRX. Because positions will be fully settled in Eurex and Eurex Clearing AG will not hold the positions overnight, there will be no additional margin requirement in place nor will additional margin be calculated. Only the variation margin (mark to market) will be required, in Korean Won.

107 Clearing Overview Page Duties of the Clearing House With respect to the daily settlement, the clearing house has the following responsibilities: Processing of cash movements and of deposits and releases of deposited securities. Valuation of the collateral. Comparing the margin requirement of a Clearing Member with the value of the deposited securities by applying the enhanced pool concept in order to calculate the margin call. Collecting the margin requirement Duties of the Members Clearing members have the following duties: Depositing cash or securities as cover for the margin requirement. Opening an account at the central bank for all Eurex currencies used for trading purposes, either directly or via a correspondent bank, in which the clearing house can directly book debits and credits. Non-Eurex currency accounts must be opened at CBF. Opening a deposit account and security deposit account at the CSD. The security deposit account contains the collateral pledged to the clearing house. Maximizing the usage of provided collateral by assigning it in the most efficient manner.

108 Clearing Overview Page Give-up Trades This section applies to Eurex and EEX. The process described in the following also applies to imported trades Purpose A give-up trade is a trade executed by an Exchange Member which, following prior acceptance by the give-up Clearing Member, is transferred to another Exchange Member for settlement (takeup). The take-up Clearing Member can either accept or reject the trade after the take-up Exchange Member has accepted the take-up. In the following figure, the various participants, states and transitions of the give-up and take-up process are displayed. The highlighted areas show the acceptance process by the give-up and take-up Clearing Members: Order Give Up Exchange Member Give Up Clearing Member Take Up Exchange Member Take Up Clearing Member G1 Account A1 Account Predesignated <P> G2 Account Change (GU Exc Mbr) Change Cancel Designate for Give Up Give Up Accept Designate for Take Up Take Up Accept ("Normal") Give Up Designated Give Up Accepted Take Up Designated Take Up Accepted < > Designate for Give Up <G> <M> <N> <T> Cancel (Re)Designate Cancel Undesignate Cancel Undesignated (GU Clg Mbr) Undesignate <U> (GU Clg Mbr) Undesignate (GU Exc Mbr) Undesignate Rejected (GU Exc Mbr) Delete <R> (TU Exc Mbr) Reject (TU Clg Mbr) Reject Trades given-up by transaction can only be given-up from the agent account (A1 - A9), but taken-up as well in the principal accounts (P1 and P2). Trades given-up by order, only the part of the order located in the A1 account can be given-up. Only transactions that originated on the trading day (current give-up) or the previous business day (historical give-up) may be designated. All give-up and take-up transactions require the acceptance of the Exchange Member's respective Clearing Member. Acceptance must follow on the same day as the transaction took place.

109 Clearing Overview Page 109 Acceptance can either be performed automatically or manually, depending on the settings the Member Relationship Overview window. If a give-up trade is not accepted by the end of the postfull-trading period, the trade remains in the agent account (A1 - A9) of the original Exchange Member. Deleted or rejected give-up trades also remain in the agent account of the Exchange Member. Trades originating from combination orders can only be transferred as single give-up trades. Give-up trades cannot be done for products that are in holiday status. No historical give-up is possible the next business day for products that are on holiday the day before Specifying a Give-up Trade A trade can be designated as a give-up trade by the end of the post-full trading period if this has not already been done during order entry. Closing transactions cannot be designated for give-up, nor can give-up trades be transferred to Exchange Members without take-up allowance Acceptance of a Give-up Trade When a give-up trade is accepted, or taken-up, by the Exchange Member, and, after that, is accepted by the take-up Clearing Member, the trade, partially recalculated transaction fees and the premiums of traditional style options, are transferred to the recipients take-up account. Valid take-up accounts are the agent account and the proprietary accounts, P1 and P Refusing a Give-up Trade The recipient and, prior to that, the take-up Clearing Member, can explicitly refuse to accept give-up trades. If give-up trades are not accepted by the take-up Clearing Member and, after that, by the take-up Exchange Member, the trade becomes a normal trade again. The positions remain in the agent account of the Exchange Member Unsuccessfully Processed Give-up Trade [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: Give-up requests which are not completely processed are re-allocated over night. For pending give-up transactions, the Eurex System runs a 'clean-up' during end-of-day processing. All give-up requests which are not in state Take-Up Accepted or Rejected are reallocated the next day and the referred give-up information as well as the last status are retained. If a give-up status can not be recovered, it is set to U(ndesignated).

110 Clearing Overview Page 110 Exceptions: The respective contract does not mature on the trade day (t=0). The respective trade was entered on t=0. No capital adjustment is taking place for the respective product. The respective position is larger than or equal to the number of designated contracts. This might not be the case if short positions have been reduced due to an assignment or if a member position transfer was processed. As a result no manual re-allocation will be necessary for not fully processed give-ups from t Cancelling a Give-up Trade Pending and rejected give-up trades can be deleted at any time by the Exchange Member who originally entered the trade Duties of the Clearing House The clearing house is responsible for the following items related to give-up trades: Posting all transactions to the members relevant position account Adjusting transactions and positions at the request of Exchange Members Duties of the Members Exchange members are responsible for the following items related to give-up trades: Entering any transaction and position adjustments Requesting entry of transaction and position adjustments on their behalf by the clearing house 2.13 Management of the GCM - NCM Relationship Purpose A Non Clearing Member must have a clearing agreement with one General Clearing Member. Transactions of an NCM can only be settled by the associated GCM. Only the clearing house can carry out a change of the GCM. The relationships between NCMs, which are also Eurex Exchange Members, and their GCMs can be displayed on the Member Relationship Overview window. Only Eurex Exchange Members are displayed in this window. As opposed to Eurex Members, EEX General Clearing Members are not allowed to act as a regular trading member.

111 Clearing Overview Page Duties of the Clearing House The duties of the clearing house are: Keeping the NCM position accounts Maintaining the agreed GCM-NCM relationship Duties of the Members Clearing members must do the following: Sign a GCM-NCM agreement with the corresponding NCM Carry out the clearing resulting from this commitment The Non Clearing Members must do the following: Name a GCM Sign a GCM-NCM agreement with the corresponding GCM

112 Window Flow Clearing GUI Page Window Flow Clearing GUI The following two graphics provide an overview of the windows of Clearing System. An overall window flow is given, showing the structure of window groups. Click any item of the diagram to display the respective chapter of the document.

113 Window Flow Clearing GUI Page 113 System Connection Login/Logout Message Clearing System Trade Management Settlement Collateral Risk Management Cash Position Overview Exercise Overview Collateral Pool Overview Daily Margin Overview Daily Cash Transaction Overview Position Transfer Bulk Load Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Collateral Pool Relations Margined Position Overview Position Close Out Bulk Load Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] Collateral Pool Status Guarantee Overview Position Adjustment - Close Out Notification Overview CSD Overview Risk Monitoring Maintenance [Modified] Position Adjustment - Account Transfer Notification Detail Overview CSD Detail [Modified] Margin Requirement Information Position Transfer Entry Notification Allocation Summary Overview Collateral Account Overview [Modified] Position Detail Overview Allocation Overview Collateral Status Detail [Modified] Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation Futures Deliverable Position Overview Security Deposit Overview [Modified] Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Position Detail Maintenance - O/C Adjustment Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] Position Detail Maintenance - Text Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] Position Transfer Overview Give-up Overview [Modified] Give-up Maintenance Take-up Overview Legend Take-up Maintenance New Window OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Changed Window Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Unchanged Window

114 Window Flow Clearing GUI Page 114 System Connection Login/Logout Message Clearing System Info Member Settings Security Help Clearing Board Member General Information Profile Selection Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] On this window... Market Supervision Messages Member Relationship Overview Profile Maintenance User Security Profile Maintenance About... Settlement Price Overview Settings Preferences PIN Maintenance What s new... External Underlying Selection Login/Logout Product Statistics Overview Change Password Contract Statistics Overview Collateral Security Information Deliverable Bonds Overview Legend Option Margin Parameter Overview New Window Exchange Rate Overview [Modified] Changed Window Contract Mapping Unchanged Window

115 Window Layouts and s Page Window Layouts and s 4.1 Startup Windows System Connection The System Connection window allows the user to connect the application to the architecture. System Connection window Overview The System Connection window opens automatically when the application is started. In order to connect the application to the architecture, it is necessary to enter a valid front-end user identification and the corresponding password. The member system administrator provides the user identification and password. The: OK button is enabled as soon as the user identification and the password are entered. Cancel button is always enabled and closes the window. After a successful connection to the architecture, the System Connection window closes and the Login/Logout window is displayed. Identifier Type CT UserID E Enter the user identification (between 5 and 20 alphanumeric characters) Password E Enter the password (between 5 and 20 alphanumeric characters)

116 Window Layouts and s Page 116 System Connection Buttons Identifier OK Cancel Connects to the architecture after user ID and password are validated Cancels any changes and closes the window System Connection Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the System Connection - Message Log window Login/Logout The Login/Logout window allows the user to log in to and out of the Eurex System. A note is displayed on the window stating Please note: You must be the registered owner of the Trader ID that you use to log on to the Eurex GUI. Login/Logout window

117 Window Layouts and s Page 117 Overview The Login/Logout window opens automatically after successful connection to the application through the System Connection window. The member security coordinator provides the user identification and password. In order to log in to the Eurex electronic clearing system back-end, it is necessary to enter a valid user identification, corresponding password and to click the Login button. The Login button is enabled as soon as the user identification and the password are entered. A successful connection is confirmed in the message bar. If the entered password has expired, the Password Expired - Change Password window is displayed and prompts the member to modify the password. The new password selected must be of length of 8 characters and cannot contain spaces. This window remains open for the entire session. The Logout button is enabled as soon as the user has logged in. Click the Logout button to end the connection to the Eurex System. The Cancel button is always enabled and closes the window. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Identifier Type CT Trader ID E Trader Identifier (11 alphanumeric characters) Password E Password (8 alphanumeric characters) Login/Logout Table Column Exch Long Name Status TraderID Exchange ID Long description of the exchange Status Trader Identifier

118 Window Layouts and s Page 118 Login/Logout Buttons Identifier Login Logout Cancel Logs in to the main application after user ID and password are validated Logs out of the system Closes the window Login/Logout Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Login/Logout - Message Log window Main Menu Clearing System window allows the user to access all main windows. Eurex Clearing System Main Menu window Overview The Eurex Clearing System Main Menu and Message Log windows open after successfully logging into the system. The Eurex Clearing System Main Menu is the main window of the application and provides access to system functions under the respective menu items. Closing this window logs the user out of the system and ends the clearing session. Besides providing access to all main windows, the Eurex Clearing System window allows the user to save the configuration of the main menu, and all windows which can be directly opened from the main menu, except those under the menus Settings and Help. The location, size, column settings, filter settings and profile settings of currently open windows are saved by selecting Save Window Configuration menu item from the Settings menu. The next time the user logs in, the last saved window configuration is restored.

119 Window Layouts and s Page 119 All system functions are available through the following menus: Menu Window Trade Mgmt Settlement Collateral Risk Mgmt Cash Info Member Settings Security Help Logs out of the system Trade and Position Management Exercise/Assignment and Notification/Allocation and Delivery Monitoring Collateral Management Risk Management Information Perform Cash Transactions Information Windows Member Information User Specific Settings such as Profiles, Desktop Setup, Colors, etc. Security Settings Online Help Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Exit Closes the application and logs out of the system. Ctrl+Q Trade Mgmt Position Overview Displays the sum of daily position movements and the up-to-date position balances in option and futures contracts. F8 Position Detail Overview Displays detailed position balance information for contracts; all trade adjustments except give-up and take-up can be performed from this window. F9 Position Transfer Overview Displays position transfer requests; confirmation and cancellation of position transfer requests are possible in this window. Ctrl+O Give-up Overview Displays all trade transactions valid for Give-up and allows the member to Give-up orders and trades. Shift+ F11 Take-up Overview Displays all give-up trades designated to this member by other members. F12

120 Window Layouts and s Page 120 Menu Bar Item Shortcut OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Supports the clearing functionality for OTC Flexible Contracts transactions. Settlement a Exercise Overview Displays all open long positions of an Exchange Member; the exercise of open long positions and exercise adjustments are possible via this window. F2 Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Allows the user to enter, modify, delete and view minimum in-the-money amount limits for automatic exercise. Exercise Assignment Overview Displays all applicable fields for exercised long positions and assigned short positions per options contract per Exchange Member per account Notification Overview Displays open, notified, and designated give-up short positions. F4 Notification Allocation Summary Overview Displays notified short positions, allocated long positions, nominal amounts and invoicing amounts for the delivery procedure. F5 Allocation Overview Displays the ISIN, name of the assigned collateral, number of the assigned loans per futures contract and settlement amount. Futures Deliverable Position Overview Displays information about short, long, notified and pending give-up positions. Collateral Collateral Pool Overview Provides an overview of the pools and their related members. Collateral Pool Relations Displays an overview of the pool s relations. Collateral Pool Status Displays an overview of the margin coverage per pool and Clearing Member. CSD Overview Displays all CSDs at Eurex.

121 Window Layouts and s Page 121 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Risk Mgmt Collateral Account Overview Collateral Status Detail Security Deposit Overview Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Collateral Transaction Overview Security Collateral Transaction Entry Daily Margin Overview Margined Position Overview Guarantee Overview Risk Monitoring Maintenance Margin Requirement Information Displays collateral accounts for a member. Displays the current collateral status for a specific pool of a Clearing Member either in one currency or aggregated to the clearing currency. Displays the balances and movements of collateral in the security deposit account. Allows the user to assign/de-assign the specific equity collateral for a given trading member to the proprietary or agent margin account. Displays the collateral transactions. This window is used for collateral withdrawals by a member and deposits by Market Supervision on behalf of a member. Displays the option premium margin, futures spread margin, additional margin, unadjusted margin and total margin requirements for a member. Displays the net positions per contract for a member. Displays the clearing guarantees pledged by other members for the specific Clearing Member. Allows to stop/release a member from trading and clearing activities and to maintain the risk protection limits. Displays the margin requirement information of Non Clearing Members (NCM) and the total margin requirement of Clearing Members (CM).

122 Window Layouts and s Page 122 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Cash Daily Cash Transaction Overview Displays the individual cash transactions in the cash account. Info Clearing Board Allows the user to open a variety of clearing windows within a single display. Market Supervision Messages Displays messages from Market Supervision. Ctrl+N Settlement Price Overview Allows the user to view the closing settlement prices. Ctrl+F2 Ticker Board Product Statistics Overview Contract Statistics Overview Collateral Security Information Deliverable Bonds Overview Option Margin Parameter Overview Exchange Rate Overview Contract Mapping Displays online trade price information for a specified contract or for the contracts of a specified profile. Displays an overview of the market; price and volume information on each product; general overview of all contracts Displays a summary of all the tradable contracts of the selected product. Displays and maintain securities details used as collateral Displays all deliverable bonds for the selected contracts, and the information necessary to calculate the conversion factors of these bonds. Displays the option margin parameters used in the calculation of settlement prices using the Black- Scholes option pricing model and theoretical prices. Displays exchange rates, conversion factors and decimal shifts for all currencies used by the clearing house. Displays all mappings between Eurex contract and product IDs and OCC contract and product IDs. Ctrl+T

123 Window Layouts and s Page 123 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Member Member General Information Displays general information about a member, for example collateral data such as stop indicators, minimum margin, minimum company capital and minimum clearing fund amounts Member Relationship Overview Displays which Clearing Member a NCM has a clearing agreement with, and for a GCM, all relationships with NCMs. Settings Profile Selection Allows the user to add, modify, delete, or select profiles. Shift + F7 Preferences Allows the user to: Set colors, fonts, date and number formats. Predefine a set of text fields. Predefine the Member entry fields. Ctrl + G Login/Logout Allows the user to log in and log out of the system Ctrl+L Change Password Save Window Configuration Clear Window Configuration Allows the user to change the login password Saves the current configuration (i.e. position, size and settings) of all windows which have been opened directly from the main menu or by use of shortcut, except those listed under the menus Settings, Help and the Main Menu itself. Restores the window configuration to the default Ctrl+W Security Product Assignment Maintenance User Security Profile Maintenance PIN Maintenance Sets up product assignments for traders Displays and maintains user security profiles Allows Eurex, Traders and Security Coordinators to manage and maintain PISNS: codes used by Eurex to verify the identity of a trader making a request for them to act on their behalf in the event of an emergency, or to reverse a trade

124 Window Layouts and s Page 124 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Help On this window... Displays the help document and allows the user to access helpful information. F1 About... Information about the software version. What s new Opens the What s new... window, which describes the new functionality and features of the current release. a. Does not apply to EEX Message Log The Message Log window displays messages generated by the system or by Market Supervision in chronological order. Market Supervision information is broadcast on the (Application) Message Log, displayed as 'MS- INFO'. Click the message in the (Application) Message Log to open the Market Supervision Messages window. Message Log window Window-Specific Message Log window

125 Window Layouts and s Page 125 Overview The Message Log window is displayed after a successful connection to the system. This window cannot be closed. Double-clicking the status display of a window opens its Window-specific - Message Log window and updates the log window contents. Only one instance of each window specific message log window is allowed for each parent window. They contain up to 50 previous status messages. The messages also appear in the respective parent windows' bottom status display, except for information messages. All major exception codes generated by the front-end are displayed in the Message Log window. In addition, short (max. 30 digits) messages from Market Supervision are displayed. Product state changes to Halt' are displayed in the Message Log window. All other messages from Market Supervision is displayed in the Market Supervision Messages window. Market Supervision information broadcasts on the (Application) Message Log, displayed as 'MARKET NEWS AVAILABLE, CLICK FOR MORE INFORMATION'. If the message is clicked in the (Application) Message Log, the Market Supervision Messages window is displayed. The last message is shown on the top line regardless of the scroll position of the text in the table. The table is dynamically updated. All messages received since login can be reviewed. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar. Message Log Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

126 Window Layouts and s Page 126 Windows-Specific Message Log Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close... Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Message Log Table Column Exch Date Time Severity Message Exchange ID Date the message was initiated (brackets indicate local machine time) Time the message was initiated (brackets indicate local machine time) Information on success or error Content of the message

127 Window Layouts and s Page Trade Management Position Overview The Position Overview window is accessed via the Trade Management menu and displays the summary of position movements and the up-to-date position balances by contract. Position Overview window Overview The Position Overview window is accessed via the Trade Management menu and is displayed with no information in the table if no window settings have previously been saved. To select a profile, a product or a contract, select Clearing Filter... from the Select menu to display the Position Filter window. To specify additional filtering criteria, type in the data in the corresponding mandatory/optional entry fields (mandatory: profile, product or contract, Clearing Member and Exchange Member; optional: transaction date and account). The user can see positions from the last four business days. A specific contract or product can be selected by using the contract entry line at the top of the window, where the other current filter settings are used. For options the Contract field allows the entry of product and expiration, to filter for information related to all contracts of a product expiring in the same month. If no filter settings are specified, the contract field is not enabled. Click: Upload Pos. Transf. to open the Position Transfer Bulk Load window and enable the bulk upload of position transfers. Upload Close Out to open the Position Close Out Bulk Load window and enable the bulk upload of position close outs.

128 Window Layouts and s Page 128 The Detail... button is enabled when only one row is selected. By clicking this button, the Position Detail Overview window is displayed and detailed information is displayed for the position selected. Select a row in the table with the current business date and click the: Close Out... button to open the Position Adjustment - Close Out and Position Adjustment - Account Transfer window and close out positions. Act. Transfer... button to open the Position Adjustment - Close Out and Position Adjustment - Account Transfer window and transfer positions to another account. Pos. Transfer button to open the Position Transfer Entry window and transfer positions to another member. The table is dynamically updated with new positions and position adjustments. Changes are highlighted. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Clearing Filter... Opens the Clearing Filter window Position Upload Pos. Transf. Upload Close Out... Detail... Close Out... Act. Transfer... Pos. Transfer... Opens the Position Transfer Bulk Load window Opens the Position Close Out Bulk Load window Opens the Position Detail Overview window Opens the Position Adjustment window Opens the Position Adjustment window Opens the Position Transfer Entry window

129 Window Layouts and s Page 129 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select... Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreezes all the columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Position Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Curr Contract TranDate StartLong StartShort DailyLong DailyShort OpenLong OpenShort Noti/ExerPos Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member Account type Currency of the product Contract number Transaction date Long positions start of day Short positions start of day Daily long positions Daily short positions Open long positions Open short positions Notified/exercised position

130 Window Layouts and s Page 130 Position Overview Table Column AbandPos DsgnOpnLong DsgnOpnShort DsgnOpnLongGiveUp Abandoned position Total designated open long positions Total designated open short positions Designated open long positions for give-ups DsgnOpnShortGiveUp Designated open short positions for give-ups DsgnOpnLongPosTsf DsgnOpnShortPosTsf CashAmnt TotFees Designated open long positions for position transfers Designated open short positions for position transfers Premium/variation margin incurred Total fees Position Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Futures: Underlying Expiration month and year Product ID: Underlying Product and Expiration ID: Underlying Expiration month and year *

131 Window Layouts and s Page 131 Position Overview Buttons Identifier Upload Pos. Transf. Upload Close Out... Detail... Close Out... Act. Transfer... Pos. Transfer... Opens the Position Transfer Bulk Load window and enables the bulk upload of position transfers. Opens the Position Close Out Bulk Load window and enables the bulk upload of position close outs. Opens the Position Detail Overview window Opens the Position Adjustment - Close Out window Opens the Position Adjustment - Account Transfer window Opens the Position Transfer Entry window Position Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Overview - Message Log window

132 Window Layouts and s Page Clearing Filter The Clearing Filter window allows the user to specify filtering criteria which can be used to format inquiry requests on the calling overview window. Clearing Filter window Overview The Clearing Filter window can be called from several overview windows via the Select menu and the Clearing Filter... menu item. Depending on the calling window, the Clearing Filter window may be displayed with a different name in the title bar (for example, Position Filter, as shown in the example above) and contain different mandatory/optional entry fields, as described below. Each overview window has its individual set of filtering criteria. Filter criteria of one overview window do not become active for other overview windows. By selecting a profile, the user can use the Product Filter field to specify which products should be offered in the context menu of the Product field. For the Eurex/ISE Link, the user can select a specific, automatically created OCC profile to reduce the number of products offered in the Product field to products relevant to the Product Mapping or Contract Mapping windows. A default profile EUREX UCTS = ALL UCTS - OCC UCTS - EEX UCTS. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar.

133 Window Layouts and s Page 133 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Contract... Opens the Product Selection window Opens the Contract Selection window Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Clearing Filter Enabled Fields Overview Calling window Allocation Overview Daily Margin Overview Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] Futures Deliverable Position Overview Margined Position Overview Notification Overview Position Overview Fields enabled Profile, Product, ExpMth, ClgMbr, ExchMbr, Act ClgMbr, ExchMbr, Curr Profile, Call/Put, Product, ExpMth, Strike Price, Version Number, ClgMbr, ExchMbr, Exercised, Assigned, TrnDate, Act Profile, Product, ExpMth, ClgMbr Profile, Call/Put, Product, ExpMth, Strike Price, Version Number, ClgMbr, ExchMbr Profile, Product, ExpMth, ClgMbr, ExchMbr, Act Profile, Call/Put, Product, ExpMth, Strike Price, Version Number, ClgMbr, ExchMbr, TrnDate, Act Clearing Filter Field Group Identifier Type CT Profile/Product/Contract E Entry of a value based on the selected checkbox * Product Filter D Enables specific products to be offered in the Product field ExpMth E Expiration month (entry is optional)

134 Window Layouts and s Page 134 Clearing Filter Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr E Clearing member * ExchMbr E Exchange member * TranDate E Transaction date * Act E Account * Curr E Currency * Clearing Filter Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the specified filter criteria to the calling window and closes the window Submits the specified filter criteria to the calling window and leaves this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Clearing Filter Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Clearing Filter - Message Log window

135 Window Layouts and s Page Position Transfer Bulk Load The Position Transfer Bulk Load window is accessed via the Upload Pos. Transf. button on the Position Overview window and is used to bulk upload position transfers. Position Transfer Bulk Load window Overview When the Upload Pos. Transf. button on the Position Overview window is clicked, the Position Transfer Bulk Load Import window is displayed, enabling the user to select the.csv file required to be imported. The member selects the appropriate file and clicks Import, whereupon the system imports the data while processing syntax and functional validations. The imported data can then be reviewed in the table to determine whether the imported data is correct, and to see which records might need manual maintenance in the import file. If changes are needed in the imported file, members should adjust the source file and import it again. Alternatively, the members can export the imported file, correct it and upload it again. The format of the exported file will differ from the.csv format of the import file due to extra columns, LineNo, Status etc. However, the import of an exported file is supported by the GUI, and the layout of the exported file does not need to be modified to suit the import layout. The functional validations processed once during the import, verify, row by row: That at least either Long or Short position has a value. Cash only transfers are not supported for the bulk load of position transfers, regardless of the transfer mode. If the Original Trade Price is specified for a row, either the Long or the Short value must be available, but not both.

136 Window Layouts and s Page 136 If a validation fails for a row, further validations are not triggered for that row. In the event of a validation problem, the erroneous row can be selected to display the detailed error message in the status bar. Erroneous rows are indicated by the status code Error and a red background. Alternatively the radio button Errors can be selected to display only those records. Position transfers that passed the validations are displayed using the status code Passed. If the Process button is pressed, all rows of status Passed are submitted one by one. Should the records have been successfully submitted, they are marked by the status code Submitted (and remain on the window). If they are rejected, they display the status code Error with a red background. The Total Cash Amount column available in the table does not originate from the import file this column is calculated by the GUI (if the OrigTradePrice or CashAmount are available). Also note that the LineNo and Status columns do not originate from.csv file. The position transfers are available for approval for all involved parties once they are submitted. The further process flow depends on whether the position transfer is real-time or classic. The Position Transfer Bulk Load window uses the same VALUES requests as the Position Transfer Entry window. Click Cancel to close the Position Transfer Bulk Load window with no further action. The user is asked for confirmation if there are unapplied changes in the window. If the appropriate corrective action is not taken, all unapplied changes, not processed and not corrected records are lost. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Import Opens the Import Table window Ctrl+I Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl+F5 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

137 Window Layouts and s Page 137 Position Transfer Bulk Load Table Column Imported LineNo Status Line number of the exported file Passed, Error or Submitted. If the status of this row displays Error, the detailed error message is displayed by selecting this row Contract Contract * FromExchMbr From Exchange Member * FromClgMbr From Clearing Member * ToExchMbr To Exchange Member * ToClgMbr To Clearing Member * FromAct From Account * ToAct To Account * Long Long quantity to transfer * Short Short quantity to transfer * OrigTradePrice Original Trade Price * CashAmount Cash Amount * TotalCashAmount Total Cash Amount TransferMode Position Transfer Mode * Cust Customer * MIOrdNo Member Internal Order Number * Text Text *

138 Window Layouts and s Page 138 Position Transfer Bulk Load Field Group Identifier Type CT Bulk Load Icon Opens the Position Transfer Bulk Load window to allow the member to select a file for import. Note: This action is triggered automatically when the window is opened. All R If selected, all import rows are displayed Errors R If selected, only rows with status code Error are displayed Position Transfer Bulk Load Buttons Identifier Process Cancel Submits the records with status Passed to the back-end. The window remains open. Note: The process button is only enabled if the table contains at least one row with status code 'Passed'. Closes the window with no further action. Position Transfer Bulk Load Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Transfer Bulk Load - Message Log window

139 Window Layouts and s Page Position Close Out Bulk Load The Position Close Out Bulk Load window is accessed via the Upload Close Out... button on the Position Overview window and is used to bulk upload position close outs. Position Close Out Bulk Load window Overview When the Upload Close Out... button on the Position Overview window is clicked, the Position Close Out Bulk Load Import window is displayed, enabling the user to select the.csv file required to be imported. The member selects the appropriate file and clicks Import, whereupon the system imports the data while processing syntax and functional validations. The imported data can then be reviewed in the table to determine whether the imported data is correct, and to see which records might need manual maintenance in the import file. If changes are needed in the imported file, members should adjust the source file and import it again. Alternatively, the members can export the imported file, correct it and upload it again. The format of the exported file will differ from the.csv format of the import file due to extra columns, LineNo, Status etc. However, the import of an exported file is supported by the GUI, and the layout of the exported file does not need to be modified to suit the import layout.

140 Window Layouts and s Page 140 The functional validations processed once during the import, verify, row by row: That the Long and Short quantities are equal. That enough long and short positions are available for close out. If the validation fails, the row is marked red and the error message Insufficient Position assigned to it. That the quantity to be closed is less than or equal to the corresponding ZeroCostQuantity. If this validation fails, the row is highlighted in yellow, the message ZERO COST QUAN- TITY EXCEEDED assigned to it and the status code set to Confirm. The Position Close Out Bulk Load window displays both the Previous ZCQ and Current ZCQ columns. A Refresh ZCQ button recalculates the ZCQs and Passed/Confirm states of all Passed and Confirm rows. As soon as a validation fails for a row, further validations are not triggered for that row. In the event of a validation problem, the erroneous row can be selected to display the detailed error message in the status bar. Erroneous rows are indicated by the status code Error and a red background. Alternatively the radio button Errors can be selected to display only those records. Position close outs that passed the validations are displayed using the status code Passed. If the Process All Passed button is pressed, the GUI only considers the rows with status Passed one by one. The GUI processes the zero cost quantity validation first. If the quantity is exceeding, then the status of the row is changed to Confirm and the close out is not triggered. Otherwise, the record is submitted for further processing. All successfully submitted close outs are marked by the status code Submitted. Rejected records are set to status code Error. Position Close Outs exceeding the zero cost quantity (status Confirm) can be processed by pressing the Confirm Single Row button. Note that no further zero cost quantity validation are processed in this case, and the close out is performed with no further warning that late closing fees might occur. Click Cancel to close the Position Close Out Bulk Load window with no further action. The user is asked for confirmation if there are unapplied changes in the window. If the appropriate corrective action is not taken, all unapplied changes, not processed and not corrected records are lost.

141 Window Layouts and s Page 141 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Import Opens the Import Table window Ctrl+I Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl+F5 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Position Close Out Bulk Load Table Column Imported LineNo Status Line number of the exported file Passed, Error or Submitted. If the status of this row displays Error, the detailed error message is displayed by selecting this row Contract Contract * ExchMbr To Exchange Member * ClgMbr To Clearing Member * Act To Account * Long Long quantity to close * Short Short quantity to close *

142 Window Layouts and s Page 142 Position Close Out Bulk Load Table Column Imported Cust Customer * MIOrdNo Member Internal Order Number * Text Text * CurrZCQ PrevZCQ Current Zero Cost Quantity Previous Zero Cost Quantity Position Close Out Bulk Load Field Group Identifier Type CT Bulk Load Icon Opens the Position Close Out Bulk Load window to allow the member to select a file for import. Note: This action is triggered automatically when the window is opened. All R If selected, all import rows are displayed Errors R If selected, only rows with status code Error are displayed Position Close Out Bulk Load Buttons Identifier Refresh ZCQ Process All Passed Confirm Single Row Cancel Refreshes the Zero Cost Quantities and Passed / Confirmed states of all Passed and Confirmed rows. Recalculates the Zero Cost Quantities for all rows that don't have an error. Note: If a row displayed as Passed turns into Confirm (or vice versa), the process for that row is cancelled and an error message displayed. Confirms the selected row (status Confirm). Closes the window with no further action.

143 Window Layouts and s Page 143 Position Close Out Bulk Load Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Close Out Bulk Load - Message Log window Position Adjustment - Close Out and Position Adjustment - Account Transfer The Position Adjustment window is accessed via the Position Overview window and allows Exchange Members to enter position closing adjustments or position account transfers. Position Adjustment - Close Out window

144 Window Layouts and s Page 144 Position Adjustment - Account Transfer window Overview The Position Adjustment window allows the Exchange Member to enter position closing adjustments or position account transfers. Position closing adjustments as well as account transfers can be entered if the respective product is in product state Pre-Trading, Trading, Post- Trading Full, Post-Trading Late1 or Post-Trading Late2. Designated long and short positions cannot be adjusted. The window can be used within one member account in two different modes, account transfer and close out adjustment. Depending on the type of adjustment, the window title displays Position Adjustment - Close Out for the closing out adjustment or Position Adjustment - Account Transfer for the account transfer. Long: The Long field is mandatory and must be filled with the long quantity for the adjustment. The value must be negative and equal to a Short value for the position close out adjustment. Short: The Short field is mandatory and must be filled with the short quantity for the adjustment. The value must be negative and equal to a Long value for the position close out adjustment. Act: This field indicates the account into which the member wants to transfer the trade, and is only available in combination with an account transfer. The account type must be different from the original position account. Customer: This field is optional and additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text field's context menu, the Customer field is automatically filled in.

145 Window Layouts and s Page 145 MIOrdNo: The MIOrdNo field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text field's context menu, the MIOrdNo field is automatically filled in. Text: The Text field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the context menu of the Text field, the Customer and MIOrdNo fields are automatically filled in. The Submit and Apply buttons remain disabled until all mandatory fields are filled. Position adjustments are not possible for products on holiday. Close outs which would result in a late closing are signaled by a confirmation window. Thus the user needs to confirm the late closing and acknowledge awareness of the corresponding late closing fees. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Position Adjustment Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract D Contract ID: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Futures: Underlying Expiration month and year Act D Account type Curr D Currency Long D Long quantity Short D Short quantity

146 Window Layouts and s Page 146 Position Adjustment Field Group Identifier Type CT DsgnLong D Designated long positions DsgnShort D Designated short positions PrevZCQ D Previous zero cost quantity CurrZCQ D Current zero cost quantity Long E Long quantity for adjustment * Short E Short quantity for adjustment * Act E Account type (only enabled for account transfer) * Customer E Customer (corresponds to Reference-1/Reference-2, for close out adjustment only Reference-1 is enabled) MIOrdNO E Member internal order number (corresponds to Reference-1/ Reference-2, for close out adjustment only Reference-1 is enabled) Text E Text (corresponds to Reference-1/Reference-2, for close out adjustment only Reference-1 is enabled) * * * Position Adjustment Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits adjustment and closes the window Applies adjustment and leaves this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modifications Position Adjustment Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Adjustment - Close Out and Position Adjustment - Account Transfer - Message Log window

147 Window Layouts and s Page Position Transfer Entry The Position Transfer Entry window allows Exchange Members to enter position transfer requests to other members. Position Transfer Entry window Overview The Position Transfer Entry window is accessed via the Position Overview window, with prepopulated information for exchange, contract, currency and source account. It contains the following furniture: Transfer Mode: Two radio buttons - Realtime and Classic - enable the user to select the position transfer mode. Members can transfer positions via the real-time position transfer facility, which enables positions to be transferred real-time, or classic position transfer, where positions are transferred during the state change to post-restricted. By default, Realtime is selected. After entering a real-time position transfer, the number of contracts designated for the transfer is blocked for any other clearing activity until all involved parties have confirmed. These blocked positions are visible in the DsgnOpnLongPosTsf and DsgnOpnShortPosTsf columns of the Position Overview window. The designated give-up positions are also visible in another two columns on the same window: DsgnOpnLongGiveUp and DsgnOpnShortGiveUp. When the real-time position transfer is confirmed by all involved parties: The position change is effected real-time. The position transfer is visible in the Position Detail Overview window. Trade Confirmation Back Office (BOF) messages are written. The position transfer can no longer be deleted. To reverse the transaction, a transfer in the opposite direction must be arranged.

148 Window Layouts and s Page 148 No change is applied to cash amounts attached to the real-time position transfer, which, in common with classic position transfers, moves the cash on the following business day. If insufficient positions are available for a trade reversal because some positions are transferred real-time or positions are blocked (designated) for real-time position transfer, then a Trade With Closing error may occur. ToAct: This field is mandatory and should be filled with the account type of the receiving Exchange Member. ToClgMbr: This field is mandatory and should be filled with the receiving Exchange Member's Clearing Member. ToExchMbr: This field is mandatory and should be filled with the receiving Exchange Member. Long: This field should be filled with the positive long quantity for transfer. Short: The field should be filled with the positive short quantity for transfer. Cash Amount: This editable field allows partial position transfers and associated cash transfers between different members. Details on partial position transfer with cash amount are described in the Clearing User Guide. Orig Trade Price: This field allows the user to specify a price for the position transfer to calculate a cash adjustment based on the difference between the entered price and the position transfer price. Total Cash Amount: This field displays the sum of the Cash Amount and the calculated cash amount from Orig Trade Price. A positive amount indicates a debit transfer source; a negative amount indicates a credit transfer source. This means that if the initiating member enters a positive amount, a debit is associated on the initiating member s side and the destination member receives this amount. Note: The sum is displayed if either one or both of the Orig Trade Price or Cash Amount is filled, where an entry in the Original Trade Price field triggers the automatic calculation of the cash adjustment amount according to the following logic: Total Cash Amount = Value of Cash Amount field + Calculated Cash The calculated cash will only be generated if an entry in the Original Trade Price is made. In this case, the calculated cash will be computed by applying the following formula: Calculated Cash = Value per Contract (rounded with two decimal places) 1 Number of Contracts (taken from the long or short field) Value per Contract (if long positions are transferred) = Tick Value / Tick Size Trading Unit (Previous Night s Settlement Price 2 Original Trade Price) Value per Contract (if short positions are transferred) = Tick Value / Tick Size Trading Unit (Original Trade Price Previous Night s Settlement Price 2 ) Note: This feature is only supported for position transfers entered via the Eurex GUI. No automatic calculation takes place for requests coming directly via VALUES. 1. For products with currency GBX (Great Britain pence) the calculated Value per Contract must be rounded to integer (zero decimals). 2. For premium-styled products, the 'Previous Night's Settlement Price' will be zero.

149 Window Layouts and s Page 149 Text: The Text field is optional, where additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the context menu of the Text field, the Customer and MIOrdNo fields are automatically filled in. Customer: This field is optional and additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text field's context menu, the Customer field is automatically filled in. MIOrdNo: The MIOrdNo field is optional, where the additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text field's context menu, the MIOrdNo field is automatically filled in. The Submit button remains disabled until all mandatory fields are filled. Click the Submit button to execute the position transfer request. For classic position transfers, the Long or Short quantity entered is not validated against the positions available for transfer, as shown in the Position Overview window. For real-time position transfers, a validation does take place. For a newly created contract, a partial position transfer is not allowed because no previous settlement price is available. For position transfers with cash, members can, depending on their RAL settings, select whether to process the transfer using the four-eye principle. That is, when an initiator chooses to enter/ approve the transfer of their positions, depending on their RAL settings, an Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the transfer. Position transfers are not possible for products on holiday. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print Window Prints the content of the window Ctrl+P Export Exports the content of the window Ctrl+E Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

150 Window Layouts and s Page 150 Position Transfer Entry Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract D Contract ID: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Futures: Underlying Expiration month and year Curr D Currency Transfer Mode - Realtime Transfer Mode - Classic R R Enables positions to be transferred real-time Enables positions to be transferred during the state change to post-restricted FromAct D Account from which the position is to be transferred ToAct E Account to which the position is to be transferred * ToClgMbr E Clearing member to receive the position transfer * ToExchMbr E Exchange member to receive the position transfer * Long E Long quantity Short E Short quantity Pos Trans Price D The previous night s settlement price for future-style products, and zero for premium-style product Cash Amount E Cash amount to be transferred with the position * Orig Trade Price E Enter a price for the position transfer to calculate a cash adjustment based on the difference between the entered price and the position transfer price * Total Cash Amount D The sum of the Cash Amount field and the calculated cash amount

151 Window Layouts and s Page 151 Position Transfer Entry Field Group Identifier Type CT Text E Free-form text * Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Position Transfer Entry Buttons Identifier Submit Cancel Submits the transfer request and closes the window Cancels all changes and closes the window with no modification Position Transfer Entry Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Transfer Entry - Message Log window

152 Window Layouts and s Page Position Detail Overview The Position Detail Overview window displays detailed information about position movements for a specific contract. Trade adjustments, except for give-ups and take-ups, can be initiated. Position Detail Overview window Overview The Position Detail Overview window is accessed via the Trade Management menu with no information in the table if window settings have not been saved before, and if the window is not opened from the Position Overview window. To select a contract, the user must use the Position Detail Filter window. To specify other filtering criteria, the user fills the data into the corresponding entry fields. Mandatory fields are: contract, Clearing Member, Exchange Member and transaction date. A specific contract can also be selected using the contract entry line at the top of the window. In this case, the current filter settings of the other filter criteria are used. The user can not access contract data while no criteria are specified. When selecting a transaction in the table, different buttons are enabled, depending on the date of the transactions. If a historical trade is selected, the HiTT button is enabled. For a trade from the current business day, the Act. Transfer..., the O/C Adjust... and the Separation... buttons may be enabled, depending on the selected transaction. All buttons are disabled if any selected trade is adjusted the maximum number of times, as defined by Eurex. For a trade separation adjustment, the user clicks the Separation... button and the Trade Separation window opens pre-populated with the selected transaction.

153 Window Layouts and s Page 153 The user can perform historical trade transfer adjustments by selecting one or more trades and clicking the HiTT button. This submits the request to the back-end for processing. A successful HiTT trade remains in the table and a confirmation message is displayed in the message bar. Click the Act. Transfer... or O/C Adjust... buttons to access the Position Detail Maintenance window. The selected trades from the Position Detail Overview window are pre-populated in the Position Detail Maintenance window. If more than one trade is selected for account transfer or O/C-adjustment the optional fields Customer, MiOrdNo and Text in the corresponding child windows are empty. Changes in the optional fields Customer, MiOrdNo and Text can be made in the Position Detail Maintenance - Text window, which is accessed by clicking the Text button. The StartOfDayLong/Short fields display the starting position on the selected contract at the date specified in the filter. The CurrLong/Short fields display the current position for the selected contract or the end of day position if the date specified in the filter is a historical date. A change in this field is highlighted. The table is dynamically updated with new positions and position adjustments. Changes are highlighted. Original trade information for imported trades is displayed in the table. OTC trades are shown without order number. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Position Detail Filter... Opens the Position Detail Filter window Position Separation... Opens the Trade Separation window HiTT Submits selected historical trades for adjustment

154 Window Layouts and s Page 154 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Act. Transfer... Opens the Position Detail Maintenance Account Transfer window O/C Adjust... Text... Opens the Position Detail Maintenance O/C Adjustment window Opens the Position Detail Maintenance - Text window Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreezes all the columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Position Detail Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Curr Contract OrdNo TranId SuffixId ParnSuffixID Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member Account type Currency of the product Contract ID Order number (In case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Transaction ID Suffix ID The suffix ID of the parent trade or trade adjustment

155 Window Layouts and s Page 155 Position Detail Overview Table Column HIT A/R TranTyp Descr TranDate TranTime TraderId B/S O/C TrdTyp a Status Long Short Historical trade adjustment indicator Adjustment/reverse indication Transaction type for transaction type Transaction date Transaction time User ID Buy/sell indicator Open/close indicator Type of trade : On-exchange Trades A: Block Auction Trades B: OTC Basis Trades E: OTC EFP Trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures Trades O: OTC Block Trades P: OTC EFP-Fin Trades V: OTC Vola Trades W: OTC EFS Trades Give-up status of transactions : Normal P: Pre-designated G: Designated for give-up R: Rejected U: Undesignated M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member Long quantity Short quantity

156 Window Layouts and s Page 156 Position Detail Overview Table Column Prc Premium TotFees Customer MIOrdNo Text OrigExch OrigContrID OrigTranId OrigOrdNo OrigTranDate OrigTranTime Trade price Premium Total fees Customer Member Internal Order Number Free-form text Original Exchange ID Original Contract Symbol used at ISE/OCC Original Transaction Identification Original Order Number Original Transaction Date Original Transaction Time OrigTranDateCET Original Transaction Date in Central European Time OrigTranTime CET Original Transaction Time in Central European Time a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex.

157 Window Layouts and s Page 157 Position Detail Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Futures: Underlying Expiration month and year * TrdUnit D Trade unit of the contract StartOfDay Long StartOfDay Short Current Long Current Short D D D D Starting long positions of the date and account selected in the filter Starting short positions of the date and account selected in the filter Accumulated long positions, current value, end of day positions for the specified date and account Accumulated short positions, current value, end of day positions for the specified date and account Position Detail Overview Radio Buttons Identifier Full Active Shows all trades, including reversals Displays only trades available for modification

158 Window Layouts and s Page 158 Position Detail Overview Buttons Identifier Separation... HiTT Act. Transfer... O/C Adjust... Text... Opens the Trade Separation window Submits selected historical trades for historical trade transfer adjustment Opens the Position Detail Maintenance - Act. Transfer window Opens the Position Detail Maintenance - O/C Adjustment window Opens the Position Detail Maintenance - Text window Position Detail Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Detail Overview - Message Log window

159 Window Layouts and s Page Position Detail Filter The Position Detail Filter window allows the user to specify filtering criteria used to format inquiry requests in the Position Detail Overview window. Position Detail Filter window

160 Window Layouts and s Page 160 Overview The Position Detail Filter window can be opened from the Position Detail Overview window via the Select menu and the Position Detail Filter menu item. Optional filter criteria are trade type, transaction IDs from and to (without suffix), order number and trader ID. To select trades with all trade types, the TrdTyp field is pre-populated with *. To select onexchange trades with the trade type blank can be entered. The other trade types supported are: A: Block Auction trade B: OTC Basis trade E: OTC EFP trade E: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFPI trade O: OTC Block trade P: OTC EFP-Fin trade V: OTC Vola trade W: OTC EFS trade. The radio button group Full/Active changes the display mode of the Position Detail Overview window to show either all trades, including reversals and original transactions, or trades that are available for modification. The Position Detail Filter window has a PriceFrom - PriceTo range criterion which allows the user to filter for positions within a desired price range. Additionally it is possible to filter for imported trades by their original data, i.e. OrigExch, OrigOrdNo and for a set of OrigTranIds. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Contract... Opens the Contract Selection window Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

161 Window Layouts and s Page 161 Position Detail Filter Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID * ClgMbr E Clearing member * ExchMbr E Exchange member * TranDate E Transaction date * Act E Account * TrdTyp a E Trade type, valid values are: * : Trades of all trade types, default A: Block Auction trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades * OrdNo E Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) TranTyp E Transaction type * TraderId E Trader ID TranIdFrom E Transaction ID from number TranIdTo E Transaction ID to number PriceFrom E Price from number * PriceTo E Price to number * OrigExch E Original Exchange ID : Trades of all exchanges, default XEUR: Eurex OrigOrdNo E Original Order Number

162 Window Layouts and s Page 162 Position Detail Filter Field Group Identifier Type CT OrigTranIdFrom E Start from this Original Transaction Identification OrigTranIdTo E End with this Original Transaction Identification Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Free-form text * a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex. Position Detail Filter Radio Buttons Identifier Full Active Shows all trades, including reversals Shows only trades that are available for modification Position Detail Filter Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the specified criteria to the Position Detail Overview and closes the window Submits the specified criteria to the Position Detail Overview and leaves the window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Position Detail Filter Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Detail Filter - Message Log window

163 Window Layouts and s Page Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation The Trade Separation window allows the Exchange Member to separate one trade into several (maximum twenty) smaller trades, or to copy the original trade into one new trade to add any additional information (text, etc.). Trade Separation window Overview The Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation window is accessed via the Position Detail Overview window and contains the following table fields: Long: In the Long fields, the quantities for long positions to be separated can be entered. Short: In the Short fields, the quantities for short positions to be separated can be entered. Customer: The field is optional and additional customer details can be entered. If a value which is defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected by the Text field's context menu, the entry for the Customer field is filled in. MIOrdNo: The field is optional and additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text field's context menu, the entry for the MIOrdNo field is filled in. Text: The field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. If a value, defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text field's context menu, the entries for the Customer and MIOrdNo fields are filled in. The Submit button is enabled when one of the Long or Short quantity entry fields is entered and the sum of the quantities is equal to the original quantity. Clicking this button executes the trade separation adjustment.

164 Window Layouts and s Page 164 The display-only fields in the window are pre-populated by the values of the Position Detail Overview window, from which the Trade Separation window can be accessed. The net total of the Long and Short quantity entry fields needs to be the same as the long or short quantity of the original trade. Only positive quantities can be entered in these fields. Trade separations are not feasible for products on holiday. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctl+P Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract D Contract ID: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Futures: Underlying Expiration month and year B/S D Buy/sell Indicator O/C D Open/close Indicator Act D Account type TranId D Transaction ID SuffixId D Suffix ID

165 Window Layouts and s Page 165 Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation Field Group Identifier Type CT HIT D Historical trade adjustment indicator Curr D Currency of the product Long D Long position of trade Short D Short position of trade Customer D Customer MIOrdNo D Member internal order number Text D Free-form text Long E Long position amount for adjustment * Short E Short position amount for adjustment * Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Text * Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation Buttons Identifier Submit Cancel Submits trade separation and closes the window Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Detail Maintenance - Trade Separation - Message Log window

166 Window Layouts and s Page Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer and O/C Adjustment The two Position Detail Maintenance windows allow the Exchange Member to perform O/C trade adjustments and account transfers. Position Detail Maintenance window for account transfer Position Detail Maintenance window for O/C adjustment

167 Window Layouts and s Page 167 Overview The two Position Detail Maintenance windows O/C Adjustment and Account Transfer are accessed from the Position Detail Overview window. Act: This field is mandatory for trade account transfer adjustments and is only visible when an account transfer adjustment is selected from the Position Detail Overview window. The target account must be either an agent or principal account (A1-A9, P1-P2). The source account must be an agent, principal or market maker account (A1-A9, P1-P2, M1-M2). For OCC products, the target account must be either A1 or P1-P2. O/C: This field is mandatory for open or close adjustments and is only visible when an O/C adjustment is selected from the Position Detail Overview window. If one or more lines with the same values in the O/C column are selected, the O/C field is pre-populated with the corresponding value from the selected line. If a line with O is selected, the field is pre-populated with a C, and vice versa. Customer: The Customer field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. MIOrdNo: The MIOrderNo field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. Text: The Text field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. In the Position Detail Maintenance - O/C Adjustment window, the corresponding O/C flag and text data are filled after a transaction is selected. The user can then make the necessary changes, which are updated to the table by clicking the Update button. To clear the entry fields, the user must click the Clear button. To remove transactions from the table, the user selects the transactions and clicks the Remove button. Once the entries are made, the Submit All button allows the user to submit all the transactions in the table. Alternatively, the user can choose to submit only the selected transactions by clicking the Submit Selected button. Trades that are successfully adjusted are removed from the table. The window closes automatically when the table is empty. Information shown in the window is pre-selected if there is only one item in the table. Updates of successfully adjusted transactions are sent via broadcast to the Position Detail Overview. This update also includes the reversal of the original transactions. For trade account transfers, the Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer window shows the Act entry field. The O/C entry field is not visible. The changes, which the user are able to perform, are similar to the Position Detail Maintenance - O/C Adjustment. In general, two steps are involved to change or update customer specific information. First, the transactions that need to be modified are selected. If there is only one transaction selected, the entry fields are filled with the original customer fields. If more than one transaction is selected, the entry fields are left blank. Clicking the Update button updates the corresponding rows in the table. Updates on the customer specific text fields can only be done in combination with a change of the O/C or Act field. The changes are visible in the table and remain there until the user submits the requests. O/C trade adjustments and account transfers are not possible for products on holiday.

168 Window Layouts and s Page 168 Original trade information for imported trades is also displayed in the table. OTC trades are shown without order number. Each unsuccessful trade adjustment returns an error and the corresponding trade is highlighted in the table. A successful trade adjustment removes the corresponding trade from the table. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreezes all of the columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Position Detail Maintenance Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member Account type

169 Window Layouts and s Page 169 Position Detail Maintenance Table Column Curr Contract OrdNo TranId SuffixId ParnSuffixId HIT A/R TranTyp Descr TranDate TranTime TraderId B/S O/C TrdTyp a Currency of the product Contract ID Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Transaction ID Suffix ID Parent suffix ID Historical trade adjustment indicator Adjustment reversal indicator Transaction type Transaction date Transaction time User ID Buy/sell indicator Open/close indicator Trade type : On-Exchange trades A: Block Auction trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades

170 Window Layouts and s Page 170 Position Detail Maintenance Table Column Status Long Short Prc Premium TotFees Customer MIOrdNo Text OrigExch OrigTranId OrigOrdNo OrigTranDate OrigTranTime Give-up status of transactions : Normal P: Pre-designated G: Designated for give-up R: Rejected U: Undesignated M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member Long quantity Short quantity Trade price Premium Total fees Customer Member internal order number Free-form text Original Exchange ID Original Transaction Identification Original Order Number Original Transaction Date Original Transaction Time OrigTranDateCET Original Transaction Date in Central European Time OrigTranTimeCET Original Transaction Time in Central European Time a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex.

171 Window Layouts and s Page 171 Position Detail Maintenance Field Group Identifier Type CT Act E Account type (for trade account transfer only) * O/C E Open/close flag (for O/C adjustment only) * Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Text * Position Detail Maintenance Buttons Identifier Remove Update Clear Submit All Removes selected transactions from the table Updates customer specific information to selected rows Clears the data in the entry fields Submits modified transactions in the table to the back-end Submit Selected Submits only selected transactions in the table to the back-end Cancel Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Position Detail Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Detail Maintenance - Account Transfer and O/C Adjustment - Message Log window

172 Window Layouts and s Page Position Detail Maintenance - Text The Position Detail Maintenance - Text window allows the Exchange Member to update the content of the Customer, MIOrdNo and Text fields of individual trades. Position Detail Maintenance Text window Overview The Position Detail Maintenance - Text window is accessed via the Position Detail Overview window, and contains the following fields. Customer: The Customer field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. MIOrdNo: The MIOrdNo field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. Text: The Text field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. The Position Detail Maintenance - Text window enables the user to make the desired changes in the three fields, which are updated in the table by clicking Update. Click Clear to clear the entry fields. To remove transactions from the table, the user selects the transactions and clicks the Remove button. Once the entries are made, the Submit All button allows the user to submit all the transactions in the table. Alternatively, the user can choose to submit only the selected transactions by clicking the Submit Selected button. Trades that are successfully adjusted are removed from the table. The window closes automatically when the table is empty. Information shown in the window is pre-selected if there is only one item in the table. Updates of successfully adjusted transactions are sent via broadcast to the Position Detail Overview window. In general, two steps are involved to change or update customer specific information. First, the transactions that need to be modified are selected. If there is only one transaction selected, the entry fields are filled with the original customer fields. If more than one transaction is selected, the entry fields are left blank. Click the Update button to update the corresponding rows in the table.

173 Window Layouts and s Page 173 Updates on the customer specific text fields can only be done in combination with a change of the O/C or Act field. The changes are visible in the table and remain there until the user submits the requests. A text adjustment is not possible for products on holiday. Original trade information for imported trades is also displayed in the table. OTC trades are shown without order number. Each unsuccessful trade adjustment returns an error and the corresponding trade is highlighted in the table. A successful trade adjustment removes the corresponding trade from the table. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides selected column from the table Show All Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Shows all columns in the table Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

174 Window Layouts and s Page 174 Position Detail Maintenance - Text Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Curr Contract OrdNo TranId SuffixId ParnSuffixId HIT A/R TranTyp Descr TranDate TranTime TraderId B/S O/C Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member Account type Currency of the product Contract ID Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Transaction ID Suffix ID Parent suffix ID Historical trade adjustment indicator Adjustment reversal indicator Transaction type Transaction date Transaction time User ID Buy/sell indicator Open/close indicator

175 Window Layouts and s Page 175 Position Detail Maintenance - Text Table Column TrdTyp a Status Long Short Prc Premium TotFees Customer MIOrdNo Text OrigExch OrigTranId OrigOrdNo Trade type : On-Exchange trades A: Block Auction trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades Give-up status of transactions : Normal P: Pre-designated G: Designated for give-up R: Rejected U: Undesignated M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member Long quantity Short quantity Trade price Premium Total fees Customer Member internal order number Free-form text Original Exchange ID Original Transaction Identification Original Order Number

176 Window Layouts and s Page 176 Position Detail Maintenance - Text Table Column OrigTranDate OrigTranTime Original Transaction Date Original Transaction Time OrigTranDateCET Original Transaction Date in the Central European Time Zone OrigTranTimeCET Original Transaction Time in the Central European Time Zone a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex. Position Detail Maintenance - Text Field Group Identifier Type CT Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Free-form text * Position Detail Maintenance - Text Buttons Identifier Remove Update Clear Submit All Submit Selected Cancel Removes selected transactions from the table Updates customer specific information to selected rows Clears the data in the entry fields Submits modified transactions in the table to the back-end Submits only selected transactions in the table to the back-end Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Position Detail Maintenance - Text Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Detail Maintenance - Text - Message Log window

177 Window Layouts and s Page Position Transfer Overview The Position Transfer Overview window displays position transfer requests. Confirmation and cancellation of the position transfer requests are possible in this window. Position Transfer Overview window Overview For each position transfer request, the confirmation from all parties involved (i.e. sending and receiving clearing and receiving Exchange Member) is required, and the confirmation status for each party is displayed in this window. The Position Transfer Overview window is accessed via the Trade Mgmt menu and opens with no information in the table if no window settings are saved. In order to specify the clearing and Exchange Members, select the Position Transfer Filter... item on the Select menu. This opens the Position Transfer Filter window (mandatory: Clearing Member; optional: Exchange Member, however, for Non Clearing Members the Exchange Member field is mandatory). When the user specifies both Clearing Member and Exchange Member in the filter, only position transfers that completely match the specified member relationship on the from (source) or to (destination) sides are displayed. If a Clearing Member only states his own Clearing Member ID in the Clearing Member field, the table shows all his position transfers and all the position transfers of his own Non Clearing Members, valid for the current day. The Realtime and Classic radio buttons enable the user to display positions that have been transferred real-time or classic (where positions are transferred during the state change to postrestricted). By default, All is selected. Users can confirm a partial position transfer by clicking the Confirm button. After selecting one or more position transfers, the Confirm button is enabled. In the table, the column for the confirmation status is updated accordingly, after the confirmation request is successfully processed. Pending confirmations or confirmed transfers can be deleted by using the Delete button. After selecting one or more transfers, the Delete button is enabled. Deletions need to be confirmed in a confirmation window. Successful processing of the deletion request removes the corresponding rows from the table. Partial position transfers displayed in the Position Transfer Overview table are sorted by the transaction ID.

178 Window Layouts and s Page 178 For position transfers with cash, members can, depending on their RAL settings, select whether to process the transfer using the four-eye principle. That is, when an initiator chooses to enter/ approve the transfer of their positions, depending on their RAL settings, an Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the transfer. Click Update to refresh the data displayed in this window. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl + F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Position Transfer Filter... Opens the Position Transfer Filter window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Transfer Confirm Confirms position transfers Delete Deletes position transfers Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

179 Window Layouts and s Page 179 Position Transfer Overview Table Column Exch TranId TranTyp Descr Contract FromAct ToAct Long Short CashAmount TransferMode OrigTradePrice TotalCashAmount FromClgMbr FromExchMbr FromClgConf FromExchConf ToClgMbr ToExchMbr Exchange ID Transaction ID Transaction type of transaction type Contract ID Account from which position is to be transferred Account to which position is to be transferred Long quantity Short quantity Cash amount Real-Time or Classic position transfer Original trade price entered by the user during the entry of the position transfer. Note: This value is used to calculate the cash adjustment based on the difference between the entered price and the position transfer price. The sum of the CashAmount and the calculated cash amount, based on the difference between the OrigTradePrice and the position transfer price. Note: This is the same value as displayed on the Position Transfer Entry window. Clearing member from whom the position is to be transferred Exchange member from whom the position is to be transferred Clearing member confirmation status (from whom the position is to be transferred) Exchange member confirmation status (from whom the position is to be transferred) Clearing member to whom the position is to be transferred Exchange member to whom the position is to be transferred

180 Window Layouts and s Page 180 Position Transfer Overview Table Column ToClgConf Customer MIOrdNo Text Clearing member confirmation status (to whom the position is to be transferred) Customer Member internal order number Free-form Text Position Transfer Overview Buttons Identifier Confirm Delete Confirms position transfers Deletes position transfers Position Transfer Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Transfer Overview - Message Log window

181 Window Layouts and s Page Position Transfer Filter The Position Transfer Filter window allows the user to specify the filtering criteria the Position Transfer Overview window uses in formatting inquiry requests. Position Transfer Filter window Overview The Position Transfer Filter window is accessed via the Position Transfer Overview window via the Select menu and the Position Transfer Filter... menu item. The ClgMbr field is mandatory and the ExchMbr field is optional (only applicable to Clearing Members, but for Non Clearing Members the ExchMbr field is mandatory). If a Clearing Member filters for his own Clearing Member ID, his own position transfers and the transfers of his NCMs are shown. The ConfirmStatus radio button group governs which position transfers are displayed in the Position Transfer Overview window. Select: Complete to display only position transfers that have been approved by all involved parties. Incomplete to display position transfers that have at least one confirmation outstanding. All to display all position transfer requests related to the specified clearing and Exchange Members. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar of the Position Transfer Overview window. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

182 Window Layouts and s Page 182 Position Transfer Filter - ConfirmStatus Radio Button Group Complete Incomplete All Displays position transfers confirmed by all affected parties Displays position transfers not confirmed by at least one party Displays all position transfers, regardless of confirmation status Position Transfer Filter Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID ClgMbr E Clearing member * ExchMbr E Exchange member * Position Transfer Filter Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the specified filter criteria to the calling window and closes the window Submits the specified filter criteria to the calling window and leaves this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Position Transfer Filter - Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Position Transfer Filter - Message Log window Give-up Overview [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: Give-up is possible also for trades in the proprietary accounts P1 and P2 if the initiating member is an NCM. Give-up requests which are not completely processed are re-allocated over night.

183 Window Layouts and s Page 183 The Give-up Overview window displays all trade transactions that are valid for Give-up, and allows the Give-up member and his Clearing Member to handle trades or transactions for Giveup and Give-up acceptance. Give-up Overview window Overview The Give-up Overview window is accessed via the Trade Mgmt menu and opens with no information displayed if no window settings are saved for this window. Either: Select the Give-up Filter... from the Select menu and specify the filter criteria to use in the query and display the give-up information, or Right-click the menu bar to display a context menu with all available profiles. The Clearing Member can inquire about his own trades using the Give-up Filter [Modified] window. The ID of the trader who has initiated the trade is displayed in the Trader field, if the trader belongs to the same member as the user of the window or to a related Non Clearing Member. For on behalf trades, the trader s sub-group is displayed. Clearing member and Exchange Member are able to inquire into the same types of Give-up status.

184 Window Layouts and s Page 184 The user can either perform actions by order or by transaction. To perform actions by transaction, the user must set the Transaction/Order radio button to Transaction. To perform actions by order, the user must set the radio button to Order. Give-up and modification actions open the Give-up Maintenance window. Undesignate, accept and delete actions are performed directly without opening the Give-up Maintenance window. The: Give-up... button is used only by the give-up Exchange Member to give-up transactions or orders in the Give-up Maintenance window. Modify... button is used only by the give-up Exchange Member to modify transactions or orders in the Give-up Maintenance window. Undesignate button is used by either the give-up Exchange Member or his Clearing Member to undesignate selected transactions or all of the transactions of an order. Accept button is used by the Clearing Member to confirm acceptance of the selected transactions or all of the transactions of an order. Delete Status button is used by the Give-up Exchange Member to delete designated, pre-designated, rejected or undesignated Give-up transactions or all of the transaction of an order. After the selection of one row, the action buttons are enabled. The enabled action buttons depend on the status of the selected transactions. A Give-up is only valid for transactions with the states pre-designated, undesignated and normal. A modification is only valid for transactions with the status given-up (designated). Undesignate is only possible for transactions with the status given-up (designated) or give-up accepted. Accepting is only valid for the status given-up (designated), Delete Status is only valid for transactions with the status pre-designated, undesignated, rejected and given-up (designated). If the radio button is set to Order, only rows with the same order number can be selected. To handle orders, the user needs only to select one row with the required order number. No OTC trade can be selected if the radio button is set to order, and an error message stating that the trade type is not valid for the requested action is generated. Rule for multiple selection: In case of a validation error, the invalid transactions are rejected and an error message is displayed. The valid transactions are performed as requested and the rows are updated accordingly by a broadcast. In case an action is performed by order, and at least one transaction belonging to this order number cannot be processed, an error message is displayed stating that not all transactions have been processed. The table is updated dynamically whenever there is a change in the give-up trades of the member in the selected profile, product or contract. New trades and trade adjustments, on which Give-ups are valid, and Give-up status changes are also dynamically updated in the window. Changed transactions are dynamically updated in the window. Original trade information for imported trades is also displayed in the table. OTC trades are shown without order number. Give-up transactions are not possible for products on holiday.

185 Window Layouts and s Page 185 For pending give-up transactions, the Eurex System runs a 'clean-up' during end-of-day processing. All give-up requests which are not in state Take-Up Accepted or Rejected are reallocated the next day and the referred give-up information as well as the last status are retained. If a give-up status can not be recovered, it is set to U(ndesignated). Exceptions: The respective contract does not mature on the trade day (t=0). The respective trade was entered on t=0. No capital adjustment is taking place for the respective product. The respective position is larger than or equal to the number of designated contracts. This might not be the case if short positions have been reduced due to an assignment or if a member position transfer was processed. As a result no manual re-allocation will be necessary for not fully processed give-ups from t-1.. Members will, however, still be able to change give-up details where necessary. Note: On the next day (t+1) re-allocated give-up trades are historical trades. Thus, in the Giveup Filter [Modified] window the TranDate needs to be the same as in t=0. If any error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Give-up Filter... Opens the Give-up Filter [Modified] window Give-up Give-up... Give-up selected order or transaction, according to status of Order checkbox Modify... Undesignate Modify selected trade Undesignate selected trades

186 Window Layouts and s Page 186 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Accept Delete Status For General Clearing Member to confirm acceptance of given-up trade Delete selected trades and remove from give-up procedure Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Give-up Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Curr Contract OrdNo B/S TranDate Exchange ID Clearing member Exchange member Account type Currency of the product Contract identification Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Buy/sell indicator Transaction date

187 Window Layouts and s Page 187 Give-up Overview Table Column TrdTyp a Status TranId SuffixId HIT Qty OrdQty O/C MtchPrc Trader Customer MIOrdNo Text Trade type : On exchange trades A: Block Auction trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades Give-up Status: : Normal P: Pre-designated G: Designated for Give-up R: Rejected U: Undesignated M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member Transaction ID Suffix ID Historical trade adjustment indicator Quantity Order quantity Open/close indicator Match price Trader ID Customer Member internal order number Free-form text

188 Window Layouts and s Page 188 Give-up Overview Table Column ToMbr RefCustomer RefMIOrdNo RefText OrigExch OrigContrID OrigTranId OrigOrdNo OrigTranDate Take-up Exchange Member Reference customer Reference member internal order number Reference text Original Exchange ID Original Contract Symbol used at ISE/OCC Original Transaction Identification Original Order Number Original Trade Date OrigTranDateCET Original Trade Date in CET a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex. Give-up Overview Radio Buttons Identifier Transaction Order Any transactions can be selected Only transactions with the same order number can be selected Give-up Overview Buttons Identifier Give-up... Modify... Only for give-up Exchange Members to give-up transactions or orders. Opens the Give-up Maintenance window. Only for give-up Exchange Members to modify give-up transactions or orders. Opens the Give-up Maintenance window.

189 Window Layouts and s Page 189 Give-up Overview Buttons Identifier Undesignate Accept Delete Status For the give-up Exchange Member and its General Clearing Member to undesignate pending give-up transactions or not taken-up transactions or orders. For the General Clearing Member to confirm acceptance of given-up transactions or orders. Cancels a designated, pre-designated, rejected or undesignated give-up transaction or order. Give-up Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Give-up Overview [Modified] - Message Log window

190 Window Layouts and s Page Give-up Filter [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: An account type can be selected in the Account field by using A* or P*. The Give-up Filter window allows the user to specify filter criteria that are used to format queries in the Give-up Overview [Modified] window. Give-up Filter window

191 Window Layouts and s Page 191 Overview The Give-Up Filter window is accessed via the Give-up Overview [Modified] window. By selecting a profile, the user can specify which products are offered in the context menu of the Product field. The following fields are mandatory: Clearing Member, Exchange Member (for NCMs), transaction date, either a product, contract or profile. The following fields are optional: transaction ID (without suffix), order number, give-up status code, trade type, customer, member internal order number, customer and text. The member internal order number or text can be either the normal or the reference values.

192 Window Layouts and s Page 192 The Clearing Member can inquire about his own trades by filling both the Clearing Member and Exchange Member fields with his own ID. Leaving the Exchange Member field blank shows all the trades of the NCMs. To inquire for one specific NCM, the Clearing Member field must be filled with the CM ID and the Exchange Member field with the NCM ID. To select: Trades with all statuses, the Status field is pre-populated with *. On-exchange trades with the status, enter a blank. Trades with all trade types, the TrdTyp field is pre-populated with *. Trades with the trade type, enter a blank. Trades within a transaction range, use the optional TranIdFrom and TranIdTo fields. Trades within a price range, use the optional PriceFrom and PriceTo fields. Trades for a specific account, select a particular account from the optional Account field. Trades for a specific account type, select A* or P* from the Account field. Additionally it is possible to search for imported trades by their original data, i.e. OrigExch, OrigOrdNo and for a set of OrigTranIds. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the Message Log window of the calling overview window. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Opens the Product Selection window Contract... Opens the Contract Selection window Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Give-up Filter Fields Identifier Type CT Profile/Product/ Contract E Entry of a value with respect to the selected checkbox (display only for profile in Take-up Filter window) * ClgMbr E Clearing member * ExchMbr E Exchange member *

193 Window Layouts and s Page 193 Give-up Filter Fields Identifier Type CT TranDate E Transaction date * ToMbr E Take-up Exchange Member TranIdFrom E Transaction ID from TranIdTo E Transaction ID to OrdNo E Order number Account E Account number or account type Status E Status : Normal P: Pre-designated G: Designated for give-up R: Rejected U: Undesignated M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member TrdTyp a E Trade type : On exchange trades A: Block Auction Trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades * * PriceFrom Start of price range * PriceTo End of price range * OrigExch E Original Exchange ID XEUR - Eurex OrigOrdNo E Original Order Number OrigTranIdFrom E Start from this Original Transaction Identification

194 Window Layouts and s Page 194 Give-up Filter Fields Identifier Type CT OrigTranIdTo E End with this Original Transaction Identification Customer E Customer and reference customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number and reference member internal order number * Text E Text and reference text * a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex. Give-up Filter Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the specified filter criteria and closes the window Applies the specified filter criteria and leaves this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Give-up Filter Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Give-up Filter [Modified] - Message Log window

195 Window Layouts and s Page Give-up Maintenance The Give-up Maintenance window allows the give-up Exchange Member to give-up transactions or modify given-up transactions. Give-up Maintenance window Overview The Give-up Maintenance window is accessed via the Give-up Overview [Modified] window by the give-up Exchange Member. By setting the Transaction/Order button in the Give-up Overview [Modified] window, the member can handle the actions either by transaction (window title Giveup Maintenance - Transaction) or by order (window title Give-up Maintenance - Order). If an action is performed by transaction, every line selected in the Give-up Overview [Modified] window is displayed in the Give-up Maintenance window. If action is performed by order, all transactions with the same order number are displayed in the Give-up Maintenance window. For give-up transactions, multiple transactions can be selected in the Give-up Maintenance window. For give-up orders, transactions with the same order number are displayed in the Give-up Maintenance window. It is not necessary to select one or more rows in the Give-up Maintenance window or in the Give-up Overview [Modified] window since every action is performed on every transaction with the same order number. The Submit All button is used to give-up all transactions in the Give-up Maintenance window and to close the window. For orders, all transactions with the same order number are given up. If there is only one item in the table, the information in the window is pre-selected. If there are no items in the table, the window is closed. After selecting one or more transactions, and if mandatory fields are filled, the Remove and Submit Selected buttons are enabled. If the action is performed by order, all transactions are processed.

196 Window Layouts and s Page 196 The: Remove button is used to remove selected transactions from the Give-up Maintenance window, and is disabled when in order mode. Submit Selected button is used to give-up the selected transactions. These transactions are removed from the Take-up Maintenance window after successful processing. For orders, the Submit Selected button is always disabled. If a give-up is performed, it is automatically checked whether the confirmation flag for the giveup accept is set to Yes or No for the related clearing relationship. If the flag is: Yes: The give-up acceptance is performed automatically. No: No further action is executed until the give-up is confirmed by the Clearing Member manually. The Cancel button closes the window with no further action. It is necessary to enter the take-up member ID into the field ToMbr to perform a modification. It is also possible to change O/C, Customer, MIOrdNo and Text. If nothing is entered, the values from the transactions are unchanged. If the ToMbr entry is filled, the Update button is enabled. Click Update to modify the rows in the table. The update becomes effective when a change is done in one of the fields. If the action is performed by order, all transactions with the same order number are modified. If a give-up is in status undesignate or a modification in the status given-up, one of the entry fields must differ from the original data, otherwise an error is displayed. Click the Clear button to deselect all selected lines in the table and initialize all entry fields. ToMbr: The ToMbr field is mandatory and indicates the member who should receive the trade. O/C: The user indicates if the order or transaction to be taken-up is set to open or close the position (i.e. specifies the default value for the take-up side). Customer: Allows additional customer details to be entered. MIOrdNo: Allows additional customer details to be entered. Text: Allows additional customer details to be entered. The table of the Give-up Maintenance window is filled with all transactions selected on the Giveup Overview [Modified] window. If the action is performed by order, all transactions with the same order number are displayed in the table. Lines that are successfully processed are removed from the table. Transactions displayed in the Give-up Maintenance table are sorted by Clearing Member, Exchange Member, contract (if a profile is selected by the order of products and contracts as listed in the profile), transaction ID and order number. Only the transactions selected in the Giveup Overview [Modified] window are displayed. Original trade information for imported trades is also displayed in the table. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar and the corresponding row is highlighted.

197 Window Layouts and s Page 197 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Give-up Maintenance Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Curr Contract Exchange ID Clearing member Exchange member Account type Currency of the product Contract

198 Window Layouts and s Page 198 Give-up Maintenance Table Column OrdNo B/S TranDate TrdTyp a Status TranId SuffixId HIT Qty OrdQty O/C MtchPrc Trader Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Buy/sell indicator Transaction date Trade type : On exchange trades A: Block Auction trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades Give-up Status : Normal P: Pre-designated G: Designated for give-up R: Rejected U: Undesignated M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member Transaction ID Suffix ID Historical trade adjustment indicator Quantity Order quantity (only for G1 orders) Open/close indicator Match price Trader ID

199 Window Layouts and s Page 199 Give-up Maintenance Table Column Customer MIOrdNo Text ToMbr RefCustomer RefMIOrdNo RefText OrigExch OrigTranId OrigOrdNo OrigTranDate Customer Member internal order number Free-form text Take-up member Reference customer Reference member internal order number Reference text Original Exchange ID Original Transaction Identification Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Original Trade Date OrigTranDateCET Original Trade Date in CET a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex. Give-up Maintenance Field Group Identifier Type CT ToMbr E Destination Exchange Member * O/C E Open/close indicator * Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Text *

200 Window Layouts and s Page 200 Give-up Maintenance Buttons Identifier Submit All Give-up all transactions displayed in this window and closes the window Submit Selected Give-up selected transactions or all transactions of a selected order. Successfully processed transactions are removed from the table. Cancel Clear Update Remove Closes the window with no further action Deselects entries in the table and initializes all entry fields Updates selected transactions or all transactions of an order in the table with the values in the entry fields Removes selected transactions or all transactions of an order in the table Give-up Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Give-up Maintenance - Message Log window

201 Window Layouts and s Page Take-up Overview The Take-up Overview window displays all give-up trades designated to the Exchange Member and allows the Exchange Member and his General Clearing Member to handle trades or transactions for take-up and take-up acceptance. Take-up Overview window Overview The Take-up Overview window is accessed via the Trade Mgmnt menu and opens with no information displayed if window settings have not previously been saved. To specify the filter criteria used to inquire and to display the take-up information, either: Select Take-up Filter from the Select menu, or Right-click the menu bar to display a context menu with all available profiles. The following fields are mandatory on the Take-up Filter: Clearing Member, Exchange Member (for a Clearing Member, an empty field means all NCMs), trade type and either a product, contract or profile. The Clearing Member can inquire for all of his Exchange Members. The only profile available is the All-Products profile. The following fields are optional: transaction date, from member, from transaction ID, to transaction ID, from price, to price, order number, give-up status code, customer, member internal order number and text. Customer, member internal order number and text can be either the normal or the reference values. Additionally it is possible to

202 Window Layouts and s Page 202 search for imported trades by their original data, i.e. OrigExch, OrigContrId, OrigOrdNo and for a set of OrigTranIds. Original trade information for imported trades is displayed in the table. To specify a contract or a product as filter criteria, the entry line at the top of the window can be used. This entry line is disabled until a filter is selected. The user can either perform actions by order or by transaction. To handle transactions, the user must set the Transaction/Order radio button to Transaction. When switching between Order and Transaction, any selected rows are deselected. To handle orders, the user must set the radio button to Order. The: Take-up... button is used by the take-up Exchange Member to modify the take-up transactions or orders in the Take-up Maintenance window. If the selections contain an invalid status, the Take-up... button is disabled. Accept button is used by Clearing Members to confirm their acceptance of the take-up transactions or orders. Reject button is used by the take-up Exchange Member and its Clearing Member to reject the take-up of transactions or orders. Rule for multiple selection: In case of a validation error, the invalid transactions are rejected and an error message is displayed. The valid transactions are performed as requested and the rows are updated accordingly. After the selection of one row, the action buttons are enabled. If the radio button is set to Order, only rows with the same order number can be selected. To handle orders, the user only needs to select one row with the required order number. The table is updated whenever there is a change in the take-up transactions of the member in the selected profile, product or contract. Changed transactions are dynamically updated in the window. OTC trades are shown without order number. Therefore no take-up by order is possible for OTC trades. Take-up transactions are not possible for products on holiday. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

203 Window Layouts and s Page 203 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Take-up Filter... Opens the Take-up Filter window Take-up Take-up... Opens the Take-up Maintenance window Accept Reject Only for Clearing Member to confirm acceptance of taken-up transactions or orders Rejects selected transactions or orders Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

204 Window Layouts and s Page 204 Take-up Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Curr Contract OrdNo B/S OrdQty FromMbr TranDate Act TrdTyp a Status TranId SuffixId Exchange ID Clearing member Exchange member Currency of the product Contract ID Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Buy/sell indicator Order quantity Give-up member Transaction date Account type Trade type : On exchange Trades A: Block Auction Trades B: OTC Basis Trades E: OTC EFP Trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures Trades O: OTC Block Trades P: OTC EFP-Fin Trades V: OTC Vola Trades W: OTC EFS Trades Give-up status R: Rejected M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member Transaction ID Suffix ID

205 Window Layouts and s Page 205 Take-up Overview Table Column HIT Qty O/C Prc RefCustomer RefMIOrdNo RefText Customer MIOrdNo Text Premium Fee OrigExch OrigContrID OrigTranId OrigOrdNo OrigTranDate Historical trade adjustment indicator Trade quantity Open/close indicator Trade price for options; contract price for futures Reference customer Reference member internal order number Reference text Customer Member internal order number Free-form text Premium for transaction Transaction fees charged Original Exchange ID Original Contract Symbol used at ISE/OCC Original Transaction Identification Original Order Number Original Trade Date OrigTranDateCET Original Trade Date in CET a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex. Take-up Radio Button Identifier Transaction Order Any transactions are handled Only transactions with the same order number are handled

206 Window Layouts and s Page 206 Take-up Buttons Identifier Take-up... Accept Reject Opens the Take-up Maintenance window (only for the take-up Exchange Member to modify transactions or orders for take-up). Confirms acceptance of taken-up transactions or orders (only for Clearing Member). Rejects the take-up of selected transactions or orders (for the take-up Exchange Member and Clearing Member). Take-up Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Take-up Overview - Message Log window

207 Window Layouts and s Page Take-up Filter The Take-up Filter window allows the user to specify filter criteria used to format queries in the Take-up Overview window. Take-up Filter window Overview The Take-up Filter window is accessed via, and specifies the filter criteria for, the Take-up Overview window. The Clearing Member and Exchange Member fields are mandatory, while the All Products profile is used and cannot be modified. All other fields can be left blank or filled with the filter criteria. These filter criteria are used to display the transactions in the overview windows. In this way, the user is able to see specific order numbers or give-up states. For a Clearing Member, when filtering only for his own Clearing Member ID, only the take-ups of his NCMs are selected; the Exchange Member field is left blank. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar of the calling overview window.

208 Window Layouts and s Page 208 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Product... Opens the Product Selection window Contract... Opens the Contract Selection window Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Take-up Filter Enabled Fields Overview Calling window Take-up Overview Fields enabled ClgMbr, ExchMbr, TranIdFrom, TranIdTo, PriceFrom, PriceTo, FromMbr, TranId, OrderNo, Status, TrdTyp, Text, Customer, MIOrdNo, TranIdFrom, TranIdTo, PriceFrom, PriceTo, OrigExh, OrigOrdNo, OrigTranIdFrom, OrigTranIdTo Take-up Filter Fields Identifier Type CT Profile/Product/ Contract E Entry of a value depending on the selected checkbox (display only for profile in Take-up Filter window) * ClgMbr E Clearing member * ExchMbr E Exchange member * TranDate E Transaction date FromMbr E GIve-up Exchange Member (only visible on the Take-up Filter window) * TranIdFrom E Transaction ID from number TranIdTo E Transaction ID to number OrdrNo E Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown)

209 Window Layouts and s Page 209 Take-up Filter Fields Identifier Type CT Status E Status: *: All states M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member R: Rejected TrdTyp a E Trade type : On Exchange trades A: Block Auction trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades * * PriceFrom E Start of price range * PriceTo E End of price range * OrigExch E Original Exchange ID XEUR - Eurex OrigOrdNo E Original Order Number OrigTranIdFrom E Start from this Original Transaction Identification OrigTranIdTo E End with this Original Transaction Identification Customer E Customer and reference customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number and reference member internal order number * Text E Text and reference text * a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex.

210 Window Layouts and s Page 210 Take-up Filter Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the specified filter criteria and closes the window Applies the specified filter criteria and leaves the window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Take-up Filter Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Take-up Filter - Message Log window

211 Window Layouts and s Page Take-up Maintenance The Take-up Maintenance window allows the take-up Exchange Member to handle transactions or orders for take-up. Take-up Maintenance window Overview The Take-up Maintenance window is accessed via the Take-up Overview window. By setting the Transaction/Order button in the Take-up Overview window, the member can handle the actions either by transaction or by order. If the action is performed by transaction, every line selected in the Take-up Overview window is displayed in the Take-up Maintenance window. If the action is performed by order, all transactions with the same order number are displayed in the Take-up Maintenance window. In either case, the action type is displayed in the window title. For transactions, multiple transactions can be selected in the Take-up Maintenance window for further processing. For orders, transactions with the same order number are displayed in the Take-up Maintenance window. It is not necessary to select one or more rows in the Take-up Maintenance or in the Take-up Overview window, since every action is performed on every transaction with the same order number. The Submit All button is used to take-up all transactions in the Take-up Maintenance window and, afterwards, to close the window. The window is only closed when all transactions are successfully processed. For orders, all transactions with the same order number are taken up. After the selection of one or more transactions in the Take-up Maintenance window, the Remove and Submit Selected buttons are enabled. If one transaction is selected, the text fields are filled with the appropriate values.

212 Window Layouts and s Page 212 The: Remove button is used to remove the selected transactions from the Take-up Maintenance window. For Take-ups by order, the Remove button is disabled. Submit Selected button is used to take-up the selected transactions. These transactions are removed from the Take-up Maintenance window after successful processing. For orders, the Submit Selected button is always disabled. Cancel button closes the window with no further action. If a Take-up is performed, it is automatically checked whether the confirmation flag for the takeup accept is set to Yes or No for the related clearing relationship. If the flag is set to Yes, the take-up acceptance is performed automatically. If the flag is set to No, no further action is executed and the take-up must be confirmed by the Clearing Member manually. With the take-up, it is necessary to enter the destination account in the field Act. It is also possible to change O/C, Customer, MIOrdNo and Text. If nothing is entered, the values from the transactions are unchanged. If the Act field is filled, the Update button is enabled. It updates the rows in the table. For orders, all transactions with the same order number are modified. After the update, the selection is kept and the mandatory field is cleared. Click the Clear button to deselect all selected lines in the table and initialize all entry fields. Act: The Act field is mandatory. This field indicates the account the member wants to transfer the order/transaction to. O/C: The user indicates if the order/transaction to be taken-up is set for opening or closing. Customer: Allows additional customer details to be entered. MIOrdNo: Allows additional customer details to be entered. Text: Allows additional customer details to be entered. The table of the Take-up Maintenance window is filled with all transactions selected on the Takeup Overview window. If an action is performed by order, all transactions with the same order number are displayed in the table. Lines that are successfully processed are removed from the table. Transactions displayed in the Take-up Maintenance table are sorted by Clearing Member, Exchange Member, give-up member, contract (if a profile was selected by the order of products and contracts as listed in the profile), order number and transaction ID. Only the transactions selected in the Take-up Overview window are displayed. Original trade information for imported trades is also displayed in the table. OTC trades are shown without order number. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar and the corresponding row is highlighted.

213 Window Layouts and s Page 213 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Sort... Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select... Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Take-up Maintenance Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Curr Contract OrdNo B/S Exchange ID Clearing member Exchange member Currency of the product Contract ID Order number (in case of an OTC order, no order number is shown) Buy/sell indicator

214 Window Layouts and s Page 214 Take-up Maintenance Table Column OrdQty FromMbr TranDate Act TrdTyp a Status TranId SuffixId HIT Qty O/C Prc RefCustomer RefMIOrdNo RefText Customer Order quantity Give-up member Transaction date Account type Trade type : On exchange trades A: Block Auction trades B: OTC Basis trades E: OTC EFP trades M: Matched Transfer from OCC N: OTC EFP-Index Futures trades O: OTC Block trades P: OTC EFP-Fin trades V: OTC Vola trades W: OTC EFS trades Give-up status R: Rejected M: Give-up accepted by Clearing Member N: Take-up accepted by Exchange Member T: Take-up accepted by Clearing Member Transaction ID Suffix ID Historical trade indicator Quantity Open/close indicator Trade price for options; contract price for futures Reference customer Reference member internal order number Reference text Customer

215 Window Layouts and s Page 215 Take-up Maintenance Table Column MIOrdNo Text Premium Fee OrigExch OrigTranId OrigOrdNo OrigTranDate Member internal order number Free-form text Premium for transaction Transaction fees charged Original Exchange ID Original Transaction Identification Original Order Number Original Trade Date OrigTranDateCET Original Trade Date in CET a. OTC EFP trades apply only to EEX; OTC Basis trades, Block Auction trades, OTC Vola trades, OTC EFPI trades, OTC EFP-Fin trades, and OTC EFS trades apply only to Eurex. Take-up Maintenance Field Group Identifier Type CT Act E Account Type: A1 - A9 P1 P2 * O/C E Open/close indicator * Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Text *

216 Window Layouts and s Page 216 Take-up Maintenance Buttons Identifier Submit All Take-up all transactions or all transactions of one order and closes the window Submit Selected Take-up selected transactions or all transactions of one order and closes the window Cancel Clear Update Remove Closes the window with no further action Deactivates the selection in the table and initializes all entry fields Updates selected transactions or all transactions of one order in the table with the values of the entry fields Removes selected transactions or all transactions of an order from the table Take-up Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Take-up Maintenance - Message Log window

217 Window Layouts and s Page OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing The OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window allows members to invoke clearing functions for Give-ups, Take-ups, trade separations, close out and position transfers for OTC Flexible Contracts transactions. Members can exercise positions on Flexible Option trades. OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window Overview The OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window is accessed via the Trade Mgmnt menu and contains a table showing the ratified OTC Flexible Contracts transactions of a member matching the applied filter criteria. The radio button group Full/Active changes the display mode of the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window to show either all the trades or only the trades that are active. The following buttons to the right of the table enable the user to invoke the clearing functions supported for the currently selected OTC Flexible Contracts transaction: Modify, Delete, Give-up, Accept, Take-up/ Confirm, Pos. Transfer, Pos. Confirm, Exercise, Close out and Separate. If a function is not supported for the currently selected OTC Flexible Contracts, the respective button is disabled. Once the user has selected an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction in the table and clicked one of the buttons next to it, the details of the selected transaction are shown in the field group beneath the table. The buttons Submit, Apply and Cancel are located at the bottom of the window. For position transfers with cash, members can, depending on their RAL settings, select whether to process the transfer using the four-eye principle. That is, when an initiator chooses to enter/ approve the transfer of their positions, depending on their RAL settings, an Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the transfer.

218 Window Layouts and s Page 218 Action Clearing functions for a selected OTC Flexible Contracts transaction are invoked by clicking a button right next to the table or by the respective item of the Trade menu. After filling appropriate data into the entry fields, the request is submitted by clicking the Submit or Apply button. Clicking the Apply button leaves the window open, clicking the Submit button closes the window, clicking the Cancel button closes the window with no further action. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Modify an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction An OTC Flexible Contracts transaction may be modified by use of the Modify button. The values of the following fields may be changed: Act, Text, Customer and MIOrdNo. AbnD field can be modified only for OTC Flexible Options transactions. Delete Give-up of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction The initiator of a Give-up may delete it using the Delete button. Note: It is not possible to delete a Give-up after all involved parties have approved it. Give-up of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction An OTC Flexible Contracts transaction entered to an A1 - A9 account on the current or within the last two business day may be given-up by clicking the Give-up button. Accept Give-up/Take-up of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction The respective Clearing Members may approve a Give-up/Take-up of an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction by use of the Accept button. Take-up of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction The member intended to take-up an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction may confirm it by use of the Take-up/Confirm button. Position Transfer of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction A position transfer of an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction, with or without cash, may be invoked by use of the Pos. Transfer button. Position transfers are possible only for transactions entered before the last business day. Confirm Position Transfer of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction The intended counterparty of a position transfer of an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction may confirm it by use of the Pos. Confirm button. Exercise an OTC Flexible Options Transaction A selected OTC Flexible Options transaction may be exercised by use of the Exercise button.

219 Window Layouts and s Page 219 Close Out of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction Click the Close Out button to perform a close out of an OTC Flexible Contracts transaction. The close out triggers the creation of two new adjusted trades, one on each side, with trade status Closed and close out status Completed. The adjflag of these new trades, as well as that of their (different) parents, if applicable, is set to Adjusted. Note: A Confirmation Dialogs window is displayed when a user attempts to close out a position. It states that The close out cannot be reversed and prompts whether the user wishes to proceed (default selection: No). There is also a Don't show this message again checkbox to ensure it is not displayed when another close out is attempted. If this checkbox is selected, it cannot be reversed and the Confirmation Dialogs window is not displayed again unless the GUI is reinstalled. Separation of an OTC Flexible Contracts Transaction The selected OTC Flexible Contracts transaction can be split by using the Separate button. Clicking the button opens the Flexible Contracts Trade Separation window pre-populated with the selected transaction. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the window size and position together with the configuration of the table. Filter settings are not stored Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Filter Opens the OTC Flexible Contracts Filter window Ctrl+F

220 Window Layouts and s Page 220 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Trade Retrieve Product Retrieve TranNo Adjust Give-Up Pos. Transfer Accept Delete Take-up/ Confirm Exercise Close Out Separate... Retrieves all available transactions for the given product that have not the transaction status Unratified or Deleted. Retrieves available information for the entered transaction number and suffix number, if it does not have the transaction status Unratified or Deleted. Updates a retrieved OTC Flexible Contracts transaction. Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts Give-up on the selected transactions. Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts position transfer on the selected transactions. Performs the approval of a Give-up/Take-up for the selected Flexible Contracts transactions. Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts Give-up deletion on the selected transactions. Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts Take-up on the selected transactions. Exercises the selected OTC Flexible Options transaction. Performs a close out of the selected OTC Flexible Contracts trade. Opens the Flexible Contracts Trade Separation window to split an OTC Flexible Contracts trade.

221 Window Layouts and s Page 221 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Opens the Column Selection window Freeze Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreeze All Unfreezes all of the columns in the table Autofit All Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Open Confirmation Dialogs Preferences Opens the Preferences window showing the Reset All Optional Confirmation Dialogs checkbox. Note: This is used to toggle on/off whether a Confirmation dialog box should be displayed when a Close Out is about to be processed. OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Product Em/E Product ID, used for filtering * TranNo E/Em Transaction number, used for filtering SuffixNo E Suffix number, used for filtering TranStatus E Status, limits the displayed items according to the filter chosen. * Exch D Exchange ID, automatically assigned Contract D Contract identifier, which is a compound of contract class, product ID, expiration date, strike price, version number. * Style D Contract Style (European/American) * StlTyp D Settlement Type

222 Window Layouts and s Page 222 OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Field Group Identifier Type CT Curr D Currency TraderID Em Trader ID of the logged in user Qty Em Quantity of the transaction * Prc D Clean cash price of the cash leg basket O/C D Opening or closing of a position * Act Em Account type * AbnD Em Abandon indicator Cpty D Counterparty identifier TUMbr D Receiving member identification for Give-ups, mandatory for G2 accounts Text E Optional transaction details, keywords defined on the Text Field tab of the Preferences window trigger copying of all configured parameters. * Customer E Optional transaction details * MIOrdNo E Optional transaction details * CashAmount E A cash amount to be transferred between two different members when processing a position transfer. A: Positive Amount = Debit Transfer Source Negative Amount = Credit Transfer Source OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Table Column Exch C/P Product Expiry Strike Exchange ID Contracts Class Product name Expiration date of the OTC Flexible Contracts Strike/Exercise Price (empty for OTC Flexible Futures transaction)

223 Window Layouts and s Page 223 OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Table Column Ver Style StlTyp Curr Qty Prc B/S TranNo SuffixNo Act ClsgStatus Version Number (empty for OTC Flexible Futures transaction) Exercise Style (European/American) (empty for OTC Flexible Futures transaction) Settlement Type Currency Quantity of the transaction Price Buy/Sell state Transaction number Transaction suffix identifier Account Closing status This field can have the following values, if a close for the transaction has been entered: PENDING: The close of the transaction is pending. It has been entered but is currently not accepted by the intended counterparty. COMPLETE: The close of the transaction is completed.

224 Window Layouts and s Page 224 OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Table Column TranStatus GUStatus Transaction status This field can have the following values: RATIFIED: The transaction has been approved. CLOSED: The transaction has been closed. GIVEN-UP: This status is displayed in case of a Give-up: For the originator of the Give-up after its completion, for the intended Take-up member as long as it is not completed. EXERCISED: The transaction has been exercised. ASSIGNED: The transaction has been assigned. DELIVERED TO CCP: The exercised subtrades has been sent to CCP. EXPIRED: The transaction is expired. NOTIFIED: The transaction has been notified. ALLOCATED: The transaction has been allocated. SEPARATED: The trade has been split. PENDING DELIVERY: The exercise/assignment is completed, the delivery is currently pending. POSITION TRANSFER: This status is displayed in case of a position transfer: For the originator of the position transfer after its completion, for the member intended to accept as long as it is not completed. SETTLED: This status represents the settlement of a transaction: For share settled products, it indicates the confirmation of the CSD. For cash settled products, the status is assigned on the business day after the exercise/ assignment. Give-up status This field can have the following values, in case a Give-up or a position transfer has been entered: PREDESIGNATED: The transaction has been entered to the account G1. GIVEUP DESIGNATED: A Give-up or a position transfer has been entered, but is currently not approved. COMPLETE: The Give-up or position transfer is complete. It is accepted by the involved parties.

225 Window Layouts and s Page 225 OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Table Column GUFlags Cpty GU/TUMbr Text Customer MIOrdNo Member TraderID OnBehalf TrnTim TranDat TrdUnit SynProdID FlxCntrClsPrc ITMAmnt AbnD Mtn Cod Give-up flags This field indicates the acceptance status of a Give-up. The first character (Y/N) represents the acceptance by the Give-up members Clearing Member, the second the acceptance by the Take-up members Clearing Member and the third the Take-up. e.g. YNN: The Give-up is approved by the Give-up members Clearing Member. It is currently neither approved by the Take-up members Clearing Member nor Taken-up. The field additionally applies to position transfers. Counterparty identifier Receiving member identification for Give-ups, mandatory for G2 accounts Optional transaction details, keywords, defined on the Text Field tab of the Preferences window, trigger copying of all configured parameters Optional transaction details Optional transaction details Member Trader ID OnBehalf member Transaction time Transaction date Trading unit Synthetic product ID/OTC Flexible Contracts product ID Closing price In-the-money amount Abandon indicator Maintenance Code

226 Window Layouts and s Page 226 OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Table Column ParentSfxNo AdjFlag CashAmount Parent Suffix Adjustment Flag The cash amount to be transferred between two different members when processing a position transfer. A: Positive Amount = Debit Transfer Source Negative Amount = Credit Transfer Source OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Radio Buttons Identifier Full Active Shows all trades Shows active trades only OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Buttons Identifier Inquiry icon Adjust Give-up Pos. Transfer Accept Delete Take-up/Confirm Exercise Close Out Starts inquiry for the entered Product, TranNo and SuffixNo filter data Updates a retrieved OTC Flexible Contracts transaction Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts Give-up on the selected transactions Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts position transfer on the selected transactions Performs the approval of a Give-up/Take-up for the selected OTC Flexible Contracts transactions Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts Give-up deletion on the selected transactions Performs an OTC Flexible Contracts Take-up on the selected transactions Exercises the selected OTC Flexible Options transactions Closes the sides of the OTC Flexible Contracts trade

227 Window Layouts and s Page 227 OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Buttons Identifier Separate... Submit Apply Cancel Opens the Flexible Contracts Trade Separation window to split an OTC Flexible Contracts trade Submits the entered transaction and closes the window Applies the entered transaction and leaves the window open Closes the window with no further action OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing - Message Log window OTC Flexible Contracts Filter The OTC Flexible Contracts Filter window allows specifying filter criteria to be applied to the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window. OTC Flexible Contracts Filter window

228 Window Layouts and s Page 228 Overview The OTC Flexible Contracts Filter window is accessed via the Select menu of the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window. It offers separate entry fields to specify the transactions to be displayed in the table of the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window and supports filtering for OTC Flexible Futures. Note, however, that the InTheMny field is disabled during the inquiry of OTC Flexible Futures transactions. The user populates the entry fields with the desired filter parameters. Empty entry fields are ignored. The standard pop-up list and substitution mechanisms are available for the Text, Customer and MIOrdNo entry fields. Click: Apply to apply any changes made and leave the window open. Submit to apply any changes made and close the window. Cancel to close the window with no further action. Clear to clear all entry fields. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action. Shift+F4 Select Product Opens the Product Selection window. Help On this window... Opens the Help window. F1 OTC Flexible Contracts Filter Field Group Identifier Type CT Contract E Contract identifier, which is a compound of contract class, product ID, expiration date, strike price, version number * Exch D Exchange ID, automatically assigned TraderID E Member ID/Trader ID of the logged-in user InTheMny E Supports filtering of in-the-money OTC Flexible Options transactions. This field is disabled for OTC Flexible Futures transaction inquiry UndrPrc E Price of the underlying * Date E Transaction date *

229 Window Layouts and s Page 229 OTC Flexible Contracts Filter Field Group Identifier Type CT Whole Month E If selected, the whole month is inquired TranNo E Transaction number to identify the OTC Flexible Contracts transactions * SuffixNo B Suffix number, used for filtering * TranStatus E Transaction status code * Act E Account * Text E Optional transaction details, keywords, defined on the Text Field tab of the Preferences window, trigger copying of all configured parameters. * Customer E Optional transaction details * MIOrdNo E Optional transaction details * OTC Flexible Contracts Filter Buttons Identifier Clear Submit Apply Cancel Clears all filter fields Starts an inquiry for the entered filter data and closes the filter window Starts an inquiry for the entered filter data Closes the window with no further action OTC Flexible Contracts Filter Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the OTC Flexible Contracts Filter - Message Log window.

230 Window Layouts and s Page Flexible Contracts Trade Separation The Flexible Contracts Trade Separation window allows Exchange Members to separate an OTC Flexible Contracts subtrade into several (maximum twenty) smaller subtrades or to copy original subtrade into new subtrades or to add additional information (text, etc.). Flexible Contracts Trade Separation window Overview The Flexible Contracts Trade Separation window is accessed by selecting the subtrade to be separated in the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window and clicking the Separate button. The subtrade selected for trade separation is displayed in the upper area of the window which contains a table with the following columns: Long: Enter the quantities for long positions to be separated in the Long field. Short: Enter the quantities for short positions to be separated in the Short field. Customer: The field is optional and additional customer details can be entered. If a value which is defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text Field context menu, the entry for the Customer field is filled in. MIOrdNo: The field is optional and additional customer details can be entered. If a value defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text Field context menu, the entry for the MIOrdNo field is filled in. Text: The field is optional. Additional customer details can be entered. If a value, defined in the Text Field tab of the Preferences window is selected via the Text Field context menu, the entries for the Customer and MIOrdNo fields are filled in. Click the: Remove button to remove a line from the subtrade table. Add button to add a line in the subtrade table. The Submit button is enabled when one of the Long or Short quantity entry fields is filled and the sum of the quantities is equal to the original quantity. Click this button to execute the trade separation adjustment.

231 Window Layouts and s Page 231 The net total of the Long and Short quantity entry fields needs to be the same as the long or short quantity of the original trade. Only positive quantities can be entered in these fields. The Cancel button closes the window with no further action. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the window size and position together with the configuration of the table. Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Ctrl+R Print... Opens the Print Table window. Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window. Ctrl+E Close Closes the window with no further action. Ctrl+C Help On this window... Opens the Help window. Ctrl+O Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID * Contract D Contract ID Style D Exercise Style (European/American) StlTyp D Settlement type B/S D Buy/sell indicator * Act D Account type * TranId D Transaction ID SuffixId D Suffix ID * Curr D Currency of the product * Long D Long quantity of trade * Short D Short quantity of trade *

232 Window Layouts and s Page 232 Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Field Group Identifier Type CT Customer D Customer * MIOrdNo D Member internal order number * Text D Free-form text * Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Table Identifier Type CT Long E Long quantity of trade * Short E Short quantity of trade Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Free-form text * Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Buttons Identifier Remove Add Submit Cancel Removes a line from the subtrade table Adds a line to the subtrade table Submits the entered transaction and closes the window Closes the window with no further action Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Flexible Contracts Trade Separation - Message Log window.

233 Window Layouts and s Page Settlement Exercise Overview The Exercise Overview window is accessed via the Settlement menu and displays the Exchange Member's open long positions. The exercise and adjustment of open long positions are performed with this window. Exercise Overview window with Exercise function Exercise Overview window with Abandon function

234 Window Layouts and s Page 234 Overview Items displayed in the table can be filtered using the four radio buttons, as follows: The All radio button selects all positions. If the user selects the All button, a message box is displayed indicating that all long positions are displayed. The InTheMoney radio button selects only long positions which are in-the-money, whereby the user can also enter in the field FltU/LPrc an underlying price to be applied in the selection of the in-the-money long positions (single product or contract). The Exercised radio button selects all positions which have an exercise quantity greater than zero. The Unexercised radio button selects only in-the-money positions which are not automatically exercised. Unexercised positions in this sense are positions that meet the following conditions: Open Long Positions which are in-the-money and configured for manual exercise Open Long Positions which are in-the-money and configured for automatic exercise, but a) are not sufficiently in-the-money to be automatically exercised according to the limits defined by the member and the current or specified underlying price or b) abandoned positions are defined for the contract. Whatever selection filter applied, the user may exercise or adjust the open long positions displayed in the table. The UnExerReason drop-down list-box in the inquiry response displays one of the following to indicate why any in-the-money positions have not been exercised: * (= All Unexercised In-The-Money Positions). Aband. + Insufficient (where insufficient means insufficient in-the-money positions ). Insufficient. Abandoned. Members can filter unexercised positions based on the above filter criteria. To select the filter criteria (mandatory: profile or product or contract or product and expiration month; Clearing Member; Exchange Member; in-the-money flag; optional: account, underlying price, expiration date), select the Exercise Filter... item on the Select menu to open the Exercise Filter - Overview window. The current filter settings for in-the-money are displayed above the table. A specific contract or product can also be selected using the contract entry line at the top of the window. After selecting one or more rows of the table, the entry fields are enabled. The Exercise button remains disabled until all mandatory entry fields have been filled using the correct format. Mandatory fields are Partial for agent's accounts, Partial or All for all other accounts. The exercise amount can be negative for exercise adjustments. Cash settled options cannot be exercised when they are out of the money; European style options can only be exercised on their expiration day. When a user wishes to abandon their positions from automatic exercise, or confirm an out-of-the-money option is being exercised, depending on

235 Window Layouts and s Page 235 their RAL settings, an Approve message window may be displayed requesting a second, different, user confirm the exercise/abandon. To request an on-behalf exercise of an out-of-the-money option contract, members must complete a formal request on headed paper showing their corporate design, have it signed by two qualified sign-offs and fax it to Eurex. Attempts to exercise a non-front-month series of an American style option trigger a confirmation window to prevent users from exercising a non-front-month series by accident, forgetting to exercise the front-month which might expire unexercised. Exchange members are able to define individual minimum in-the-money amounts for all option products. If the pre-defined minimum in-the-money amount is exceeded on expiration day, the options are exercised automatically. The minimum in-the-money amount is defined in the Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance window. The AbandonAutoExer tab in the Exercise Overview window can be used to explicitly exclude certain positions from the automatic exercise process. Click the Update button to refresh the data displayed in the window, and right click the menu bar to select a profile. Positions displayed in the Exercise Overview table are sorted by Exchange Member, product/ contract as listed in the profile, and account. Exercises are not possible for products on holiday. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Exercise Filter... Opens the Exercise Filter - Overview window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl+F5

236 Window Layouts and s Page 236 Menu Bar Item Shortcut ExerciseManually Exercise Sends an exercise or exercise adjustment request to the Eurex clearing system Clear AbandonAutoExer Abandon Clear Deactivates all selections in the table and clears the entry fields Sends an abandon request to the Eurex clearing system Deactivates all selections in the table and clears the entry fields Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreezes all of the columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help... On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Exercise Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Curr Act Contract Exer OpenLong Exchange ID Member ID for the Clearing Member Member ID for the Exchange Member Currency of the product Account type Contract ID Exercised positions Open long positions

237 Window Layouts and s Page 237 Exercise Overview Table Column PendGU TrdUnit U/LPrc U/LFlg U/LPrcXETRA InTheMnyPerCntr InTheMnyTot AbandPos UnExerReason Pending Give-up positions Trading unit No underlying price is specified in the filter: Underlying price User defined underlying price is specified in the filter: Filter underlying price (column then named FltU/LPrc) Code of the underlying price used for the calculation of the in-the-money amount: C: Underlying closing price E: Previous day closing price of the underlying F: Final settlement price P: Last trade price from the Eurex System S: Settlement price T: Last traded price of the underlying U: User specified price Underlying price from XETRA In-the-money amount per contract Total in-the-money amount Abandoned positions Reason for unexercise of in-the-money positions Exercise Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number * FltU/LPrc E Underlying price for in-the-money inquiries

238 Window Layouts and s Page 238 Exercise Overview Field Group UnExerReason E Reason for unexercised in-the-money positions ExerciseManually Section Partial E Quantity for partial exercise of positions (negative for adjustment) All E Exercise of all positions (non-agent accounts only) Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Text * AbandonAutoExer Section AbandonPartial E Quantity of selected positions to abandon Exercise Overview Radio Buttons Identifier Exercised Unexercised InTheMoney All Selects only exercised positions Selects only unexercised positions as defined Selects only in-the-money positions Selects both in and out of the money positions AbandonAutoExer Section AbandonAll UnabandonAll Abandons all current open long positions of selected rows Unabandons all positions chosen for abandonment Exercise Overview Buttons Identifier ExerciseManually Section Exercise Sends an exercise or exercise adjustment request to the Eurex clearing system

239 Window Layouts and s Page 239 Exercise Overview Buttons Clear Deactivates selections in the table and clears maintenance entry fields AbandonAutoExer Section Abandon Clear Sends an abandon request to the Eurex clearing system Deactivates selections in the table and clears maintenance entry fields Exercise Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Exercise Overview - Message Log window

240 Window Layouts and s Page Exercise Filter - Overview The Exercise Filter - Overview window allows the user to specify filter criteria for the Exercise Overview window. Exercise Filter window Overview This window enables the user to select whether all long positions or only in-the-money positions are displayed. The underlying price can be specified for which in-the-money long positions are selected. When a profile or product is specified, an expiration month may also be entered. If the user enters an expiration month, only open long positions for the specified profile or product and expiration month are returned, and contracts in the specified profile are ignored. Right-clicking the expiration month field opens a context menu, which can be used to fill the field. If a product is specified, the values in the context menu are the expiration months for the specified product. If a profile is selected, the values displayed in the context menu are the next 36 months, including the current business month.

241 Window Layouts and s Page 241 If the: InTheMoney radio button is selected, the Exercise Overview window displays only in-themoney positions for the specified profile, product or contract. If an underlying price is specified in the FltU/LPrc field, this value is used to select the in-the-money positions in this case, only the first product or contract of the selected profile is used. If the FltU/LPrc field is empty, an underlying price from the system is used. The ITMFrom and ITMTo fields display positions having In-the-money value within a specified range. All radio button is selected, the FltU/LPrc is cleared and disabled and the Exercise Overview window displays all positions for the specified profile, product or contract. Exercised radio button is selected, the FltU/LPrc is cleared and disabled and the Exercise Overview window displays all positions which have an exercise quantity greater than zero. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Contract... Opens the Product Selection window Opens the Contract Selection window Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Exercise Filter - Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Profile/Product/ Contract E Entry of a value with respect to the selected checkbox * ExpMth E Expiration month (entry is optional) * ClgMbr E Clearing member * ExchMbr E TheExchMbr is mandatory for NCMs but not for DCM/GCMs. For a GCM an empty ExchMbr field indicates an inquiry for all members that are cleared by the given ClgMbr. * FltU/LPrc E Underlying price for in-the-money inquiries Act E Account *

242 Window Layouts and s Page 242 Exercise Filter - Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Currency E Currency of the product * ITMFrom E Lower boundary of the in-the-money value ITMTo E Upper boundary of the in-the-money value Exercise Filter - Overview Radio Buttons Identifier Exercised/ Unexercised/ InTheMoney/ All Radio button group to filter for items displayed in the table of the Exercise Overview window: Exercised: Selects only exercised positions Unexercised: Selects only unexercised positions InTheMny: Selects only in-the-money positions All: All positions are displayed. Exercise Filter - Overview Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the filter criteria and closes the window Applies the filter criteria and leaves the window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Exercise Filter - Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Exercise Filter - Overview - Message Log window

243 Window Layouts and s Page Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance The Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance window allows the user to view and modify minimum in-the-money amount limits for automatic exercise. Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance window Overview The Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance window is accessed via the Settlement menu and enables the user to set individual minimum in-the-money amount per product and account (A1 - A9, P1, P2, M1, M2). The default value is The user is able to reduce this value or to change it to a percentage of the exercise price up to 9.99%. Note that for agent accounts A2 - A9, only the default minimum in-the-money amount is set up. Any individual amounts set up by the Clearing Member for A1 are not automatically copied to A2 - A9 when the additional agent accounts are assigned. The Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance window displays the products selected by the Exchange Member per applicable account. In the last two columns, the minimum in-the-money amount and the type of amount, absolute or percentage of the strike price is displayed. A multiselection of one or more rows in the table is possible. To inquire for minimum in-the-money amounts of a product, the user must enter a product into the Product field at the top of the window. To display minimum in-the-money amounts for all products of a profile the user can use the Profile item of the Select menu. It is possible to sort the rows of the table via the Sort... function per product, account and minimum in-the-money amount. The member may also display products not assigned to him. The field ExchMbr is accessible for the GCMs to display their NCMs, but GCMs cannot modify on behalf of their NCMs.

244 Window Layouts and s Page 244 To modify a minimum in-the-money amount, the amount must be entered in the ITMMin field at the bottom of the window. It specifies the amount per contract the position must be in-themoney to perform an automatic exercise on expiration day. The Cod field is mandatory and defines if the value in the ITMMin field is an absolute number (A) or a percentage of the strike price (P). Enter D/Delete in the Cod field to delete the member specific limits. If the D/Delete value is selected, the field ITMMin is disabled. The window supports the entry of minimum in-the-money amounts for a product type in the same way as for a product. These values are automatically applied to newly introduced products of this type. A change of the minimum in-the-money amounts of a product type is not applied to existing products. Enter: A product type in the ProductType field to display the minimum in-the-money amounts of the product type. The wildcard operator * in the ProductType field to display the minimum in-the-money amounts for all product types. Note that a product type can not be added to a profile. Click the: Update button to display any changes on the window. Clear button to clear all entry fields. Apply button to initiate modifications. Cancel button to remove unconfirmed data modifications. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4

245 Window Layouts and s Page 245 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Opens the Product Selection window Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Fields Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Product E Valid product * ProductType E Valid product type * ExchMbr E Member ID of the Exchange Member Cod E Type of ITMMin value: Absolute, Percentage or Delete * ITMMin E In-the-money minimum amount * Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Table Column Exch ExchMbr Product ProductType Exchange ID Exchange member Product ID Product type

246 Window Layouts and s Page 246 Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Table Column Act Cod ITMMin Account ID Absolute, Percentage or Delete In-the-money minimum amount Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Buttons Identifier Update Clear Apply Cancel Inquiry Refreshes the window Clears all entry fields Initiates and displays the modifications Closes the window with no further action Inquires the data for the selected product and Exchange Member Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance - Message Log window

247 Window Layouts and s Page Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: A new Basket column shows the Basket-ID of a transaction The Exercise Assignment Overview window displays all applicable fields for exercised long positions and assigned short positions per options contract per Exchange Member per account. Exercise Assignment Overview window Overview The Exercise Assignment Overview window is accessed via the Settlement menu and is available for both Clearing and Non Clearing Members. To select the filter criteria, select the Clearing Filter... item from the Select menu to display the Exercise Assignment Filter window. Mandatory fields are profile, product or contract and Transaction Date. Positions displayed in the Exercise Assignment Overview table are sorted by product or contract as listed in the profile and account. Two checkboxes, Exercised and Assigned, enable users to inquire individual exercised/assigned positions, or both, in a single inquiry. These checkboxes are also available on the Exercise Assignment Filter window. The underlying VALUES inquiries are combined and apply to all option products, not just options on stock (OSTK). The VALUES request Inquire Exercise Assignment can be used to obtain both exercise and assignment details based on filter. The Transaction Date and Clearing Member fields are mandatory for members. The exercise assignment data for the current business day can be inquired only after the POSTR phase during which the assignments are processed. The data for the past business days can be inquired throughout the online day. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

248 Window Layouts and s Page 248 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Clearing Filter... Opens the Clearing Filter window Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Exercise Assignment Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Exchange member ID Account

249 Window Layouts and s Page 249 Exercise Assignment Overview Table Column Curr Date Contract PosExer PosAsgn Units CurrRec(Pay) CashSettle ISIN Basket Currency of the product Date of the transaction Contract Positions exercised Positions assigned Number of stocks that a member must receive (positive) or deliver (negative) Amount that a Clearing Member must receive (positive) or pay (negative) (units multiplied by strike price) Cash settlement amounts that a member must receive (positive) or pay (negative) International Security Identification Number Basket-ID Exercise Assignment Overview Checkboxes Identifier Exercised Assigned Shows individually exercised positions only Shows individually assigned positions only Exercise Assignment Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] - Message Log window

250 Window Layouts and s Page Notification Overview The Notification Overview window displays open, notified, and designated give-up short positions. The user can open the Notification Detail Overview window for a selected futures contract at notification. Notification Overview window Overview The Notification Overview window is accessed via the Settlement menu and is available for GCMs and DCMs only. To select the filter criteria, select Clearing Filter... from the Select menu. Mandatory fields are profile, product or contract, Clearing Member and Exchange Member. Account is an optional field. A specific contract or product can be selected using the entry line at the top of the window. After selecting a row of the table, the Detail... button is enabled. The user can then open the Notification Detail Overview window for the selected position. Double-click a row of the table to open this window. Positions displayed in the Notification Overview table are sorted by Exchange Member, contract and account as listed in the profile. Notifications are not possible for products on holiday. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

251 Window Layouts and s Page 251 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Clearing Filter... Opens the Clearing Filter window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Notification Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member

252 Window Layouts and s Page 252 Notification Overview Table Column Curr Act Contract OpenShort NotiShort DsgnOpnShort Currency Account type Contract of the product Open short positions Notified short positions Designated open short positions Notification Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Futures: Product Expiration month and year * Notification Overview Table Mouse Usage Mouse Usage Column DC-L Any Opens the Notification Detail Overview window for the selected position Notification Overview Buttons Identifier Detail... Opens the Notification Detail Overview window

253 Window Layouts and s Page 253 Notification Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Notification Overview - Message Log window Notification Detail Overview The Notification Detail Overview window displays details on notified positions for one future contract. The user may submit a notification or notification adjustment for the contract. Notification Detail Overview window Overview The Notification Detail Overview window is accessed via the Notification Overview window. After selecting one or more rows of the table, the entry fields are enabled. The Notify button remains disabled until the mandatory entry field Qty is filled. Negative values are possible for notification adjustments. The Clear button is always enabled. It is used to empty the entry fields and deselect all selected rows in the table, at any time. If several rows are selected when the Notify button is clicked, the amount in the Qty field is applied to all selected futures. Bonds displayed in the Notification Detail Overview table are sorted by ISIN. After a successful notification, the corresponding position is updated in the table. The Notification Overview window is also updated. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar and the corresponding position remains in the table.

254 Window Layouts and s Page 254 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Full Table Mode Restores the window settings to the default Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Notify Sends a notification or notification adjustment request to the Eurex clearing system Clear Deselects rows in the table and empties all notification entry fields Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Notification Detail Overview Table Column ISIN SecuName NotiShort CTD International Security Identification Number Security name Notified short positions Cheapest to deliver

255 Window Layouts and s Page 255 Notification Detail Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT OpenShort D Open short position for the selected futures contract Qty E Quantity to notify (negative for notification adjustment) Customer E Customer * MIOrdNo E Member internal order number * Text E Text * Notification Detail Overview Button Identifier Notify Clear Sends a notification or notification adjustment request to the Eurex clearing system Deselects all rows in the table and empties all entry fields Notification Detail Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Notification Detail Overview - Message Log window

256 Window Layouts and s Page Notification Allocation Summary Overview The Notification Allocation Summary Overview window displays notified short positions, allocated long positions and nominal and invoicing amounts for the delivery procedure. Notification Allocation Summary Overview window Overview The Notification Allocation Summary Overview is accessed via the Settlement menu and is available for GCMs and DCMs only. To select a: Profile: Select the Profile... item on the Select menu to display the Profile Selection window. Product: Select the Product... item on the Select menu to display the Product Selection window. Contract: Select the Contract... item on the Select menu to display the Contract Selection window. Positions displayed in the Notification Allocation Summary Overview table are sorted by Clearing Member and contract as listed in the profile and ISIN. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Close Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window Closes the window with no further action F11

257 Window Layouts and s Page 257 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Contract... Opens the Product Selection window Opens the Contract Selection window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Notification Allocation Summary Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr Curr Contract ISIN SecuName NotiPos AllocPos FaceVal InvAmnt Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Currency of the product Contract identification International Security Identification Number Security name Notified positions Allocated positions Face value Invoice amount

258 Window Layouts and s Page 258 Notification Allocation Summary Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Notification Allocation Summary Overview - Message Log window Allocation Overview The Allocation Overview window is accessed via the Settlement menu for Clearing Members only and displays the ISIN, the name of the related underlying, the number of the assigned loans per bond futures contract and the settlement amount. Allocation Overview window Overview In order to select the filter criteria, select the Clearing Filter... item from the Select menu to display the Allocation Filter window. Mandatory fields are profile, product or contract, Clearing Member and Exchange Member. Account is an optional field. A specific contract or product can also be selected using the entry line at the top of the window. Any selection using the contract field group is transmitted to the filter window; all non-mandatory filter-criteria are initialized; the filter window is not closed. The Allocation Overview window can only display information about bond futures, and only when the futures contract is at notification, when the future's expiration date lies in the current month. The entry fields are disabled as long as no filter is selected. Positions displayed in the Allocation Overview table are sorted by Clearing Member, Exchange Member, contract (as listed in the profile), account and ISIN. A user-defined sorting can be set with the menu item Window > Sort...

259 Window Layouts and s Page 259 If this window is opened without saved settings and no security is selected, the title is Allocation Overview. Select a: Profile to display a title of profile name and Allocation Overview, for example: Profile X - Allocation Overview. Product to display a title of product name and Allocation Overview, for example: FGBL - Allocation Overview. Contract to display a title of contract name and Allocation Overview, for example: FGBL SEP02 - Allocation Overview. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Clearing Filter... Opens the Clearing Filter window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

260 Window Layouts and s Page 260 Allocation Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Curr Act Contract ISIN SecuName CntrAllo InvAmnt Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member Currency Account type Contract International Security Identification Number Security name Allocated contracts Invoice amount Allocation Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Bond futures currently at notification * Allocation Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Allocation Overview - Message Log window

261 Window Layouts and s Page Futures Deliverable Position Overview The Futures Deliverable Position Overview window is accessed via the Settlement menu to Clearing Members only and displays information about short, long, notified and pending give-up positions for bond futures that are at notification. Overview To select filter criteria: Futures Deliverable Position Overview window Profile: Select Profile...on the Select menu to display the Profile Selection window. Product: Select Product... on the Select menu to display the Product Selection window. Contract: Select Contract... on the Select menu to display the Contract Selection window. A specific contract or product can also be selected using the entry line at the top of the window. Any selection using this contract field group is transmitted to the filter window, with all nonmandatory filter criteria initialized and the filter window is left open. The Futures Deliverable Position Overview window can only display information about bond futures, and only when the futures contract is at notification and has been set to expired, when the future s expiration date lies in the current month. Information about bond future positions at notification is displayed throughout the whole notification day. The table is sorted by contract, Exchange Member and account, as listed in the profile. A userdefined sorting can be set with the menu item Window > Sort...

262 Window Layouts and s Page 262 If this window is opened without saved settings and no security selected, the title is Futures Deliverable Position Overview. Select a: Profile to display a title of profile name and Futures Deliverable Position Overview, for example: Profile X - Futures Deliverable Position Overview. Product to display a title of product name and Futures Deliverable Position Overview, for example: FGBL - Futures Deliverable Position Overview. Contract to display a title of contract name and Futures Deliverable Position Overview, for example: FGBL SEP00 - Futures Deliverable Position Overview. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Contract Opens the Product Selection window Opens the Contract Selection window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table

263 Window Layouts and s Page 263 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Unfreeze All Autofit All Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Futures Deliverable Position Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Curr Act Contract OpenShort OpenLong NotiPos DsgnOpnShort DsgnOpnLong Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member Currency Account type Contract Number of open short positions Number of open long positions Number of notified positions Number of pending short give-up contracts Number of pending long give-up contracts Futures Deliverable Position Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Bond futures currently at notification *

264 Window Layouts and s Page 264 Futures Deliverable Position Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Futures Deliverable Position Overview - Message Log window 4.4 Collateral Collateral Pool Overview The Collateral Pool Overview window is accessed via the Collateral menu and provides an overview of the pools and their related members. Collateral Pool Overview window Overview The Collateral Pool Overview window enables members to view the pools mapped to them either as a Clearing Member or system-defined owner. Clearing Members, however, can maintain the permanent cash settings of the Default and Individually Segregated pools for which they are the Clearing Member. Enter either ClgMbr and/or Owner in the respective fields and click the Start Enquiry icon to locate and display the pool and permanent cash records of the entered member/owner. The table consists of rows showing the pool data and rows showing the permanent cash settings of each pool for the different currencies of the pools margin requirements. The permanent cash rows can be collapsed or expanded using the controls in the first column. If there are permanent cash settings for a pool, then the corresponding pool data row shows Available in the PermCash column. Permanent cash settings are only possible for pools of usage margin. To display the CSD accounts of a selected pool, select that pool and click the Accounts button to display the Collateral Account Overview [Modified] window. The CSD accounts of the selected pool are listed therein.

265 Window Layouts and s Page 265 The minimum amounts for pools of usage Clearing Fund and Company Capital are maintained using this window, those for pools of usage margin are regularly updated by the Eurex Real-time Risk Management system. Possible changes to the minimum amount are not updated on this window by broadcasts. Non Clearing Member Functionality: As only pools are shown for which the submitting member is either ClgMbr or Owner, for individually segregated Non Clearing Members, the pools they are assigned as system-defined owner are shown. For other Non Clearing Members (Omnibus or Default), no data is shown. Clearing Member Functionality: The pools of the Clearing Member are shown. The Clearing Member can maintain the permanent cash settings of pools for which it is the ClgMbr (Omnibus, Default and fully segregated). If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Find Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Collateral Pool Overview Table Column PoolId Status Type The unique ID of the pool Status of the pool, for example, Active, Pending or todelete Freeform text field in which to add a description of the pool Type of pool, for example Default, Omnibus Segregated or Fully Segregated

266 Window Layouts and s Page 266 Collateral Pool Overview Table Column Usage ClgMbr Owner Curr MinReq PermCash Action How the pool is used, for example, Margin, Clearing Fund or Company Capital Member ID of the pool s Clearing Member For Default and Omnibus pools, the owner is the Clearing Member. For individually segregated Non Clearing Member pools, the Non Clearing Member is the owner. Currency of the pool The minimum amounts required for the pool. The permanent cash settings for the different currencies The activity executed when the Submit and/or Apply buttons are clicked Collateral Pool Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr E Select the member ID of the pool s Clearing Member * Owner E Select the owner of the pool * Usage E Select one of the following usage codes: C: Company Capital F: Clearing Fund M: Margin

267 Window Layouts and s Page 267 Collateral Pool Overview Buttons Identifier Accounts... Apply Cancel Opens the Collateral Account Overview [Modified] window listing the CSD accounts of the selected pool Applies any changes made and leaves the window open Cancels any changes made and closes the window Collateral Pool Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Pool Overview - Message Log window

268 Window Layouts and s Page Collateral Pool Relations The Collateral Pool Relations window is accessed via the Collateral menu and displays an overview of the pool s relations. Collateral Pool Relations window Overview The Collateral Pool Relations window is used to inquire and maintain pool relations, that is, the assignment of members position accounts to pools. These settings are the basis for the aggregation of margin requirements and cash payments. If no relation for a member/account combination is set up, this combination is assigned to the default pool of the Clearing Member. Records can be selected by Pool ID, ClgMbr or Client. If a: Pool ID is provided, then all relations for this pool are shown. ClgMbr is provided, then all relations for all pools of this Clearing Member are shown. Client is provided, then all relations for all pools for which the member is Client are shown. Only relations for pools are shown for which the submitting member is either ClgMbr or Client. The Pool Type is a property of the pool, but shown on the window to ease handling.

269 Window Layouts and s Page 269 Non Clearing Member Functionality: For all Non Clearing Members, records are shown for which the Non Clearing Member is in the ClgMbr or Client fields. This is usually only the Omnibus or a individually segregated pool the Non Clearing Member is assigned to. If no relation for a Non Clearing Member is shown, the Non Clearing Member is assigned to the Default pool, but it might also be possible to have an explicit assignment to the Default pool. Clearing Member Functionality: For Clearing Members, records are shown for which the Clearing Member is in the ClgMbr or Client field. This way, all relations for the pools of the Clearing Member are shown, as well as possible pool relations to another Clearing Member as required for downgrade. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected column(s) Show All Displays all columns Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Collateral Pool Relations - Column Selection window to select/de-select which columns to display in the table, and where Freezes the selected column(s) Unfreezes all columns Ensures all columns fit neatly in the table Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

270 Window Layouts and s Page 270 Collateral Pool Relations Table Column ClgMbr Client Act Status PoolId Type Action Member ID of the Clearing Member the pool belongs to The client member of the pool, that is, the Exchange Member the positions belong to The Position Account of the client mapped to the pool, for example, PP or A1 to A9 depending on the member type Status of the relation, for example, Active, Pending or todelete The unique ID of the pool Type of pool, for example Default, Omnibus Segregated or Fully Segregated The activity executed when the Submit and/or Apply buttons are clicked Collateral Pool Relations Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr E Select the member ID of the required Clearing Member * Client E Select the client member of the pool * PoolId E Select the unique ID of the pool * Collateral Pool Relations Buttons Identifier Submit Cancel Submits any changes made and closes the window Cancels any changes made and closes the window Collateral Pool Relations Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Pool Relations - Message Log window

271 Window Layouts and s Page Collateral Pool Status The Collateral Pool Status window is accessed via the Collateral menu and displays an overview of the margin coverage per pool and Clearing Member. Collateral Pool Status window Overview Select either the ClgMbr or Owner and click the Start Inquiry icon to display the selected item s margin coverage details. The Minimum Required and Variation/Premium values are subtracted from the Current Balance to display the Excess/Shortfall. The Variation/Premium is not displayed for pools of usage Clearing Fund or Company Capital. Select a PoolId and click the Detail button to display the Collateral Status Detail [Modified] window and pass the values for the Clearing Member and Pool ID. If an inquiry is run in the morning before the current minimum margin requirements have been transferred from the Eurex Real-time Risk Management system (CE state Restricted), the values for the Current Balance, Minimum Required, VarMarginPremium and Excess/Shortfall are blanked out as the current values are not known at that time. Non Clearing Member Functionality: For individually segregated Non Clearing Members, details of their pool is shown. No data is shown for all other Non Clearing Members. Clearing Member Functionality: Data is shown for all pools of the Clearing Member. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E

272 Window Layouts and s Page 272 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select... Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreezes all of the columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Collateral Pool Status Table Column PoolId Type The unique ID of the pool Type of pool, for example Default, Omnibus Segregated or Fully Segregated Usage The usage of the pool, for example, M, C or F. ClgMbr Owner Curr StartofDay CurrBalance Member ID of the pool s Clearing Member For Default and Omnibus pools, the Owner is the Clearing Member For Fully Segregated pools, the Owner is the Non Clearing Member The currency provided by the Eurex Real-time Risk Management system. If no data is provided, the currency shown is the clearing currency of the Clearing Member of the pool The deposits for the pool after batch, that is, the collateral balance at the start of day The current deposits of the pool

273 Window Layouts and s Page 273 Collateral Pool Status Table Column MinReq VarMarginPremium Excess/Shortfall LastUpdate The required minimum amount (from the Eurex Real-time Risk Management system) The estimated amount of variation margin and premiums (from the Eurex Real-time Risk Management system) The value obtained by subtracting the Minimum Required and Variation/ Premium from the Current Balance The date and time of the last update of the minimum amount Collateral Pool Status Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr E Select the member ID of the required Clearing Member * Owner E Select the ID of the required owner * Collateral Pool Status Buttons Identifier Detail... Opens the Collateral Status Detail [Modified] window Collateral Pool Status Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Pool Status - Message Log window

274 Window Layouts and s Page CSD Overview The CSD Overview window is accessed via the Collateral menu and allows Clearing Members to view all CSDs with which Eurex has an interface. CSD Overview window Overview The CSD Overview window is not available for NCMs but allows Clearing Members to view the CSDs available for collateral security deposit or withdrawal. The first column displays the ID of a CSD; the second displays the name of the CSD. To select a CSD (and enable the Detail... button), select the applicable row in the table. Only one CSD can be selected. If a second row is selected, the first one is deselected. Note that the Reload icon is always enabled. For further information about a CSD, select a CSD in the table to enable the Detail... button, then click the Detail... button to display the CSD Detail [Modified] window. To refresh the table and to see modifications other participants entered, click the Reload icon. The CSD-IDs and the related CSD names are listed in alphabetical order of the CSD-IDs. CSD Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Full Table Mode Restores the window settings to the default Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4

275 Window Layouts and s Page 275 CSD Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Maintain Detail... Opens the CSD Detail [Modified] window in readonly mode for members Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 CSD Overview Table Column CSD Name CSD ID Name of the CSD CSD Overview Buttons Identifier Detail Opens the CSD Detail [Modified] window in read-only mode for members CSD Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the CSD Overview - Message Log window CSD Detail [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: A new Representation attribute indicates whether the collaterals for the respective CSD are represented ISIN-based (S) or claim amount-based (A).

276 Window Layouts and s Page 276 The CSD Detail window displays information about CSDs to which Eurex has an interface. CSD Detail window Overview The CSD Detail window is accessed via the CSD Overview window and allows all members a display-only view of CSD details. CSD has a daily deadline time which is set up on the CSD Detail window. The time set defines when the last instruction can be sent to a CSD from the Eurex System, the transfer and processing time must be considered when setting this value. CSD Detail Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

277 Window Layouts and s Page 277 CSD Detail Field Group Identifier Type CT CSD D CSD identifier Representation D Representation of the CSD. Either ISIN-based (S) or claim amount-based (A). Name D Name of CSD Street D Name of street and number City/Zip D City where CSD resides and zip code of the city where CSD resides Country D Country where CSD resides Contacts D Contacts to the CSD Calendar New/ Old D A link to one of the Eurex Trading Calendars * Deadline New/ Old D New value of the deadline time and time when last instruction is accepted for the CSD * CSD Detail Buttons Identifier Close Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification CSD Detail Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the CSD Detail [Modified] - Message Log window Collateral Account Overview [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: A new PledgeActRefSize column in the table shows how many characters of the pledge account ID are used as a reference ID.

278 Window Layouts and s Page 278 The Collateral Account Overview window is used to maintain collateral accounts for Clearing Members. Collateral Account Overview window Overview The Collateral Account Overview window is accessed via the Collateral menu and allows members to view their CSD accounts. The following selection criteria are available: Clearing Member (ClgMbr) Only: Select a Clearing Member and click the Start Inquiry icon to display all CSD accounts linked to pools with the member as Clearing Member. Clearing Member (ClgMbr) and PoolID: Select a Clearing Member and Pool ID and click the Start Inquiry icon to display all CSD accounts linked to the selected pool. Owner Only: Select an owner and click the Start Inquiry icon to display all CSD accounts linked to pools with the member as owner. Owner and PoolID: Select an owner and Pool ID and click the Start Inquiry icon to display all CSD accounts linked to the selected pool. PoolID Only: Select a Pool ID and click the Start Inquiry icon to display all CSD accounts linked to the selected pool. When the window is opened, the Usage column displays the usage of each collateral account (Margin, Clearing Fund and Company Capital (CompanyCap)). Furthermore, the collateral accounts numbers are displayed per Pool ID in the Pledge Act column, and, for each record, a corresponding main account is maintained which is used as main account for security collateral transactions.

279 Window Layouts and s Page 279 For: Individually Segregated Non Clearing Members: Only the mappings of their pools are shown. Non Clearing Members Assigned to the Default or Omnibus Pools: No data is shown. Clearing Members: All CSD accounts for their pools including the fully segregated pools are shown. Members can have multiple CSD accounts per CSD and usage. At least one margin account and the corresponding main account are required for each member. Collateral Account Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Sort... Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select... Freeze Unfreeze All Autofill All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreezes all of the columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

280 Window Layouts and s Page 280 Collateral Account Overview Table Column CSD Usage PledgeAct One of the possible CSD maintained on the CSD Detail window Can be either Margin, Fund or CompCap Members pledged account number at the CSD PledgeActRefSize Number of characters in the pledge account ID used as a reference ID MainAct CSDRef PoolId ClgMbr Owner Members corresponding main account number at the CSD Members reference at the CSD (Business Partner ID) The unique ID of the pool Member ID of the pool s Clearing Member For Default and Omnibus pools, the Owner is the Clearing Member For Fully Segregated pools, the Owner is the Non Clearing Member Collateral Account Overview Fields Identifier Type CT ClgMbr E Member (allowed for NCMs also), also be used for on behalf of maintenance. * Owner E Owner * PoolId E Pool ID * Collateral Account Overview Buttons Identifier Cancel Closes the window with no further action

281 Window Layouts and s Page 281 Collateral Account Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Account Overview [Modified] - Message Log window Collateral Status Detail [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: For claim-amount based CSDs the claim amount data is shown in the Security column The Collateral Status Detail window is accessed via the Collateral menu and displays the current collateral status for a specific pool of a Clearing Member either in one currency or aggregated to the clearing currency. Collateral Status Detail window Overview For a selected pool, the Collateral Status Detail window shows the start of day, the completed deposits and withdrawals and a balance. If a currency is provided, the amounts are shown for the selected currency and also converted to the members clearing currency. If no currency is

282 Window Layouts and s Page 282 provided, the total amounts added up across all currencies are shown in the Clearing Member currency. For a selected Pool ID, the window displays data in the CollAction column for the following actions: Start of day Withdrawal Deposit Pending Withdrawals Booked Used Spec Current Balance Minimum Required Variation/Premium Excess/Shortfall Pending Withdrawals Pending Deposits Total Pending Withdrawal Booked If a currency is provided, the amounts are displayed for the selected currency and also converted to the members clearing currency. If no currency is provided, the total amounts added up across all currencies are shown in the Clearing Member currency. The data is displayed in the CollAction column. The Minimum required and Excess/Shortfall rows are only applicable if the total across all currencies is selected and are blanked out if only one currency is selected. If data is inquired in the morning before the current minimum margin requirements have been transferred from the Eurex Real-time Risk Management system, these rows are blanked out as the current values are not known. The Tot Pending Withdrawal Booked row shows the accumulated pending withdrawal booked amount over the days excluding the current business day. A(n): Individually Segregated Non Clearing Member can only view the status of the pool where they are the owner. Non Clearing Member with Default or Omnibus segregation displays no data. Clearing Member can view the status of any of their pools

283 Window Layouts and s Page 283 Collateral Status Detail Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window Collateral Status Detail Fields Identifier Type CT Pool ID E Pool ID * Curr Eo Currency * ClgCurr D Clearing Currency of the selected member ExchRate D Exchange rate to selected currency

284 Window Layouts and s Page 284 Collateral Status Detail Table Column CollAction Cash Security Guarantee TotColl TotCollClgCurr Textual description of entry, such as Start of Day Amount of Cash in selected currency Amount of Security or Claim Amount in selected currency Amount of Guarantee in selected currency Sum of cash, security and guarantee in selected currency TotColl converted to the members clearing currency Collateral Status Detail Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Status Detail [Modified] - Message Log window Security Deposit Overview [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: The Security Deposit Overview window also shows the collateral balances for claim amount-based CSDs. The Security Deposit Overview window is accessed via the Collateral menu and displays the balances and movements of the collateral in the security deposit account. Security Deposit Overview window

285 Window Layouts and s Page 285 Overview The Security Deposit Overview window is available for GCMs, DCMs and segregated NCMs and displays an overview of the security collateral deposits of a Clearing Member for all currencies and usage types. To view all pools associated with a member, as a Clearing Member or Owner, either: Select a Clearing Member from the ClgMbr drop-down list-box then any one of the member s available Pool Ids and usages from the PoolId drop-down list-box, or Select any available Pool ID and usage from the PoolId drop-down list-box. When the window is opened, information about the balances and movements of the collateral in the security deposit account is displayed for the Clearing Member. The user can change the selection above the table if the information should be displayed only for the company capital, clearing fund or margin account. The amount of cash deposited as collateral for the collection of interest is also shown under the separate representative ISIN numbers for the accepted currencies. For claim amount-based entries, the ISIN, CurRsvd, Close, Market and Factor columns are not filled. Only the StartBulk, Withdrawal, PendWithdr, Deposit and CurBulk contain amounts.

286 Window Layouts and s Page 286 Select a row in the table to enable the: Detail... button. Click this button to open the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window, which displays the detailed transactions of the security deposit for a single security. The user can also open the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window by double-clicking a row in the table. CoverAs... button. Click this button to open the Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window, which is used to assign specific equity collateral for a given trading member to positions in the proprietary or agent margin account. The Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window is not accessible to Non Clearing Members. The CoverAs... button is only enabled if the selected CSD is ISIN based and has the usage code M (Margin). The records in the Security Deposit Overview table are sorted by currency and ISIN. The Sort item on the Window menu allows the user to choose a user-defined sorting. The Withdraw button is used to open the Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] window and the fields are preset with the data of the currently selected row. For: Non Clearing Members: Only transactions of pools for which the submitting member is owner (or Clearing Member) are shown, that is, only individually segregated Non Clearing Members can see transactions of their pool. Clearing Members: Transactions of pools for which the submitting member is Clearing Member (or owner) are shown. Security Deposit Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table

287 Window Layouts and s Page 287 Security Deposit Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Maintenance Detail... CoverAsgn... Withdraw Opens the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window Opens the Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window Opens the Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] window passing the ISIN, UsgCod, CSD and PldgAcct of the selected row Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Security Deposit Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr PoolId Curr ISIN UsgCod Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member The unique ID of the pool Currency International Security Identification Number Usage code, identification of asset purpose: M: Margin F: Clearing Fund C: Company Capital

288 Window Layouts and s Page 288 Security Deposit Overview Table Column CSD PledgeAct StartBulk Withdrawal PendWithdr Deposit CurBulk CurRsvd CurUsed Close Market Factor Collateral CSD Id of the deposit location Members account number at the CSD Previous day's balance of the collateral used as margin cover Number of securities released to the Clearing Member's main account Amount of pending deposits/withdrawals at this CSD/account for the selected ISIN Displays deposits from current day Current collateral balance used as margin cover; corresponds to StartBulk minus WithBulk plus DepBulk Number of currently reserved specific equities Number of currently used specific equities Closing price of the securities Value of the securities in the market; corresponds to CurBulk multiplied by Close Percentage of the market value of each security accepted as cover Cover value of the securities; corresponds to Market multiplied by Factor Security Deposit Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr Ct Clearing member ID * PoolId Ct The unique ID of the pool * ISIN Eo International Security Identification Number CSD Ct CSD Id of the deposit location *

289 Window Layouts and s Page 289 Security Deposit Overview Buttons Identifier Detail CoverAs... Withdraw Opens the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] window passing the member, ISIN, CSD and usage code of the selected row Opens the Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window passing the ISIN of the selected row Opens the Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] window passing the ISIN, UsgCod, CSD and PldgAcct of the selected row Security Deposit Overview Message Box Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Security Deposit Overview [Modified] - Message Log window Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview The Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window is used to assign/de-assign specific equity collateral for a given trading member to the pledged account at a specific CSD. Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window

290 Window Layouts and s Page 290 Overview The Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview window is accessed via the Collateral menu or the Security Deposit Overview [Modified] window and is only available to Clearing Members. Users are able to assign/de-assign and inquire specific equity collateral from available bulk collateral of a given security to the pledged account at a specific CSD. This task can be performed on an own account or on behalf of the related Non Clearing Members. A user can also view the quantity of the pledged collateral that has been used for margining and the price at which the quantity is evaluated. The specific assignment is done per CSD and pledged account. A field group at the bottom half of the window is provided for assigning new specific equity collateral. The field AvailBulkColl shows how much bulk collateral is available and the field SpecEquityColl shows how much specific equity collateral is assigned. To add a new specific equity collateral assignment, the account and specific equity collateral must be entered in the Act and SpecEquityColl fields. The Add button is then enabled and can be clicked. The field AvailBulkColl informs the user about the number of available shares. Specific assignments are carried out per CSD and pledged account An existing specific equity collateral assignment can be deleted by selecting the corresponding row in the table and clicking the Delete button. Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Collateral Delete Deletes the assignment of a collateral as specific equity collateral Clear Add Update Clears data entered in the field group Assigns new collateral as specific equity collateral Refreshes the displayed data

291 Window Layouts and s Page 291 Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Curr CSD PledgeAct ISIN UsedSecQty SecEvalPrc AvailBulkColl SpecEquityColl Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member Member ID of the Exchange Member Account type Currency CSD Location Pledged Account International Security Identification Number Specific equity collateral quantity used for margining Price at which the used specific equity collateral quantity is evaluated Collateral balance available for pledging Collateral pledged as specific equity collateral

292 Window Layouts and s Page 292 Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID ClgMbr D Member ID of the Clearing Member ExchMbr D/Eo Member ID of the Exchange Member Act D/Eo Account type * ISIN D/Eo International Security Identification Number CSD D/Eo CSD Location * PledgeAct D/Eo Pledged account SpecEquityColl D Collateral pledged as specific equity collateral AvailBulkColl D Collateral balance available for pledging Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Buttons Identifier Delete Clear Add Update Inquiry Deletes the assignment of a collateral as specific equity collateral Clears data entered in the field group Assigns new collateral as specific equity collateral Refreshes the displayed data Inquires the selected pledged account Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview - Message Log window

293 Window Layouts and s Page Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: A new column sendrefid shows the sender s reference ID. The table can also be filtered by the sender s reference ID using the new SendRefID field. The Collateral Transaction Overview is accessed via the Collateral menu and is used for the processing and supervision of collateral transactions. Collateral Transaction Overview window Overview The Collateral Transaction Overview window displays the collateral transactions when the user enters various criteria. The transactions display the following: cash deposit and withdrawal, security deposit and withdrawal, which includes the instructions from the CSD to adjust the accounting due to capital adjustments. The Status field displays the latest transaction to the member. Each transaction is identified by a unique ID. The window subscribes to the collateral broadcast stream, so changes during collateral processing are updated and displayed in the window. Members can inquire their own collateral transactions. If a ClgMbr is provided, a member's Pool IDs can be selected from a drop-down list-box showing the Pool ID and the usage. If the PoolId selection field is empty, the Pool ID is not used as filter criterion. The numbers in the Amount column are shown with a sign to distinguish deposits (positive) and withdrawals (negative). Collateral amounts for withdrawals are displayed with negative values unless the data is displayed automatically from the collateral transaction broadcast. Perform an inquiry to display negative values received via the collateral transaction broadcast as negative. Collateral amounts for deposits, whether received via the collateral transaction broadcast or not, are displayed with a positive value. The Approve button is used to approve transactions in the Pending Approval state. In the Pending Approval state, the transaction is entered which is not approved by the second user. The approver's User ID must be different from the User ID of the member entering the transaction. Members are able to delete their own transactions in the Pending Approval or Blocked state. A member is said to be in the Blocked state when their withdrawal is approved

294 Window Layouts and s Page 294 but either the coverage is still not available or it is entered after the CSD deadline (for security collaterals) or the currency deadline (for cash collaterals). When a transaction is entered by Market Supervision for emergency still not approved by the second user, it is said to be in the Pending Approval Reduce Balance Only state. Transactions in Pending Approval or Pending Approval Reduce Balance Only state are set to Deleted state during the next batch. A transaction can be deleted by the member. Market Supervision can approve a transaction on behalf of a member. Multiple selections are supported on this window. Collateral Transaction Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Maintain Approve Used to approve selected transactions Modify... Delete Updates the currently edited record Mark the selected rows for deletion Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table

295 Window Layouts and s Page 295 Collateral Transaction Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Unfreeze All Autofit All Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Collateral Transaction Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr PoolId Curr ISIN Usage UpdDate UpdTime TranTyp TraderID Amount CSD Exchange ID Member ID of the Clearing Member The unique ID of the pool Currency of the transaction International Security Identification Number, empty for cash One of the following Usage Codes: M: Margin F: Clearing Fund C: Company Capital The date of the last change to the transaction The time of the last change to the transaction Numerical transaction type as supported by the Eurex System The Trader ID of the submitting user. This field can be empty for transactions not submitted via GUI. Number of securities (for security collateral transactions) or cash amount (for cash collateral transactions) For: Securities: One of the possible CSDId maintained on the CSD Detail [Modified] window Cash: Empty

296 Window Layouts and s Page 296 Collateral Transaction Overview Table Column PledgeAct MainAct Status Text MSFlag ValueDate TranDate TranTim ReasCod Origin Close Factor SendRefId Collateral For: Securities: The members pledged account at the CSD Cash: Empty For: Securities: The members main account at the CSD Cash: Empty Textual representation of status (for example, Pending Approval) Either displays an error text delivered from CCP or a member entered text The flag shows that Market Supervision entered the transaction Value Date of the transaction The date the transaction was originally entered into the system The time the transaction was originally entered into the system Error code why the transaction was, for example, rejected Origin of transaction CSD SWIFT Member or Market Supervision on behalf of member, Auto Closing price Note: This column is hidden by default. Select Columns > Show All (or Ctrl + U) to display it. Factor Note: This column is hidden by default. Select Columns > Show All (or Ctrl + U) to display it. The sender s reference ID. Collateral value

297 Window Layouts and s Page 297 Collateral Transaction Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr Em Clearing Member * PoolId Em The unique ID of the pool SendRefID Eo The sender s reference ID Status Eo Collateral transaction status Note: If provided, this shows only transactions having this status. Usage Eo Usage Code. Note: If provided, this shows only those transactions having this usage code. * * CSD Eo CSD Location * ISIN Eo International Security Identification Number TranDate Eo Transaction Date * Collateral Transaction Overview Buttons Identifier Approve Modify Delete The currently selected transaction(s) are selected for approval The text of the currently selected record can be changed The currently selected record(s) are set to state Deleted Collateral Transaction Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Transaction Overview [Modified] - Message Log window

298 Window Layouts and s Page Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] Security New for Eurex Release 14.0: The former Security Collateral Transaction Entry window is now called Collateral Transaction Entry window Clearing Members can enter intraday cash collateral deposits and withdrawals using the new Cash tab The Collateral Transaction Entry window is used for collateral withdrawals and deposits by a member and by Market Supervision on behalf of a member. It provides a tab to withdraw securities and one to deposit or withdraw cash collaterals. Overview The Collateral Transaction Entry window is accessed via the Collateral menu or the Security Deposit Overview [Modified] window. Only the pool s Clearing Member is able to withdraw securities or withdraw/deposit cash using the Collateral Transaction Entry window. However, members are not able to enter withdrawal transactions for claim-amount based CSDs which are assigned to Xemac accounts. If an error occurs during submission, an error message is displayed in the status bar and in the Message Log window. On the Security tab of the Collateral Transaction Entry window a Clearing Member can enter security withdrawals. Collateral Transaction Entry window - Security Tab

299 Window Layouts and s Page 299 Overview If the Collateral Transaction Entry window is accessed via: The Security Deposit Overview [Modified] window, the Security tab opens with the corresponding fields pre-populated with the values of the selected row. Elsewhere, the user is able to select the appropriate Pool ID, CSD, Pledge Account and Main Account from the respective drop-down list-boxes. The Available, PendWithdr, CurUsed and CurRsvd fields are provided to display the current balance for the selected pledged account. Collateral Transaction Entry - Security Tab Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Collateral Transaction Entry - Security Tab Fields Identifier Type CT PoolId Em The unique ID of the pool * CSD Em CSD Location * PledgeAct Em Pledged account at CSD * MainAct Em Main account at CSD * ISIN Em ISIN of the security to be deposited/withdrawn Amount Em Quantity to be withdrawn or deposited * Curr D Currency of the security Text Eo Serves for entering a member specified text Available D Max amount available for withdrawal at this CSD/account for the selected ISIN (deposit quantity - pending wdl - reserved SPEC)

300 Window Layouts and s Page 300 Collateral Transaction Entry - Security Tab Fields Identifier Type CT PendWithdr D Amount of pending deposits/withdrawals at this CSD/account for the selected ISIN CurUsed D Number of equity USED at RE for contract cover at this CSD/account for the selected ISIN (only for Usage Code M) CurRsvd D Number of equities reserved for contract cover at this CSD/account for the selected ISIN (only for Usage Code M) Collateral Transaction Entry - Security Tab Buttons Identifier WITHDRAW Submit Apply Cancel Toggle switch between deposit and withdrawal mode. For members this button is inactive and set to withdrawal mode. Submits the data and closes the window Submits the data and leaves the window open Closes the window with no further action Collateral Transaction Entry - Security Tab Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] - Message Log window Cash On the Cash tab of the Collateral Transaction Entry window a Clearing Member can enter intraday cash withdrawals and deposits. Any transaction request will be rejected by the system if: the respective currency is on a holiday in its assigned calendar it is entered after the respective currency deadline

301 Window Layouts and s Page 301 These currency deadlines are displayed in the Exchange Rate Overview [Modified] window. Collateral Transaction Entry window - Cash Tab Collateral Transaction Entry - Cash Tab Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Collateral Transaction Entry - Cash Tab Fields Identifier Type CT PoolId Em The unique ID of the pool * Curr Em The currency of the cash withdrawal/deposit * Amount Em Amount to be withdrawn/deposited * Text Eo Serves for entering a member specified text

302 Window Layouts and s Page 302 Collateral Transaction Entry - Cash Tab Buttons Identifier DEPOSIT/ WITHDRAW Submit Apply Cancel Toggle switch between deposit and withdrawal mode. Submits the data and closes the window Submits the data and leaves the window open Closes the window with no further action Collateral Transaction Entry - Cash Tab Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] - Message Log window 4.5 Risk Management Daily Margin Overview The Daily Margin Overview window is accessed via the Risk Mgmt menu and displays the options premium margin, futures spread margin, additional margin, delivery margin, unadjusted margin as well as the total margin requirements for an Exchange Member. Daily Margin Overview window

303 Window Layouts and s Page 303 Overview To select a specific Exchange Member and currency, select Clearing Filter... from the Select menu to display the Daily Margin Filter window. Mandatory fields are Clearing Member (ClgMbr), Exchange Member (ExchMbr) and Currency (Curr). If the user is a Non Clearing Member, the line corresponding to the Clearing Member is not displayed. Otherwise, the last line in the table shows the total margin requirement for the Clearing Member including the requirements of the CCP-only Non Clearing Members. Margin information displayed in the Daily Margin Overview table is sorted by Exchange Member and currency. If the margin information is inquired in the morning, then: No data is displayed in the table and only blank rows are visible. Rows of certain previous day values or zeros are blanked out. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Daily Margin Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Clearing Filter... Opens the Clearing Filter window Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

304 Window Layouts and s Page 304 Daily Margin Overview Table Column Exch Total ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Curr Prm/CurrLiqMarg FutSprdMarg AddMarg DelivMarg UnadjMargReq TotMargReq Exchange ID Total margin requirement for the member Member ID for Clearing Member Member ID for Exchange Member Account type Currency Option premium margin and current liquidating margin Futures spread margin Additional margin Delivery margin Unadjusted margin requirement Total margin requirement Daily Margin Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Daily Margin Overview - Message Log window.

305 Window Layouts and s Page Margined Position Overview The Margined Position Overview window is accessed via the Risk Mgmt menu and displays the net positions per contract for an Exchange Member. Margined Position Overview window Overview To select a profile/product/contract, select the Clearing Filter... item from the Select menu to display the Margined Position Filter window. To specify other filtering criteria, type the data in the corresponding entry fields. Mandatory fields are profile or product or contract, Clearing Member and Exchange Member. A specific contract or product can also be selected using the entry line at the top of the window. Any selection using the contract field group is transmitted to the filter window. All non-mandatory filter criteria are initialized, and the filter window stays open. This entry line is disabled as long as no filter is selected. Net Positions displayed in the Margined Position Overview table are sorted by Exchange Member, contract as per the selected profile, account type and net position flag. A user-defined sorting can be set with the menu item Window > Sort... If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

306 Window Layouts and s Page 306 Margined Position Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Clearing Filter... Opens the Clearing Filter window Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Margined Position Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Act Exchange ID Member ID for Clearing Member Member ID for Exchange Member Account type

307 Window Layouts and s Page 307 Margined Position Overview Table Column Curr Contract OpenLong ExerAllocLong OpenShort AssignNotifShort NetPos Currency Contract Open long positions Exercised or allocated long positions Open short positions Assigned or notified short positions Net positions followed by net position flag Margined Position Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Futures: Product Expiration month and year Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month Year Strike price Version number Margined Position Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Margined Position Overview - Message Log window.

308 Window Layouts and s Page Guarantee Overview The Guarantee Overview window displays clearing guarantees pledged by guarantors to the inquiring member. Guarantee Overview window Overview The Guarantee Overview window is accessed via the Risk Mgmt menu and is available for GCMs and DCMs only. When the window is opened, it is empty until Curr and GuarTyp are selected. Guarantees displayed in the Guarantee Overview table are sorted by the currency, guarantee type and guarantee number. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Guarantee Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P

309 Window Layouts and s Page 309 Guarantee Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Opens the Column Selection window Freeze Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreeze All Unfreezes all columns in the table Autofit All Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Guarantee Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr Curr GuarType GuarNo Guarantor BeginDate ExpDate Comment Exchange ID Clearing member Clearing member currency Guarantee type Guarantee number Guarantor of the Clearing Member Date from which the guarantee becomes effective Expiration date of the guarantee Text

310 Window Layouts and s Page 310 Guarantee Overview Table Column GrsAmnt ValuePct Coll Gross amount Value percent Collateral Guarantee Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr D Clearing member * Curr Em Currency * GuarTyp Em Guarantee type (C, F, M or *) * Guarantor Eo Guarantor GrossAmntTotal D Total of gross amount CollTotal D Total of collateral Guarantee Overview Buttons Identifier Inquiry Cancel The guarantees for the selected member or guarantor are shown. Cancels any changes and closes the window Guarantee Overview Message Box Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Guarantee Overview - Message Log window

311 Window Layouts and s Page Risk Monitoring Maintenance [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: The intraday change of risk limits is supported. Column Mod. Amount has been renamed Amount. Overview The Risk Monitoring Maintenance window is accessible from the Risk Mgmt menu. It provides Clearing Members with the facility to stop and release their Non-Clearing Members and supports the maintenance of risk limits. Clearing Members can maintain risk limits for their associated Non-Clearing Members. All members are able to define risk limits for themselves. Clearing Members can trigger a Stop or Release action on their Non-Clearing Members and all members can trigger a Stop Trader action on their traders and their subgroup. In case a trader should be released, all specific trading RALs have to be set manually. The functionality supported by the window is grouped into following tabs: Stop Release Limit Maintenance Event Log If an error occurs, a message is displayed in the message bar Stop Release Tab The Stop/Release tab of the Risk Monitoring Maintenance window provides members with the facility to perform a Stop or Release action. Clearing Members can trigger a Stop action on

312 Window Layouts and s Page 312 their Non-Clearing Members and all members can trigger a Stop action on their traders and their subgroup. For details, see Stop Button. Risk Monitoring Maintenance window - Stop/Release tab Overview To perform a Stop, Stop Trader or Release action, the user selects the row in the table of the window with the details of the Exchange Member on which the action should be performed. Depending on the member status, either the Stop Trader/Stop button only or the Stop Trader/ Stop and Release buttons are enabled. Note: The Release button cannot be used to release a stop triggered automatically by a level 3 limit breach. In order to release an automatic stop, the user needs to release the triggered limit on the Limit Maintenace tab. Clicking the Stop Trader button opens an Approve Stop Trader dialog and a second user has to confirm the action by entering user name and password. Clicking the Stop button opens an Approve Stop dialog and a second user has to confirm the action by entering user name and password. Clicking the Release button opens an Approve Release dialog and a second user has to confirm the release action by entering user name and password. Members are informed immediately about the stop or release action by legal text messages in English and German. The short form of the messages are displayed in the Message Log window and highlighted in red color. Double clicking on a message opens the Message Detail window

313 Window Layouts and s Page 313 with the detailed legal text messages. Non-Clearing Members are informed about the stop or release actions by alerts in the Event Log tab of the window. Message Log window with short form of legal texts message

314 Window Layouts and s Page 314 Message Detail window with legal text messages (German) of Stop action Message Detail window with legal text messages (English) of Stop action

315 Window Layouts and s Page 315 Message Detail window with legal text messages (German) of Release action Message Detail window with legal text messages (English) of Release action On inquiry, the status of all Non-Clearing Members related to the Clearing Member are displayed in the window. The status HALT in the Status column indicates that a Stop action was performed on the member. The Cancel button is always enabled. Clicking the Cancel button closes the window without any further action.

316 Window Layouts and s Page 316 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Stop/Release Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr D Clearing Member * ExchMbr Eo Exchange Member * Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Stop/Release Tab Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Maintenance Stop Trader Stop Release Opens the dialog window for trader/sub-group stop of selected member Performs a Stop action for the selected member Performs a Release action for the selected member Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Stop/Release Tab - Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Stop/Release - Message Log window

317 Window Layouts and s Page 317 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Stop/Release Tab Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Status HaltMS Exchange ID Clearing Member Exchange Member Current status of the member - OK, HALT Member is halted by Eurex - Y[es], N[o] Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Stop/Release Tab Buttons Identifier Stop Trader Stop Release Cancel Opens the dialog window for trader/sub-group stop of selected member Stops the selected member Releases the selected member Closes the window with no further action

318 Window Layouts and s Page Limit Maintenance Tab The Limit Maintenance tab allows the maintenance of risk limits by Clearing Members for their Non-Clearing Members and for all members for themselves. Risk Monitoring Maintenance window - Limit Maintenance tab Overview Four pre-defined types of limits are available, each representing different aggregates of risk values, calculated on Eurex Clearing s near-real-time risk calculation ability: TMR = Total Margin Requirement CULI = Premium Margin + Current Liquidating Margin + Variation Margin + Option Premium CASH = Variation Margin + Option Premium NDM = Additional Margin + Future Spread Margin When setting any such limit, the member will be able to choose from the actions to be taken described below. The Limit Maintenance Tab supports the export and import of risk limits in Excel, CSV and text formats. The window validates imported data in the same way as if it was entered manually.

319 Window Layouts and s Page Action Level 1 - Warning Exceeding a limit on level 1 is reported with a warning message sent by the Eurex system via private member message broadcast. If the limit was set by the member that exceeded it, only that member receives a message. If the limit was set by the clearer, the message is broadcast to both the clearer and the affected member. Furthermore, the exceeded limit is highlighted in the table on the Limit Maintenance tab. Members can optionally specificy that on exchange orders and quotes will be deleted upon a level 1 breach. In addition to the deletion of orders and quotes, the entry of further orders can be restricted to persistent orders only Action Level 2 - Member Slowdown Upon exceeding a limit on level 2, a throttling mechanism is applied to the member in question according to the configured parameters (a minimum delay between add/modify transactions). If a member is throttled for exceeding more than one limit on level 2, the most restrictive transaction delay time is applied to that member. Delete requests and inquiries are not subject to throttling. A level 2 limit breach is reported with a message sent by the Eurex system via private member message broadcast. If the limit was set by the member that exceeded it, only that member receives a message. If the limit was set by the clearing member, the message is broadcast to both the clearing member and the affected member. Furthermore, the exceeded limit is highlighted in the table on the Limit Maintenance tab: Members trying to enter further orders whilst being throttled receive an error message in the order entry windows when an order entry is rejected due to the throttling: Members can optionally specificy that on exchange orders and quotes will be deleted upon a level 2 breach. In addition to the deletion of orders and quotes, the entry of further orders can be restricted to persistent orders only Action Level 3 - Member Stop Upon breach of a level 3 limit, the member is set to HALT immediately and all of the member s on exchange orders and quotes are deleted. Due to the HALT status, the affected member is prevented from: Entering new orders Entering new quotes Clearing functions (i.e. give-up/take-ups, position transfers, etc.) Exceeding a limit on level 3 is reported with a message sent by the Eurex system via private member message broadcast. This message is sent to the member exceeding the limit, the

320 Window Layouts and s Page 320 member s clearer and Eurex Market Supervision. The exceeded limit is highlighted in the table on the Limit Maintenance tab and the stop action is displayed in the Message Log window. If the level 3 limit was set by a General Clearing Member for its Non-Clearing Member, legal messages as per the Stop Button procedure, are sent. If the limit was set by the Non-Clearing Member itself, these messages are not sent. The inquiry and monitoring of private data as well as public market data is not affected by the stop action. It also remains possible to send delete requests. General Clearing Members can not set a level 3 limit for themselves Intraday Change of Settings Intraday changes of risk limit amounts are supported via both the Enhanced Risk Solution 1 interface and the Risk Monitoring Maintenance window. In order to change or set a risk limit, click in the respective field, enter a limit and submit it by pressing the Apply button. Note: Changes initiated via the Enhanced Risk Solution will be overwritten with Eurex limits (i.e. those visible in the Risk Monitoring Maintenance window) the next day. If this is not desired, the respective limit change must also be done via the Risk Monitoring Maintenance window. Changes to risk limit amounts, the Order/Quote Delete and Persistent Orders Only flags, as well as the level 2 delay parameter will have an immediate effect. If a change to the flags or delay parameter affects a limit type that is already triggered, it is necessary to release this limit (type) first for the changes to take effect. Deleting a limit via the Delete button has immediate effect. 1. For more information on the Enhanced Risk Solution, please refer to document X Enhanced Risk Solution Interface Specification, available in the member section of the Eurex website.

321 Window Layouts and s Page Release of a Member The release process is strictly manual and can only be carried out by the member which set the respective limit (or by Market Supervision). It requires four-eye principle confirmation. If several action levels are triggered for one limit type, releasing a trigger causes the automatic release of all action level limits of the same type. The maintenance member may select any triggered limit and press the Release button; whereupon the window requests confirmation that all limits of the selected type be released. Release of individual limits of one type is not possible. Both the Clearing Member s and the Non-Clearing Member s currently triggered limits must be released separately by the respective limit owner. A member set to HALT for exceeding a level 3 limit can only be reactivated through the release process using the Limit Maintenance tab. An attempt to reactivate a member through any other window is rejected with an error message. Furthermore, release processing is triggered automatically following the deletion of a triggered limit. If the release is not successful, the limit is not deleted Manual Member Slowdown Similar to the possibility of stopping a member manually, it is also possible for a member to use the throttling functionality manually. If activated, all transactions in one product for one member are delayed by the defined time. This function is available if the following conditions apply: The member to be slowed down has at least one level 2 limit defined by the member that is triggering the manual slowdown. If several different level 2 limit types are defined for the member, the most restrictive time delay value is used. The member to be slowed down is not stopped or being slowed down already. If these conditions are not fulfilled, the manual slowdown is rejected with an error message. For the manual member slowdown, the optional order/quote deletion is ignored, i.e. no orders/ quotes are deleted. The manual member slowdown requires confirmation by a second user following the Four-Eye- Principle. The release from a manual slowdown follows the same process as for the automated throttling. Note: Due to technical restrictions, a small lag (up to several seconds) may be observed before the matchers will actually start to delay member s transactions after a manual slowdown is requested.

322 Window Layouts and s Page 322 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Limit Maintenance Tab Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Import Full Table Mode Opens a file chooser dialog to select a file for import Activates/deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window Ctrl+I F11 Close Closes this window without any further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns in the table Show All Shows all columns of the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes the selected columns in the table Unfreezes all the columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Maintenance SlowDown Triggers a manual slowdown; requires foureye approval Release Performs a Release action for the selected limit; requires four-eye approval

323 Window Layouts and s Page 323 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Limit Maintenance Tab Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Clear Action Delete Limit Clears the settings of the selected row and reverts them to their previous state. Can only be used before the data was submitted via the Apply button. Deletes the currently selected limit Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Limit Maintenance Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT MtnMbr Em/Eo Maintenance Member AffMbr Em Affected Member * Full/Alert S Toggles table display between all limits and triggered limits Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Limit Maintenance Tab Table Column Exch MtnMbr AffMbr Curr Type Exchange ID Maintenance Member Affected Member Currency Type of Risk Limit: TMR: Total Margin Requirement CULI: Premium Margin + Current Liquidating Margin + Variation Margin CASH: Variation Margin + Option Premium NDM: Additional Margin + Futures Spread Margin Level Risk limit level (1-3) Start of Day Amount Amount effective at the start of current business day, display only.

324 Window Layouts and s Page 324 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Limit Maintenance Tab Table Column Amount Del. Ord./Quot. Allow Pers. Delay Action This field holds the modified amount, changes become effective immediately. Note that this field is empty until first change is done on current business day or if the latest modified amount is equal to the Start of Day Amount. Enter new amount for intraday change and click Apply to submit amount to the Eurex system. Orders and quotes are deleted upon level breach, if checked. Optional for risk Levels 1 and 2, mandatory for Level 3. Restricts the entry of orders after level breach to persitent orders only, if checked. Only available if Del. Ord./Quot. is checked as well. Applicable to risk levels 1 and 2 only. Transaction delay in milliseconds. Applicable to risk level 2 only. Specifies action to be executed when row has been modified. Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Limit Maintenance Tab Buttons Column SlowDown Release Clear Action Delete Limit Apply Cancel Triggers manual slowdown in the selected level 2 limit; requires four-eye approval. Releases the selected triggered limit; requires four-eye approval. Clears the settings of the selected row and reverts them to the previous state. Can only be used before the data was submitted via the Apply button. Deletes the currently selected limit with immediate effect Applies changes in the table. Closes the window with no further action

325 Window Layouts and s Page Event Log Tab The Event Log tab dynamically displays risk alert messages generated for the current business day in chronological order. Risk Monitoring Maintenance window - Event Log tab Overview This tab provides Clearing and Non-Clearing Members with the facility to inquire risk alerts for the current business day. The risk alerts are dynamically displayed. By default the last message is shown on the top line of the listbox. All the own risk limit violations are listed. For Clearing Members the window additionally lists the violations of risk limits of the associated Non-Clearing Members. Moreover, the details of successful modifications of risk limit records are displayed in the table. The Cancel button is always enabled. Clicking it closes the window without further action. Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Event Log Tab Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F

326 Window Layouts and s Page 326 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Event Log Tab Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes this window without any further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Event Log Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr D Clearing Member ExchMbr Eo/D Can be used by Clearing Members to filter the table below. Display only for NCMs. * Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Event Log Tab Table Column Exch ClgMbr ExchMbr Time Event Exchange ID Clearing Member Exchange Member Time at which the event was recorded of the event. Risk limit events are preceded with RSK, Stop Button events by STP, followed by the affected member and the maintance/clearing member e.g. RSK-NCMFR-ABCFR precedes a triggered risk limit event specified by ABCFR for its Non Clearing Member NCMFR.

327 Window Layouts and s Page 327 Risk Monitoring Maintenance - Event Log Tab Buttons Column Cancel Closes the window with no further action Margin Requirement Information The Margin Requirement Information window is accessed via the Risk Mgmt menu and displays the margin requirement information of Non Clearing Members and the total margin requirement of Clearing Members. Margin Requirement Information window Overview The Margin Requirement Information window is available for GCMs and DCMs only. When the window is opened, it is empty until the optional filter fields ExchMbr, Curr and Account are filled. Click the Inquiry icon to display the margin requirement information in the table. The Clearing Member fields, ClgMbrMargReq, ClgMbrCurr, Surp/Shortf and ClgVarPrem are displayed at the bottom of the window. The window is updated by broadcast. Members are not able to inquire for detailed margin requirement information for their CCP only NCMs, that are not known by the Eurex System, via the GUI. However the information regarding these NCMs is broadcast and the total margin requirement of the Clearing Members include these CCP only NCMs margin requirements. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

328 Window Layouts and s Page 328 Margin Requirement Information Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Margin Requirement Information Field Identifier Type CT ExchMbr Em Exchange Member Curr Eo Currency * Act Eo Account type * ClgMbrMargReq D Clearing Member Margin Requirement

329 Window Layouts and s Page 329 Margin Requirement Information Field Identifier Type CT ClgMbrCurr D Clearing Member Currency Surp/Shortf D Surplus/Shortfall ClgVarPrem D Clearing Member Variation Premium Margin Requirement Information Table Column Exch Date Time ExchMbr Curr Act MargReq VarPremPred Exchange ID Date Time of last event Member ID for Exchange Member Currency Account type Margin Requirement Prediction for the variation margin/premium amount Margin Requirement Information Buttons Mouse Usage Inquiry Inquires for margin requirement information on the selected member, currency and account Margin Requirement Information - Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Margin Requirement Information - Message Log window

330 Window Layouts and s Page Cash Daily Cash Transaction Overview The Daily Cash Transaction Overview window shows all cash transactions per currency for those pools for which the submitting member is either ClgMbr or Owner. Daily Cash Transaction Overview window Overview The Daily Cash Transaction Overview window is accessed via the Cash menu and displays cash transactions entered by Market Supervision and transactions for premiums of traditional style regular options traded on the current business day. All transactions due to daily cash movements are displayed on the next business day. The currency is selected via the mandatory entry field above the table. Cash transactions displayed in the Daily Cash Transaction Overview table are sorted by currency, transaction date and transaction ID. Non Clearing Member Functionality: For individually segregated Non Clearing Members, only the transactions from their pool are shown. For Non Clearing Members assigned to the Default or Omnibus pools, no data is shown. Clearing Member Functionality: The possible Pool IDs for the Clearing Member can be selected from the Pool Id drop-down list-box. If the Pool Id drop-down list-box is left empty, the Pool Id is not used as a filter criterion. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar.

331 Window Layouts and s Page 331 Daily Cash Transaction Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Import Full Table Mode Opens the Import Table window to specify a file from which the data is to be imported. Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window Ctrl+I F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Daily Cash Transaction Overview Table Column Exch ClgMbr PoolId Exchange ID Clearing member ID The unique ID of the pool

332 Window Layouts and s Page 332 Daily Cash Transaction Overview Table Column Curr ValueDate TrnId TrnType TrnDat Amount Action Currency code Value date Transaction ID Transaction type Transaction date of the transaction type Cash Amount Action to be performed on this record on apply. Daily Cash Transaction Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT ClgMbr Em Clearing member ID * PoolId Em Pool ID * Curr Em Currency code * Daily Cash Transaction Overview Buttons Identifier Cancel Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Daily Cash Transaction Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Daily Cash Transaction Overview - Message Log window

333 Window Layouts and s Page Info Clearing Board The Clearing Board window is accessed via the Info menu and enables the user to open a variety of clearing windows within a single display. Clearing Board window Overview The Clearing Board window is opened by clicking the Eurex icon at the bottom left of the screen after selecting Info > Clearing Board, as shown in the example above. It allows multiple clearing windows of the Clearing GUI to be opened within it. The windows are opened in panels which the user can open, close, and resize within the Clearing Board. It allows the user to minimize or maximize all the windows contained in the Clearing Board at once, and it is easier to locate a certain window if that window is opened in the Clearing Board. The Clearing Board is initially empty when opened for the first time. Windows can be opened within it by a right mouse click onto an empty panel, which opens a Context Menu that offers a list of windows to choose from (see below for descriptions and list of the windows which can be opened). Windows can also be opened via the menu of the Eurex Button, which is useful when no empty panel is available in the Clearing Board.

334 Window Layouts and s Page 334 New empty panels as placeholders for Clearing GUI windows can be opened either via the menu from the Eurex Button or by grabbing the right or bottom border of the right-most or bottom-most window inside the Clearing Board and by dragging that border leftward or upward. A new empty panel is then created inside of the gap between the old and new position of that border. If no empty panel can be created this way, the Clearing Board is full and other windows inside of it should be closed or minimized to make space for a new one. Windows inside the Clearing Board can also be replaced if you select that window and choose a different window via the Eurex Button menu. Menu Items The menu items of the empty Clearing Board are identical to an empty panel, it only contains the Close and (Help) On this window menu items. When the focus of the Clearing Board is on one of the possible clearing windows, the menu items correspond to the menu items of that window as if it were open outside of the Clearing Board. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes this window without any further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Context Menu The Context Menu is opened with a right mouse click on any empty space in the Clearing Board. The Context Menu shows the available windows, which open into the space from which the Context Menu was opened. The available windows are a subset of the windows available in the Trade Management, Settlement, Collateral, Risk Management, Cash, Info, Member and Security menu items of the Main Menu. Clearing Board Filter The Clearing Board Filter is positioned in the upper right corner of the Clearing Board. An inquiry of a product or contract via the Clearing Board Filter initiates an inquiry for all connected windows. Note that the ExchMbr and ClgMbr fields can also be specified for the connected windows. A connection button is located to the right of the header if a window is opened in the Clearing Board which supports the Clearing Board Filter functionality. A window is by default connected to the Clearing Board. A single click on the connect button removes the connection of the window, the next click reconnects it. Connection button for a connected window. Connection button for a disconnected window. Users who don't use the Clearing Board Filter are able to hide the filter controls by clicking the button on its left. The feature can be activated again by the next click on this button.

335 Window Layouts and s Page 335 The following table is a summary of the windows available in the Context Menu of the Clearing Board. The columns Profile, Product and Contract indicate which selections in the Clearing Board Filter apply to the respective window: Menu Item Trade Management Clearing Window Position Overview Position Detail Overview Position Transfer Overview Give-up Overview Take-up Overview OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing Settlement Exercise Overview Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Exercise Assignment Overview Notification Overview Notification Allocation Summary Overview Allocation Overview Futures Deliverable Position Overview Collateral Collateral Pool Overview Collateral Pool Relations Collateral Pool Status CSD Overview Collateral Account Overview Collateral Status Detail Security Deposit Overview Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Collateral Transaction Overview

336 Window Layouts and s Page 336 Menu Item Risk Mgmt Clearing Window Daily Margin Overview Margined Position Overview Guarantee Overview Risk Monitoring Maintenance Margin Requirement Information Cash Info Daily Cash Transaction Overview Market Supervision Messages Settlement Price Overview Ticker Board Product Statistics Overview Contract Statistics Overview Deliverable Bonds Overview Option Margin Parameter Overview Exchange Rate Overview Contract Mapping Member Member General Information Member Relationship Overview Security PIN Maintenance

337 Window Layouts and s Page 337 Eurex Button Click the Eurex Button to display a pull-down menu consisting of the following three areas: Six Main Menu items with pull-down sub-menus for the available windows. Items for the configuration of the Clearing Board. Items for selecting and managing the configurations of the Clearing Board. Menu Item Trade Management Settlement Collateral Risk Management Cash Info Member Security Add Empty Panel Clear Board Load Configuration Save Configuration Save Configuration As... Delete Configuration Trading Window Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Trade Management Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Settlement Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Collateral Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Risk Management Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Cash Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Info Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Member Move across to open sub-menu of available windows from the Main Menu item Security Opens an empty horizontal panel at the bottom of the Clearing Board Closes all windows in the current session of the Clearing Board, leaving a single empty panel Move across with the cursor from the Configurations item to select one of the saved configurations which are listed in a sub-menu (see below) Saves changes to the current configuration. Opens the Save Configuration window (see below) Opens the Delete Configuration window (see below)

338 Window Layouts and s Page 338 Configuration Management The Save Configuration As window is opened from the Eurex Button. This window allows the user to specify a configuration name which is used to save the current content of the Clearing Board (opened windows, window placement and window settings) into a configuration which is stored into the user profile. Click OK to save the configuration and close the window. Save Configuration window A configuration can be brought up into any Clearing Board session once it has been save via the Load Configurations menu item in the Eurex Button. Move across with the cursor from the Load Configurations item to select one of the saved configuration which are listed in a sub-menu. Modifications can be made to a saved configuration after bringing the configuration to the Clearing Board session. The modifications can be saved by clicking the Save Configuration menu item. Configurations can be deleted by using the Delete Configuration menu item in the Eurex Button. Clicking this item opens the Delete Configuration window, from which the configuration to be deleted can be selected from a pull-down menu. Click OK to delete the selected configuration and close the window. Delete Configuration window The Clear Board menu item from the Eurex Button closes all windows in the current session of the Clearing Board, leaving a single empty panel. The Add Empty Panel menu item from the Eurex Button opens an empty horizontal panel at the bottom of the Clearing Board.

339 Window Layouts and s Page 339 Details on the Functionality of the Clearing Board Windows that are opened from any window inside the Clearing Board (e.g. because of menu actions, double clicks and context menu selections) are created as external windows. The menu bar of the currently active window inside the Clearing Board is displayed at the top left corner of the Clearing Board as if it were the menu bar of the Clearing Board itself, saving a lot of space in the Clearing Board. The title of the Clearing Board changes according to the currently selected window to make clear to which window the menu bar belongs. In this case, the menu bar of the Clearing Board is not accessible via the menu bar, but the same menu options are available via the Eurex Button. Every window inside the Clearing Board can be minimized. A minimized window is removed from the content panel, while the remaining windows are resized in order to fully occupy the free space. The minimized window is then displayed as a button in the bottom window bar next to the Eurex Button. The name of the button carries the window title of the minimized window. If this minimized window button is clicked, the minimized window is restored and the framework tries to position it at the previous location if possible, or at a location that is closest to the previous location. The minimized window button is then removed from the bottom window bar. Every window inside the Clearing Board can be closed. A closed window is removed from the content panel, and the remaining windows are resized in order to fill the freed space.

340 Window Layouts and s Page Market Supervision Messages The Market Supervision Messages window displays Market Supervision messages published by the exchange (for example, new products, delay in trading start, suspension of a product, etc.) Market Supervision Messages window Overview The Market Supervision Messages window is accessed via the Info menu and allows the exchange to publish Market Supervision messages. The window subscribes to the Market Supervision Information broadcast and is automatically updated by broadcast. An upper table in the window displays an overview of the Market Supervision messages already published or scheduled to be published by the exchange (for example, new products, delay in trading start, suspension of a product, etc.).

341 Window Layouts and s Page 341 The Market Supervision Messages window retrieves existing exchange messages and displays them in the table. This table contains the date and time of publication of every message, as well as a short description of the subject. The message selected in the table is expanded in the field group below the table. The entire text of the message is displayed in this lower section. Messages displayed in the Market Supervision Messages table are sorted by date and time. The window displays messages in following cases: For the deletion of non-persistent orders and quotes during the Market Reset event. When a member is stopped from performing trading and clearing activities. When a contract is set to inactive state. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Market Supervision Messages Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Find... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Opens the Find window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5

342 Window Layouts and s Page 342 Market Supervision Messages Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this Window... Opens the Help window F1 Market Supervision Messages Table Column Exch Date Time Subject Exchange ID Date of the message Effective time for publication of the message Short description of the message Market Supervision Messages Field Group Identifier Type CT Date D Date of the message Time D Time of the message displayed in hh:mm:ss format Subject D Short description of the message Market Supervision Messages Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Market Supervision Messages - Message Log window

343 Window Layouts and s Page Settlement Price Overview The Settlement Price Overview window allows the user to view contract settlement prices. Settlement Price Overview window Overview The Settlement Price Overview window is accessed via the Info menu and displays settlement prices of traded contracts for the current trading day for a selected profile, product or contract. The window also supports the entry of daily and final settlement prices for inactive contracts. These prices are displayed once they have been entered by Eurex. Daily and final settlement prices of zero are supported for cash settled futures contracts, with the exception of flexible futures and cascading products. This ensures proper payment of the full contract value as a straight through process in case of worthless expiration (for example, Single Stock Dividend Futures and Hurricane Futures). The Settlement Price Overview window opens with no information in the table if no window settings have previously been saved. In order to select a profile, product or contract, select Filter... from the Select menu (or click the Filter icon on the icon toolbar) to display the Settlement Price Filter window. To specify additional filtering criteria, type in the data in the corresponding mandatory/optional entry fields (mandatory: profile, product or contract, and transaction date; optional: account). Positions from the last four business days are displayed. Eurex is able to enter, update and approve settlement prices in the product states TRAD, FAST and POSTF. For an unapproved settlement price the Approval field shows the value C, whereas for an approved settlement price it shows the value A. For products in product state TRAD or FAST no final bid/ask price is shown. This window is not dynamically updated. The results of the inquiry request fills the table with the settlement prices of the selected contracts.

344 Window Layouts and s Page 344 If a profile is selected, the settlement prices are displayed in the Settlement Price Overview table, sorted as listed in the profile. If a product is listed in the profile, the contracts within this product are sorted in ascending order. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar. Settlement Price Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Returns the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Filter... Opens the Settlement Price Filter window Ctrl+F Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl+F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

345 Window Layouts and s Page 345 Settlement Price Overview Table Column Exch Contract U/L StlPrc StlCode LstPrc LstBid LstAsk TrdDate TrdTime Exchange ID Contract ID: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Futures: Underlying Expiration month and year Underlying ID Settlement price of the contract Code for the type of final price calculation. Options: Options: C: Settlement price of the traded series/contracts E: Settlement closing price of the expired series M: Daily closing price manually entered by Eurex X: Average price from last bid and ask price A: Last ask price B: Last bid price P: Calculated price by option pricing model Futures: C: Settlement price of the traded futures contract E: Settlement price of the expired contract M: Daily Settlement price entered manually by Eurex F: Average price of the last five traded contracts V: Price of the contracts traded in the last five minutes of trading DAX Futures Last traded price Last bid limit of the day Last ask limit of the day Date when the contract was last traded Time when the contract was last traded

346 Window Layouts and s Page 346 Settlement Price Overview Table Column ImpVola U/L ClsPrc FinStlPrc MargClsPrc Approval Implied volatility Underlying close price Final Settlement Price of the product Margin close price Approval Code: A: Settlement price has been approved by Eurex C: Settlement price is not approved by Eurex OpenInt Open interest: total number of open long positions that have not been closed Settlement Price Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Product or contract identification Products: Product ID Contracts: Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Futures: Underlying Expiration month and year * Settlement Price Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Settlement Price Overview - Message Log window

347 Window Layouts and s Page Ticker Board The Ticker Board window displays external trade price information of underlyings and option and futures contracts. Ticker Board window Overview The Ticker Board window is accessed from the Info menu and, if default settings are saved, starts to display trade prices as soon as it is opened and updates the trade price information continuously. Otherwise, external underlyings, contracts or a profile must be selected to start the display. The user can select different profiles to display information related to different underlyings and contracts. To select a(n): Profile: Select the Profile... item on the Select menu to display the Profile Selection window. The selected profile is shown in the window header. Alternatively, right-click the menu bar to display a context menu with all available profiles. Product: Select the Product... item on the Select menu to display the Product Selection window. The selected product is shown in the window header. Contract: Select the Contract... item on the Select menu to display the Contract Selection window.

348 Window Layouts and s Page 348 The selected contract is shown in the window header. If expired contracts are selected, the entire request is rejected. External Underlying: Select the Ext Underlying... item on the Select menu to display the External Underlying Selection window. The selected external underlying is shown in the window header. As soon as a product or a profile is selected, the window displays the trade prices, information on which is highlighted and updated dynamically. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar. Ticker Board Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Contract... Ext Underlying... Opens the Product Selection window Opens the Contract Selection window Opens the External Underlying Selection window

349 Window Layouts and s Page 349 Ticker Board Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Opens the Column Selection window Freeze Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreeze All Unfreezes all columns in the table Autofit All Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this Window... Opens the Help window F1 Ticker Board Table Column Und/Cntr Exch Curr LstPrc NetChg Close Date Time LstAuctPrc Identifier of the underlying, index or contract From which exchange the market information comes Currency of the underlying, index, or contract Last traded price of the underlying, index, or contract Eurex: Option Series: The difference of the last price and the settlement price of the previous trading day (CLstTrdPrc - CPrvStlPrc). Futures Contracts: The difference of the last price and the closing price at the previous trading day. Non-Eurex: Net change between the last trade price and previous closing price. Closing price of the underlying, index or settlement price of contract (for the previous business day) Date of the last trade of the underlying, index, or contract Time of the last trade of the underlying, index, or contract Last auction price of the underlying, index, or contract

350 Window Layouts and s Page 350 Ticker Board Table Column Bid Ask High Low Best bid limit of the underlying, index, or contract Best ask limit of the underlying, index, or contract Daily high price of the underlying, index, or contract Daily low price of the underlying, index, or contract Ticker Board Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Product Statistics Overview - Message Log window Product Selection The Product Selection window allows the user to select a product. Product Selection window

351 Window Layouts and s Page 351 Overview The Product table/column displays all available products. The product is selected from the list or entered in the Product field. All other entry fields are disabled. The Submit and Apply buttons are enabled as soon as a product is selected. Both buttons submit the selected product to the calling window. The Submit button closes the window. The Cancel button is always enabled and closes the window with no further action. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Product Selection Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID C/P D Call/put Product E Product name ExpMth D Expiration month StrkPrc D Strike price Ver D Version number Comb D Combination type 2nd Leg D Second leg Product Selection Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the entries and closes the window Submits the entries leaving this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification

352 Window Layouts and s Page 352 Product Selection Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Product Selection - Message Log window Contract Selection The Contract Selection window allows the user to select a contract. Contract Selection window Overview The Product table/column displays all available products. The product is selected from the table or entered in the Product field. The ExpMth (expiration month) table then displays the available expiration months for the respective contract. If the chosen product is an option, the StrkPrc (strike price) table displays available strike prices after the expiration month is entered. For options, the user selects call or put in the C/P field. The Submit and Apply buttons are enabled as soon as all mandatory fields are filled in the correct format. The selected contract is submitted to the calling window by clicking the Submit or Apply buttons. In the first case, the Contract Selection window is closed, whereas it remains open in the second case. The Cancel button is always enabled and closes the window with no further action.

353 Window Layouts and s Page 353 The Comb and 2ndLeg fields are always disabled. If an error occurs, a message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Contract Selection Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID C/P E Call or put * Product E Product name ExpMth E Expiration month and year StrkPrc E Strike price as defined per product Ver E Version number * Comb D Combination type 2ndLeg D Second leg Contract Selection Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the entries and closes the window Submits the entries and leaves this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Contract Selection Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Contract Selection - Message Log window

354 Window Layouts and s Page External Underlying Selection The External Underlying Selection window allows the user to select an external underlying. External Underlying Selection window Overview The Product table displays all available external underlyings. The user selects the exchange in the Exch field. The external underlying is selected from the table or entered in the Product field. All other entry fields are disabled. The Submit and Apply buttons are enabled as soon as all mandatory fields have been filled in the correct format. The selected exchange and underlying are submitted to the calling window by clicking the: Submit button, closing the External Underlying Selection window, or Apply button, leaving the External Underlying Selection window open. The Cancel button is always enabled and closes the window with no further action. If an error occurs, a message is displayed in the message bar.

355 Window Layouts and s Page 355 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 External Underlying Selection Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch E Exchange ID * C/P D Call or put Product E Product ExpMth D Expiration month StrkPrc D Strike price Ver D Version number * Comb D Combination type 2nd Leg D Second leg External Underlying Selection Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the entries and closes the window Submits the entries and leaves this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification External Underlying Selection Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the External Underlying Selection - Message Log window

356 Window Layouts and s Page Product Statistics Overview The Product Statistics Overview window displays an overview over the market, and price and volume information on each tradable product. Product Statistics Overview window Overview The Product Statistics Overview window is accessed via the Info menu and delivers a brief overview on the derivatives market showing trade amounts for futures and options, with a distinction between call and put options. The window displays all traded products as well as their trading currency and the traded volumes for the current day. For each derivatives market product, the Product Statistics Overview window displays the underlying name with its price, currency and trading exchange. However, information related to OTC Block trades and Block Auction trades with a quantity exceeding a pre-defined limit is not disclosed to the market intraday. When the Product Statistics Overview window opens, the table is sorted by product with their volumes and prices up-to-date. This window is not automatically updated; click the Reload icon to refresh it. If the user needs more information on a specific product, double-click the corresponding row in the table to display the Contract Statistics Overview window showing the traded contracts for the product. The Quick Find field at the right end of the toolbar supports quick search functionality. This field is always enabled and optional. If the user starts to type into the Quick Find field, the table in the window shows only those lines containing the search criteria. If columns are selected before the user starts typing into the Quick Find field, the Quick Find only searches the selected columns for the entered search criteria. In order to indicate which columns are used for the search, these columns are highlighted. The text Filtered in the window name indicates that Quick Find filter is active.

357 Window Layouts and s Page 357 If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Product Statistics Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Opens the Product Selection window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Contract Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

358 Window Layouts and s Page 358 Product Statistics Overview Table Column Exch Product ProdName ProdCurr U/L U/LCurr U/LExch U/LPrc CVol PVol FutVol Exchange ID Product Product name Currency of the product Underlying Currency of the underlying Main exchange place for trade of the underlying Last traded price of the underlying Current call daily volume of this product Current put daily volume of this product Current futures daily volume of this product Product Statistics Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT TotExchVol D Current daily volume of all Eurex products TotFutVol D Current daily volume of all future products TotOptVol D Current daily volume of all options products TotCallVol D Current call daily volume of all products TotPutVol D Current put daily volume of all products Quick Find Eo Supports quick search *

359 Window Layouts and s Page 359 Product Statistics Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Product Statistics Overview - Message Log window Contract Statistics Overview The Contract Statistics Overview window displays a summary of all tradable contracts of the selected product or profile. Contract Statistics Overview window Overview The Contract Statistics Overview window is accessed via the Info menu or by double-clicking a product's row in the Product Statistics Overview window. For any option product selected by the user, the Contract Statistics Overview window displays a broad range of information. For every options contract, it lists the last day's highest price and day s lowest price, trading volume, previous day's trading volume, average volume over the previous five days and open positions on the last trading day for both call and put contract. However, information related to OTC Block trades and Block Auction trades with a quantity exceeding a pre-defined limit is not disclosed to the market intraday. The same set of statistics is also presented for futures contracts, together with the volume of IPS contracts traded.

360 Window Layouts and s Page 360 If the Contract Statistics Overview window is accessed via the: Info menu, the user is asked either to enter the product ID manually into the Product entry field and press Enter, or to select either a product or a profile with the Select menu. Product Statistics Overview window by double-clicking one of its products, it opens and displays all contracts (sorted) related to the selected product in the table. There is no broadcast updating this window automatically once it has been opened. Click the Reload icon to update the contract information. For futures contracts, the information is displayed in the call columns while the put columns remain empty. Contract information displayed in the Contract Statistics Overview table is sorted by contract. If this window is opened without saved settings and no product or profile is selected, the title is Contract Statistics Overview. Select a: Product to display a title of product name and Contract Statistics Overview, for example: FDAX - Contract Statistics Overview. Profile to display a title of profile name and Contract Statistics Overview, for example: My Profile A - Contract Statistics Overview. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Contract Statistics Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Opens the Product Selection window Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl + F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table

361 Window Layouts and s Page 361 Contract Statistics Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Contract Statistics Overview Table Column Exch Contract Curr Cvol CPrc CHPrc CLPrc CIPS CPrevOpIntr CPrevVol C5DayAvgVol TimeToSettl Exchange ID Contract Currency of the product Total volume of the call and futures contracts traded on the current trading day Last traded price of the call and futures contract Day's highest price of the call and futures contract Day's lowest price of the call and futures contract Volume posted from IPS calls Total number of open positions in the call and futures contracts from the previous trading day Total volume of call and futures contracts from the previous trading day Average volume of the call contracts over the previous five trading days, set to blank on the first day of trading Time to maturity of the contract, up to the given expiration day (for futures only), calculated by subtracting the expiration date from the current date

362 Window Layouts and s Page 362 Contract Statistics Overview Table Column Pvol PPrc PHPrc PLPrc PPrevOpIntr PPrevVol P5DayAvgVol PIPS Total volume of the put contracts traded on the current trading day Last traded price of the put contract Day's highest price of the put contract Day's lowest price of the put contract Total number of open positions for the put contract on the previous trading day Total volume of the put contract on the previous trading day Average volume of the put contract over the previous five trading days, set to blank on the first day of trading Volume posted from IPS puts Contract Statistics Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Product Em Product ID Contract Statistics Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Contract Statistics Overview - Message Log window

363 Window Layouts and s Page Collateral Security Information The Collateral Security Information window supports the display of securities details used as collateral. Collateral Security Information window Overview The Collateral Security Information window is accessed via the Info menu and is divided into two parts: The upper part of the window is used to define the security. It displays basic information on the security, such as security type, security name, security expiration date, etc. In the Collateral tab, the lower part of the window displays information on the chosen security regarding its properties as collateral of the clearing house, its market value and the amount recognized as cover value by the clearing house. Action The Collateral Security Information window opens with no information. To retrieve the detailed data of a collateral security, enter the ISIN of a security in the ISIN field then click the Inquiry icon to submit the data. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

364 Window Layouts and s Page 364 Collateral Security Information Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print Window... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Collateral Security Information Fields Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID ISIN Em International Security Identification Number SecTyp D Security type SecID Em Security ID Curr D Currency SecTypName D Security type name, maintained by T030 SecExpDate D Security expiration date SecName D Verbose security name SecLongName D Security long name ManualMaint D Indicates if manually maintained by Market Supervision, no automatic updates are applied if the flag is set. MarkDelete D Indicates if the security is marked for deletion. These securities can not be deposited. It is displayed for members.

365 Window Layouts and s Page 365 Collateral Security Information Fields Identifier Type CT UsedAsColl D Flag indicating if the security can be deposited as collateral DepositAllowed D Indicates if deposit is generally allowed AutoCalcEvalPct D Flag for the automatic calculation of the evaluation percentage Collateral Security Information Buttons Identifier Inquiry Starts inquiry for the entered ISIN Collateral Security Information - Collateral Tab Fields Identifier Type CT Shares/Nominal D Quantity of free floated issued shares, nominal value for bonds FreeForDeposit D Number of shares, portion of nominal value of bonds allowed for deposit EvalPct D Percentage of market value of bonds taken into account as collateral AlertPct D Percent deviation of manually entered vs previous settlement price at which Market Supervision is given notice VarPct D Difference between last and previous day closing price PctAllowed D Maximum percentage of the share/nominal value that can be deposited in total over all members CollClosingPrcAsOf D Date of the last price update Source of the last price update (where 5 = the price as at close of business on the previous business day) CollPrcExch D Code of the exchange PrefPriceSource D Preferred Price Source

366 Window Layouts and s Page 366 Collateral Security Information - Collateral Tab Fields Identifier Type CT CollPrcDcml D Decimals for CollClosingPrc and PrvCollClosingPrc CollClosingPrc D Actual collateral price for evaluation PrvCollClosingPrc D Previous price of collateral evaluation Collateral Security Information Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Collateral Security Information - Message Log window

367 Window Layouts and s Page Deliverable Bonds Overview The Deliverable Bonds Overview window is accessed via the Info menu and displays all deliverable bonds for the selected contracts and the necessary information to calculate the conversion factors of these bonds. Deliverable Bonds Overview window Overview To select a profile, either: Select the Profile... item on the Select menu to display the Profile Selection window. The selected profile is displayed in the window header. Right-click the menu bar to display a context menu with all available profiles. To select a contract, select the Contract item on the Select menu to display the Contract Selection window. The selected contract is displayed in the window header. A specific contract can also be selected using the entry line at the top of the window. Several elements of the Contract (Contract identification) field must be filled. To select a product, populate only the Product field of the entry line. Press Enter to submit the contract or product selection to the system. A specific product can also be selected using the Product... item on the Select menu, which opens the Product Selection window. Only futures can be entered in the contract entry line or in the contract filter. If a profile is applied that contains options and futures, all options are filtered out and are not sent to the back-end. Deliverable bonds displayed in the Deliverable Bonds Overview table are sorted by contract as listed in the profile, which can be set up in the Profile Selection window. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

368 Window Layouts and s Page 368 Deliverable Bonds Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Contract Opens the Product Selection window Opens the Contract Selection window Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

369 Window Layouts and s Page 369 Deliverable Bonds Overview Table Column Exch Contract Curr ISIN SecuName Coupon Maturity LstCoupDate NextCoupDate CFM ConvFact CTD Exchange ID Contract Currency International Security Identification Number Security name Coupon rate Maturity date Last coupon date Next coupon date Conversion factor method Conversion factor Cheapest to deliver Deliverable Bonds Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID: Futures: Product Expiration month and year * Deliverable Bonds Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Deliverable Bonds Overview - Message Log window

370 Window Layouts and s Page Option Margin Parameter Overview The Option Margin Parameter Overview window is accessed via the Info menu and displays option margin parameters used for the calculation of the settlement prices using the Black- Scholes option pricing model and theoretical prices. Overview To select a profile, either: Option Margin Parameter Overview window Select the Profile...item on the Select menu to display the Profile Selection window. Result: The selected profile is displayed in the window header. Right-click the menu bar to display a context menu showing all available profiles. To select a product, either: Select the Product... item on the Select menu to display the Product Selection window. Result: The selected product is displayed in the window header. Use the entry line at the top of the window. The Option Margin Parameter Overview window functions only with options products and stock futures, and the product entry fields only allows the entry of suitable products. The margin parameters displayed in the Option Margin Parameter Overview table are sorted by contract as listed in the profile, which can be set up in the Profile Selection window. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

371 Window Layouts and s Page 371 Option Margin Parameter Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Profile... Opens the Profile Selection window Product... Opens the Product Selection window Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select... Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window Option Margin Parameter Overview Table Column Exch Prod Curr ExpDate U/LPriceOffset Exchange ID Product ID Currency Expiration date Underlying price offset DomRateCall/Futures(%) Domestic, risk-free interest rate for call options

372 Window Layouts and s Page 372 Option Margin Parameter Overview Table Column ForRateCall/Futures(%) DomRatePut(%) ForRatePut(%) Foreign, risk-free interest rate for call options Domestic, risk-free interest rate for put options Foreign, risk-free interest rate for put options Option Margin Parameter Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID * Product E Product identification * Option Margin Parameter Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Option Margin Parameter Overview - Message Log window

373 Window Layouts and s Page Exchange Rate Overview [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: Four new columns have been added to the table of the Exchange Rate Overview window. These columns show the current deposit/withdrawal deadline (CurrDepDdln/ CurrWdlDdln) and the deadlines for the next business day (NxtDepDdln/NxtWdlDdln). The Exchange Rate Overview window displays, for all currencies, the exchange rates, currency haircut factors and decimal shift used by the clearing house. Furthermore, it shows the deadlines for cash collateral deposits and withdrawals. Since changed deadlines only become effective the next business day, there are columns for the current deadlines and colums for modified times. Exchange Rate Overview window Overview The Exchange Rate Overview window is accessed via the Info menu and is available for Clearing Members only. It opens with all information regarding currencies. The exchange rates displayed in this table are from the end of the previous business day and are sorted by currency. The cross currency haircut and the previous day currency haircut parameters are displayed as percentage values with three digits having two decimal places, e.g. 3.45%. For each pair of a currency and a Eurex-currency (that is, for each row in the window table), Market Supervision maintains the cross currency haircut parameter. The Eurex host automatically calculates corresponding credit- and debit related adjusted exchange rates.

374 Window Layouts and s Page 374 These are immediately available. The table shows one row per combination of currency and Eurex-currency. Eurex-currencies are separated by table separators for ease of use. The field and column PermCashAlwd indicate whether the currency is allowed for permanent cash settings by the Members. The Major Currency Unit field in the Exchange Rate Overview window shows the differences between minor and major currencies. It currently displays the Great British pound (GBP) and Great British pence (GBX). If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Exchange Rate Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl+F5 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Freeze Unfreeze All Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Freezes selected columns in the table Unfreezes all columns in the table Resizes all visible columns according to their content. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

375 Window Layouts and s Page 375 Exchange Rate Overview Table Column Exch BaseCurr EurexCurr Curr MjrCurr ExchRate PrevExchRate CurrDepDdln CurrWdlDdln NxtDepDdln NxtWdlDdln PrevExchRate CrsCurrHrctPct AdjExchRatDbt AdjExchRatCrdt PrvCrsCurrHrctPct PrvAdjExchRatDbt Exchange ID Base currency Eurex currency Currency Major currency Exchange rate Previous day exchange rate Current deadline to deposit cash collateral Current deadline to withdraw cash collateral New deadline to deposit cash collateral, valid from the next business day New deadline to withdraw cash collateral, valid from the next business day Previous day exchange rate Cross currency haircut percentage Adjusted debit exchange rate Adjusted credit exchange rate Previous day cross currency haircut percentage Previous day adjusted debit exchange rate PrvAdjExchRatCrdt Previous day adjusted credit exchange rate SettlPeriod CalName ShortText CashColl Settlement period Short calendar name Short currency text Cash collectable currency

376 Window Layouts and s Page 376 Exchange Rate Overview Table Column EurexFlag PermCashAlwd CashLimit Currency accepted by Eurex Determines if permanent cash can be deposited in this currency Defines the maximum cash amount that can be entered for a position transfer with cash amount Exchange Rate Overview Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Exchange Rate Overview [Modified] - Message Log window

377 Window Layouts and s Page Contract Mapping The Contract Mapping window is accessed via the Info menu and allows members to identify which OCC contract ID is mapped to which Eurex contract ID. Contract Mapping window Overview The OCC product and contract ID structure differs from the Eurex ID structure. Therefore, when transactions are received from OCC, OCC product and contract IDs are mapped to Eurex product IDs (and vice versa) to translate the OCC/ISE product/series information into Eurex product/series information. Mapping is also used when instructions are sent from the Eurex System back to OCC. To identify which OCC contract ID is mapped to which Eurex contract ID, enter the profile, contract or product of either and press Enter. That is, to view and/or inquire: A Eurex contract ID, enter the profile, contract or product of its respective OCC contract ID. An OCC contract ID, enter the profile, contract or product of its respective Eurex contract ID. Note: For profile inquiries, only OCC-enabled products are searched. The Quick Find field enables users to rapidly locate particular mappings based on, for example, RootId, TickerSymbol and CFI. The search can even be narrowed down by one or more columns selected prior to the entry of the search criteria.

378 Window Layouts and s Page 378 If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Contract Mapping Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Find Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Refreshes the content of the table Ctrl+F5 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Contract Mapping Table Column Exch Contract ProdName OrigExch RootId CFI Maturity Exchange ID Eurex Contract ID Name of the Product Original Exchange ID OCC/ISE Product Root Symbol Classification of Financial Instruments Maturity Date

379 Window Layouts and s Page 379 Contract Mapping Table Column StrikePrc TrdUnit StrkPrcMult Strike Price Trade Unit of the Contract Strike Price Multiplier of the Contract Contract Mapping Field Group Identifier Type CT QuickFind E Find information quicker than the Find menu item OrigExch D Original Exchange ID Exch D Exchange ID Profile E Profile Name * Contract E Product or Contract ID Products Product ID Contracts Options: Call/put Underlying Expiration month and year Strike price Version number Note: When a Profile is selected, only the products/contracts of the profile can be entered/selected. * Contract Mapping Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Contract Mapping - Message Log window

380 Window Layouts and s Page Member Member General Information The Member General Information window is accessed via the Member menu and displays general information about a member, for example, address and contact information. Member General Information window - Address tab

381 Window Layouts and s Page 381 Member General Information window - Collateral tab

382 Window Layouts and s Page 382 Member General Information window - Give-up tab

383 Window Layouts and s Page 383 Member General Information window - Cooperations tab Overview To select a member, enter the member ID (mandatory) and press Enter to populate the window with the corresponding general information. Every member is able to view specific, non-sensitive information about any other member. Detailed information such as address, CSD and give-up information is grouped using tabs. The Cooperations tab is used to indicate how members participate in the Eurex/ISE link. If the member s: ISETradingAllowed field is checked, they are able to trade on the ISE, and their maximum order quantity at Eurex can be greater than zero. OCCClearingAllowed field is checked, they are able to clear their, and their Non Clearing Member s, link-related positions at Eurex. NCMs will only be able to trade on the ISE if their ISETradingAllowed and their GCM s OCCClearingAllowed flags are checked.

384 Window Layouts and s Page 384 If an error occurs, an error message is displayed in the message bar. Member General Information Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Print Window... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Member General Information Field Group Identifier Type CT MemberId Em Member ID * MemberName D Descriptive name of the member institution Curr D Currency ClgMbrTyp D Clearing member type ClgHouse D Indicates the member s Home Clearing House; for NCMS the ClgHouse of their CM is displayed. E: Eurex Clearing AG X: EEX U: EUROLINK (CCORP) ExchAffl D Exchange affiliation indicator: : Eurex member E: EEX member H: HEX member N: No exchange affiliation Member General Information - Address Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT Department D Responsible department Street D Street address PostCode D Postal code address

385 Window Layouts and s Page 385 Member General Information - Address Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT City D City address Country D Country AWVCountry D Country code according to Außenwirtschaftsverordnung ClgContacts D Name of clearing contact persons Phone/Fax D Phone/Fax number of contact Phone/Fax D Phone/Fax number of contact Member General Information - Collateral Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT CompCapAmnt D Company Capital of the member. CompCapCurr D The currency of CompCapAmnt. CompCapDate D Date WithdrSTPCompCap Cb Collateral Withdrawal Straight Thru Processing. If checked, no confirmation by Market Supervision is required for collateral security withdrawals for usage Company Capital. WithdrSTPClgFund Cb Collateral Withdrawal Straight Thru Processing If checked, no confirmation by Market Supervision is required for collateral security withdrawals for usage Clearing Fund. WithdrSTPMarg Cb Collateral Withdrawal Straight Thru Processing. If checked, no confirmation by Market Supervision is required for collateral security withdrawals for usage Margin. Member General Information - Give-up Field Group Identifier Type CT GUContacts D Give-up contact Phone/Fax D Phone/Fax number

386 Window Layouts and s Page 386 Member General Information - Cooperations Checkboxes Identifier Type ISETradingAllowed D Members can trade on the ISE and their maximum order quantity at Eurex can be greater than zero. OCCClearingAllowed D Members can clear their, and their Non Clearing Member s, link-related positions at Eurex. Member General Information Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Submits the information and closes the window Applies the information and leaves the window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Member General Information Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Member General Information - Message Log window

387 Window Layouts and s Page Member Relationship Overview The Member Relationship Overview window is accessed via the Member menu and displays which Clearing Member Non Clearing Members have a clearing agreement with. For Clearing Members, all relations to their NCMs are displayed. This window also allows the Clearing Member to specify if give-up or take-up transactions performed by a member are automatically accepted or not. Member Relationship Overview window Overview There may be more than one clearing relationship, for example, following a Clearing Member change. The primary Clearing Member is marked in the column PrimClgMbr. GCMs can use the window to review their NCMs. The information is sorted by member. The Status column in the window table indicates the status of a member. This column is available only for Clearing Members. To change the defined settings for the automatic acceptance of give-up or take-up, the row of the table must be selected by left-clicking. This activates the AutoAccept field group with the settings of the GUAutoAccept and TUAutoAccept table elements of the selected member, where Y is indicated by a selected checkbox, N is indicated by an empty checkbox. Click Update to save the set values in the table. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar.

388 Window Layouts and s Page 388 Member Relationship Overview Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Print... Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Columns Hide Hides the selected columns from the table Show All Shows all the columns in the table Ctrl+U Select Autofit All Opens the Column Selection window Resizes all visible columns according to their content Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Member Relationship Overview Table Column Exch MbrId PrimClgMbr Stat LstUpd GUAutoAccept Exchange ID Exchange member ID Primary Clearing Member Status of the relationship Last update Automatic give-up acceptance

389 Window Layouts and s Page 389 Member Relationship Overview Table Column TUAutoAccept NxtDayGUAutoAccept NxtDayTUAutoAccept Automatic take-up acceptance Automatic give-up acceptance for the next day Automatic take-up acceptance for the next day Member Relationship Overview Field Group Identifier Type CT NxtDayGUAutoAccept Cb Next day give-up auto accept NxtDayTUAutoAccept Cb Next day take-up auto accept Member Relationship Overview Buttons Identifier Update Submit Apply Cancel Update the selected member relationship in the table with the values of checkbox. Submits all changed values of the give-up and take-up acceptance to the system, and closes the window. Applies all changed values of the give-up and take-up acceptance to the system, and leaves this window open. Closes the window with no further action. Member Relationship Overview Message Box Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Member Relationship Overview - Message Log window

390 Window Layouts and s Page Settings Profile Selection The Profile Selection window is accessed either via the Settings menu or an Overview window and allows the user to select a profile to use for clearing and in overview windows. The user can also modify or delete an existing profile, as well as to create a new one. Profile Selection window with Standard Profiles accessed via the Settings menu

391 Window Layouts and s Page 391 Profile Selection window with Standard Profiles accessed via an Overview window Overview To configure a new profile, click the Add... or Add Using... button. The: Add... button is always enabled and opens the Profile Maintenance window. Add Using... button is enabled as soon as there is at least one existing profile in the table, and one profile has been selected. It opens the Profile Maintenance window, pre-populated with the values from the highlighted profile. A selected profile may be set to default using the Set to Default button. The values of the default profile are displayed in the context menu for single product fields or the product field in the contract entry fields in any window. To set a profile to be the default, click a profile in the profile table, and then click the Set to Default button. The default profile is then displayed in the Default Profile display box, and a confirmation message appears in the message bar. When the default profile is changed while another window is open, the new default profile is not applied to the context menus of the open window. The window must be closed and reopened to include the new default profile in the context menus. Selected profiles may be deleted using the Delete button. To delete one or more profiles, the user must select the profiles and then click the Delete button. To ensure profiles are not included in context menus, set them to hidden by clicking the Hide button. Hidden profiles can be identified in the profile table by their plain, gray font. To include hidden profiles in the context menus again, click the Unhide button. Visible profiles are identified in the profile table by their bold font.

392 Window Layouts and s Page 392 Note that pre-defined, and hence unchangeable, profiles are set to italic. User-defined profiles are not. The Submit and Apply buttons are visible and enabled if the Profile Selection window is opened from an overview window and a profile is selected. The Cancel button is visible and applied if the window is opened via an overview window and a profile is selected or not. Click the: Submit button (or double-click a profile) to submit the profile selection to the calling window and close the Profile Selection window. Apply button to submit the profile selection to the calling window and leave the Profile Selection window open. Cancel button to close the window with no further action. If the ALL UCTS profile, which is set up by the application and contains all currently listed products, is selected, the Modify... and Delete buttons are disabled. In order to improve support of OCC-Link traded products, a default profile, OCC UCTS, contains all OCC-Link tradable products. Note that none of the OCC UCTS will be in other default profiles, such as ALL UCTS or OPTION ON STOCK. The profile EUREX UCTS = ALL UCTS - OCC UCTS - EEX UCTS. The table displays all the existing profiles for a user. As set of pre-defined profiles, examples shown in the table, are displayed. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Short-cut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Profile Set to Default Takes the selected profile as the default profile Add... Add Using... Modify... Delete Hide Unhide Opens the Profile Maintenance window to enter a new profile Opens the Profile Maintenance window to enter a new profile using details from another selected profile Opens the Profile Maintenance window to modify the selected profile Deletes the selected profile Hides the selected profile so it is not included in context menus Includes hidden profiles in the context menus Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1

393 Window Layouts and s Page 393 Profile Selection Table Column Profile Existing/defined profiles Profile Selection Field Group Identifier Type Default Profile D Default profile Profile Selection Buttons Identifier Set to Default Add... Add Using... Modify... Delete Hide Unhide Submit Apply Cancel Takes the selected profile as the default profile Opens the Profile Maintenance window to enter a new profile Opens the Profile Maintenance window to enter a new profile using details from another selected profile Opens the Profile Maintenance window to modify the selected profile Deletes the selected profile Hides the selected profile so it is not included in context menus Includes hidden profiles in the context menus Submits any changes and closes the window Applies any changes and leaves the window open Cancels any changes and closes the window Profile Selection Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Profile Selection - Message Log window

394 Window Layouts and s Page Profile Maintenance The Profile Maintenance window is accessed via the Profile Selection window and allows the user to define a profile containing a set of contracts, products and/or external underlyings. Profile Maintenance window - Profile tab Profile Maintenance window - Product tab

395 Window Layouts and s Page 395 Profile Maintenance window - Contract tab Profile Maintenance window - External Underlying tab Overview The Profile Maintenance window is divided into two sections: The: Left-hand side shows all the items the user can choose from. Right-hand side shows the currently selected profile. In order to create a new profile when opened with Add... or Add Using... in the Profile Selection window, enter a name for the profile in the Profile entry field. The name must be different from all other used profile names. If opened by clicking Modify... in the Profile Selection window, the profile name is already displayed.

396 Window Layouts and s Page 396 The user can choose items from another existing profile using the Profiles tab, selecting the profile from the list at the top of the tab. To: Add all items of the selected profile to the edited profile, click Insert All. Add one or more of the items in a profile, select the items in the list at the bottom of the tab and click Insert. Add a product, select the Product tab then either select the desired product from the list or input the name in the Product entry field. To add the selected product, click Insert. Add a contract, either: Select the Contract tab then select a contract in the same manner as described in the Contract Selection window. Click Insert to add the selected contract. Or specify a contract using the Product/Contract field, then click Add to add the specified contract. Two expiration month aliases - FRONT and BACK - are available for futures contracts in the ExpMth entry field of the Contract Selection tab of the Profile Maintenance window. These aliases are always locked to the current front-month contracts of a futures contract series; the FRONT alias represents the first front-month, and the BACK alias represents the second frontmonth. This has the advantage that if a user is interested in the first or second front-month contract, he can be sure of seeing that information no matter whether the contract has expired at the time an inquiry is started or not, and he does not need to update his profiles at each expiration date. The Profile Maintenance window allows the user to add both a contract with an expiration month alias and the real contract that it stands for into the same profile. The system monitors contracts and updates the front-month aliases in the case of intraday expiration. If a user starts an inquiry using an alias just as that alias expires, he is informed via the status bar of the affected window and must re-inquire to get the desired information. To directly add an external underlying, the user selects the Ext U/L tab and either selects the desired underlying from the list, or inputs the name in the U/L entry field. To add the selected underlying, the click the Insert button. One or several items may be removed from the edited profile using the Remove button. To remove one or more rows, select the rows and click the Remove button. The entire content of the profile is removed upon clicking the Remove All button. The Profile table may be grouped logically using the Insert Separator button ( ) or the corresponding menu item. Selecting a row in the table and clicking the Insert Separator button inserts a shaded empty line in the Profile table. The user may save the changes to the edited profile by clicking Save Profile. If the Add... button in the Profile Selection window opening this window is used, the Profile entry field and the table on the right of the Profile Maintenance window would be empty. If clicking the Add Using... button in the Profile Selection window opens this window, the Profile entry field would be empty and the table of the Profile Maintenance window would be prepopulated with the values from the respective profile from the Profile Selection window.

397 Window Layouts and s Page 397 If clicking the Modify... button in the Profile Selection window opened this window, the Profile entry field shows the name, and the table of the Profile Maintenance window is pre-populated with the values from the respective profile in the Profile Selection window. As soon as a contract, product or external underlying is added, the new item is displayed in the table on the right. As soon as a contract, product or external underlying is removed, the item is not displayed in the table on the right anymore. Items can be rearranged by clicking the first cell of a row and dragging it to another position. This order is used for sorting the content in overview windows. All functions accomplished with the buttons can also be done from the menus. If an error occurs, an exception message is displayed in the message bar. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Maintenance Insert Insert All Remove Remove All Insert Separator Save Profile Adds all selected items to the currently edited profile Adds all template profile items to the current profile Removes all selected items from the current profile Removes all items from the currently edited profile Adds a separator line Saves the currently edited profile Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Profile Maintenance Profile Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT Profile D/E Name of the profile * Profile Maintenance Profile Tab Table Column Exch C/P Product Exchange ID Call or put Product

398 Window Layouts and s Page 398 Profile Maintenance Profile Tab Table Column ExpMth StrkPrc Ver Comb 2nd leg ISIN Expiration month Strike price Version number Combination type 2nd leg International Security Identification Number Profile Maintenance Product Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID C/P D Call or put Product E Product ExpMth D Expiration month StkPrc D Strike price Ver D Version number Comb D Combination type 2ndLeg D Second leg Profile Maintenance Contract Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID C/P E Call or put * Product E Product ExpMth E Expiration month StkPrc E Strike price

399 Window Layouts and s Page 399 Profile Maintenance Contract Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT Ver E Version number * Comb E Combination type * 2ndLeg E Second leg Profile Maintenance Ext U/L Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch E Exchange ID * C/P D Call or put Product E Product ExpMth D Expiration month StkPrc D Strike price Ver D Version number Comb D Combination type 2ndLeg D Second leg Profile Maintenance Profile Tab Field Group Identifier Type CT Profile D/E Name of the profile * Profile Maintenance Profile Table Column Exch C/P Product ExpMth Exchange ID Call or put Product Expiration month

400 Window Layouts and s Page 400 Profile Maintenance Profile Table Column StrkPrc Ver Comb 2nd leg ISIN Strike price Version number Combination type Second leg International Security Identification Number Profile Maintenance Buttons Identifier Insert Insert All Remove Remove All Adds all selected items to the currently edited profile Adds all items of a template profile to the currently edited profile Removes all selected items from the currently edited profile Removes all items from the currently edited profile Adds a separator line Save Profile Add Saves the currently edited profile Opens the Profile Maintenance window to enter a new profile Profile Maintenance Profile/Contract Field Group Identifier Type CT Exch E Exchange ID Contract E Contract ID Profile Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Profile Maintenance - Message Log window

401 Window Layouts and s Page Preferences The Preferences window is accessed from the Settings menu and covers the following configuration functionality in separate tabs: The General tab The Text Field tab The Member tab To apply the changes made to the different panes, click the OK or the Apply buttons. Click: OK to apply the changes and close the Preferences window. Apply to apply the changes and leave the Preferences window open. Some of the changes performed in the Preferences window are not visible in application windows until closing and opening them again. The OK and Apply buttons are enabled on making changes to the window. The Reset and Cancel buttons are always enabled. Click: Reset to retrieve the default values for the entire tab currently opened. Cancel to close the window with no further action. If an error occurs, a message is displayed in the message bar. Preferences Buttons Identifier OK Apply Reset Cancel Submits the selected settings and closes the window Applies the selected settings and leaves this window open Resets the settings to the default state Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Preferences Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Preferences - Message Log window

402 Window Layouts and s Page General The General tab of the Preferences window allows the user to configure colors, fonts as well as number/date formats which are to be used in the application. Preferences window - General tab Overview The General tab of the Preferences window is accessed via selecting the respective item of the Main window s Settings menu. The General tab allows the user to configure colors, fonts as well as number/date formats which are to be used in the application. Furthermore, the rounding facility, the display size of context menus, the table row contrast and the advanced text field completion can be configured here.

403 Window Layouts and s Page 403 The General tab contains the following panes: Colors pane: This is used to select the colors to be used in the application Fonts pane: Used to define font, style and font size used in tables Number/Date Format pane: Used to define the date and number formats Text Field pane: Used to set text fields as mandatory or for advanced completion with predictive text entry. Misc pane: Used to configure various settings, such as the activation of the Text Field Auto Completion feature. The different panes of this tab can be expanded by clicking the + button next to the header of the pane. Clicking the - button contracts the panes. The lower part of the tab has a table to provide a preview of the settings chosen in the above mentioned panes. Colors The Colors pane is used to select the application colors. Colors can be defined for the foreground, the color of any regular text and the background color of all windows. Further, colors may be chosen for the price trend indicators, i.e. separate colors for Price Up and Price Down movements can be configured. In windows showing current price information, separate colors for Price Up and Price Down movements allows increasing and decreasing prices to be displayed with different colors. Finally, the color used to highlight the window cells that are automatically updated with new information can be changed here. Colors are changed by clicking the cell displaying the color which is currently chosen. A context menu is displayed offering a set of default colors. If the user wishes to change the color to a color not listed in the context menu, he may do so by clicking the item More Colors at the bottom of the context menu. This brings up the Color Chooser window from which many different colors may be chosen. For a detailed description of the Color Chooser pane please refer to the description of the Color Chooser window. Fonts The Fonts pane allows the user to choose the font, the font style and the font size for tables. The fonts of buttons, titles and other window elements can also be changed: such a change is effective after a restart of the GUI. To select a font, the user needs to click the column cell next to the item he wishes to change the font for, e.g. Column Header. This action opens the Font Chooser context menu. For detailed information on how the Font Chooser context menu works, please refer to the description of the Font Chooser context menu. Number/Date Format The Date/Number pane provides the ability to switch between the American and the European style for date and number formats. Using the Date/Number pane allows the settings for the date and number display and entry to be configured. The user can either choose the American or European format for date and number display and entry. Selecting the European style for the date format displays all dates in the DD.MM.YYYY format. American style provides the dates in the MM/DD/YYYY format. The chosen format applies for the entry of the dates as well.

404 Window Layouts and s Page 404 For numbers, either European X.XXX,XX or American X,XXX.XX style formats can be chosen. The use of a thousands separator is optional, and can be activated by selecting the table Enable Thousand Separator. Text Field The Text Field pane shows the Advanced Text Field Completion mechanism. Click the checkbox to enable this functionality. Misc The Misc pane allows the user to define the maximum number of items shown in a context menu and the Table Row Contrast using a slider. Click the... button in the appropriate row of the Misc pane to activate the required functionality. Furthermore, select the: Show Table Grid checkbox to show/hide grid lines on all Clearing GUI tables. Reset All Optional Confirmation Dialogs to display a Confirmation warning message when a Close Out is about to be processed on the OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing window. Preferences General Colors Pane Field Group Identifier Type CT Foreground E Foreground color Background E Background color Price Up E Color for an increased price, compared to the previous price Price Down E Color for a decreased price, compared to the previous price Highlight E Color for highlighting Selection E Color for selected items in a table. Table Background E Background color for selected items in a table Preferences General Fonts Pane Identifier Type CT Table Column Header E Chosen font for column headers Table Cell E Chosen font for cells in a table Application Font E Chosen font for window elements (buttons, titles, etc.)

405 Window Layouts and s Page 405 Preferences General Number/Date Pane Identifier Type CT Date Format E Date format to be used. Possible values are: American: MM/DD/YYY European: DD.MM.YYYY Enable Thousand Separator E Check this checkbox to enable thousand separators Number Style E Number style to be used. Possible values are: American European Preferences General Misc Pane Identifier Type CT Context Menu E Maximum number of items displayed in tables of the Clearing GUI or Trading GUI. Table Row Contrast Advanced Text Field Completion E E Sliding the gauge from min to max decreases or increases the contrast of the shading in the tables throughout the Clearing or Trading GUI. Activation of the Advanced Text Field Completion mechanism is possible here. Show Table Grid E Table grid lines display property can be set here. Preferences General Preview Table Identifier Preview The preview table allows the user to see the settings that are currently selected. It shows what the table contrast looks like as the contrast slide bar is used.

406 Window Layouts and s Page Choose a Color The Choose a Color window allows the user to select the color to be used in the calling window or the calling context menu. For a detailed description of items for which colors can be configured, refer to the description of the General tab of the Preferences window. Choose a Color window Swatches

407 Window Layouts and s Page 407 Choose a Color window - HSB Choose a Color window - RGB

408 Window Layouts and s Page 408 Overview There are three color methods available: Swatches: Direct selection of a color HSB: Hue, Saturation and Brightness RGB: Red-Green-Blue When the desired color method is selected, the available colors are displayed. The OK button applies the selected color to the Colors context menu and closes the window. The Reset button resets the chosen color in the Color Chooser window to the color which was selected when the Color Chooser window was opened. The Cancel button closes the window with no further action. Color Chooser Buttons Identifier OK Cancel Reset Submits the selected color to the calling window and closes the window Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Resets the color selection in the Color Chooser window Font Chooser The Font Chooser allows the user to select a font, style and size to be used in tables of the application. Refer to the description of the General tab of the Preferences window for details. Font Chooser Overview The Font Chooser allows the user to select font, style and size to be used in tables of the application, for example, the Position Overview window. The font is selected by clicking the table and choosing the desired font. The font size may be chosen by either entering the desired font size in the entry field next to the font table or using the up and down buttons of the entry field. Finally the user may choose to format the text in bold or italic type face. This is done by selecting the respective selection fields. A preview is always shown in the Sample area.

409 Window Layouts and s Page 409 Identifier Type CT Font E Table listing available fonts. Size E Entry field to choose font size. Bold E Selection fields to choose typeface to be formatted bold. Italic E Selection fields to choose typeface to be formatted italic. Sample D Display only field giving a preview of the selected type properties Text Field The Text Field tab of the Preferences window allows the user to predefine the Text, Customer, MIOrdNo, Act (Account type), O/C (open/close indicator), TuMbr (Member) and TInd fields. Preferences window - Text Field tab Overview Click to the right on the Text, Customer or MIOrdNo fields of some windows to display a context menu with the data entered in the respective field of the Text Field tab. If one item of that context menu is selected, all data from the fields linked to it, i.e. Customer, Act and TUMbr, are entered in the respective fields of the windows. To create a new text field configuration entry, populate the Text field and clicks the Add... button. The other fields are optional. The Add... button is enabled as soon as information is entered in the Text field. After clicking the Add... button, the entry fields are cleared and the data is displayed at the top of the table.

410 Window Layouts and s Page 410 To create a new configuration entry based on an existing configuration, select the text field configuration from the table by clicking the respective row. The entries can be changed. As soon as at least one character in the Text field is changed, the Add... button is enabled. After clicking the Add button, the entry fields are cleared and the data is displayed at the top of the table. To: Modify An Existing Text Field Configuration Entry: Select the entry to be modified by clicking the respective row in the table. The entries can then be changed in the entry fields. The Update button is enabled as soon as at least one character of the Text field is changed. Click Update to clear the entry fields and update the selected table entry. Remove A Text Field Configuration: Select the entries to be removed by clicking the respective rows in the table. The Remove button is enabled when one or more rows are selected. Click Remove to remove the selected rows from the table. The text entries in the table can be sorted in ascending or descending order, based on the Text field, via the Sort menu. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F 4 Text Add Adds a new row to the table Update Remove Updates changes in the selected row in the table Removes selected rows from the table Sort Ascending Sorts the entries in the table in ascending order, based on Text Descending Sorts the entries in the table in descending order, based on Text Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Preferences Text Field - Table Column Exch Text Customer Exchange ID Text entry field for customer information Customer details

411 Window Layouts and s Page 411 Preferences Text Field - Table Column MlOrdNo Act O/C TUMbr TInd Member internal order number Account type Open/close indicator Clearing member which must take-up the trade Order transfer attribute Identifier Type CT Exch E Exchange ID Text E Text entry field Customer E Customer details MlOrdNo E Member internal order number Act E Account type: A1 - A9: Agent Accounts G1: Pre-designated Give-up Account G2: Designated Give-up Account M1, M2: Market Maker Accounts P1, P2: Proprietary Accounts * O/C E Open/close indicator * TUMbr E Clearing member which must take-up the trade * TInd E Order transfer attribute * Preferences Text Field - Buttons Identifier Add Update Remove Adds a new text or customer account entry to the table Modifies the text or customer account data for a selected row entry and updates the table with the changed data Removes selected rows

412 Window Layouts and s Page Member The Member tab of the Preferences window allows the user to pre-define the member entry fields. Preferences window - Member tab Overview The data entered in the Member tab is used to populate the context menus for Member fields (i.e. the ClgMbr and the ExchMbr fields) in various windows. Right-click the Member field of these windows to display a context menu with the members selected in the Member window. The table on the left shows the existing members and the long name that can be selected. The Insert button is disabled until one or more members are selected. Click: Insert to move the selected members from the table on the left to the table on the right. Remove after selecting one or more members in the table on the right to remove the selected members from that table. When a single member entry is selected, it appears in the ExchMbr field, which may also be filled using the keyboard.

413 Window Layouts and s Page 413 Double-click an entry in the table on the: Left to move the selected member to the table on the right. Right to remove that entry from the list. Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Member Insert Moves one or more selected members from the table on the left to the table on the right Remove Removes one or more selected members from the table on the right Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Preferences Member - Table Column ExchMbr LongName Exchange member Long name of the Exchange Member Preferences Member - Table Mouse Usage Mouse Usage Column SC-L Any Displays the selected member of the table in the entry fields DC-L Any In the table on the left (Existing Members) this adds the selected entry to the table on the right (Selected Members) DC-L Any In the table on the right (Selected Members) this removes the selected entry Preferences Member - Field Group Identifier Type CT ExchMbr E Exchange member

414 Window Layouts and s Page 414 Preferences Member - Buttons Identifier Insert Remove Inserts one or more members in the table on the right Removes one or more members from the table on the right Change Password The Change Password window is accessed via the Settings menu and allows the user to change the Eurex System login password. Change Password window Overview This window allows the user to change the login password. Members must modify the default password during their first login to the Eurex System. The Change Password window is displayed prompting the member to modify the password on the first login. The new password selected must be of 8 characters and cannot contain spaces. It is not possible to reuse the default password. To modify the password, enter the old password followed by the new one twice. The Submit button remains disabled until all fields are properly filled. The password is not changed until the Submit button is clicked. The Cancel button is always enabled and closes the window with no further action. The system operator provides the user identification and password to the user. If the change password procedure fails, an error message is displayed in the message bar.

415 Window Layouts and s Page 415 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Identifier Type CT Exch D Exchange ID Trader ID D Identification of the user for the specified system 11 alphanumeric characters Old Password E Old password Exactly 8 alphanumeric characters New Password E New password Exactly 8 alphanumeric characters Confirmation E Confirmation of the new password Exactly 8 alphanumeric characters Change Password Buttons Identifier Submit Apply Cancel Changes the password and closes the window Changes the password and leaves this window open Cancels any changes and closes the window with no modification Change Password Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Change Password - Message Log window

416 Window Layouts and s Page Security Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] New for Eurex Release 14.0: The MaxWhsQty field no longer represents the maximum wholesale quantity but the maximum risk amount The Product Assignment Maintenance window is accessed via the Security menu and is used to set up product group/product assignments/de-assignments for members, group of traders or trader sub-groups. Clearing Members are able to define the member maximum order quantities for members, traders and trader sub-groups. Non Clearing Members can set quantities for their traders and trader subgroups. Product Assignment Maintenance window Overview The Product Assignment Maintenance window is used to assign Product Groups and individual products and to define the maximum order quantity for members, traders and trader sub-groups. It supports the change of maximum order quantity as well as the assignment and de-assignment of product groups and products also on trader sub-group level. Click the +/- button group to expand or collapse all the displayed groups of the Product Assignment Maintenance window. On inquiry, the tree on the left side of the window displays the sub-groups, the individual groups and traders for the logged-in member. If the logged-in member is a Clearing Member, the window additionally displays all NCMs of the member, but not the traders or the sub-groups. The right hand side of the Product Assignment Maintenance window displays the current Product Group/product settings for the selected tree node. While a double click on the root or the group level inquires the settings for all Product Groups/products on member level, a double click on a trader node inquires the settings for the corresponding trader.

417 Window Layouts and s Page 417 Alternatively, the Member and the Product or Group fields at the top of the window can be used to filter for Product Groups or products assigned to a member or for members assigned to a Product Group or a product. Using the fields Group or Product with Member inquires whether the selected Product Group or product is assigned to the chosen member. The Clearer column in the window table displays the Clearing Member of a Product Group for a member. Changes to the clearer are displayed in a from/to style manner using arrows in the window table and are effective from the next business day. The Modifiable column allows members to change the Maximum Order Quantity for their traders. The checkbox under Modifiable column is selected or deselected by Market Supervision. If this checkbox is selected, members are able to change the Maximum Order Quantity of the member product group and the products of the product group. The window supports Find functionality. The Find item in the Window menu and Find icon in the tool bar inquires on the content of the table. However, a lookup on the message contents is not supported by this Find functionality. The window supports the creation and maintenance of individual trader groups. The Add Group sub-menu can be used to add new groups. Once a new group has been created, the user can add traders to this group via drag and drop or remove traders from the group via the Remove Trader functionality. The add and remove functionality is supported for individually defined groups only. The individual trader groups provide a quick overview of the settings of all traders of that group, but modifications are not supported on that level. All individual groups are maintained in the GUI and automatically stored locally in the profile of the security administrator. Eurex has no access to these locally stored profiles. The regular sub-groups are maintained by Eurex. Empty groups are not stored. Note that if a trader is included in two or more individual trader sub-groups, the last executed modification is always valid and overrules all existing entries in all sub-groups (regardless if individual or regular). The Product Group concept supported by the window allows the user to maintain trader product assignments and maximum order quantities on a Product Group level and/or on a level of individual products. If the user maintains product assignments and maximum order quantities on a Product Group level, any new product allocated to one of the Product Groups assigned to a trader, is automatically assigned with the trader's Product Group-specific maximum quantities. If a product moves from a Product Group assigned to a trader to a Product Group not assigned to the trader, it is automatically de-assigned from the trader. Clearing Members can define the member maximum order quantities for their NCMs in the window. There are three maximum quantities: Maximum Order Quantity (MaxOrdQty), transaction quantity limit which applies to regular and strategy orders Maximum Wholesale Quantity (MaxWhsQty), risk amount limit which applies to the maximum Eurex wholesale risk amount. The amount is represented by a multiple of the respective product currency unit. Currently, the multiplying factor is 1,000,000 for products traded in KRW and 1,000 for all the other currencies. Maximum Calendar Spread Quantity (MaxCalSprdQty), transaction quantity limit which applies to future calendar spread combination orders.

418 Window Layouts and s Page 418 Members can also define the MOQs that may be traded by a trader or a group of traders of the member using this window. This group can be either a regular sub-group of the member or an individually defined group. Changes in Product Group/product maintenance can be applied to a member or to an individual trader or to a trader group (i.e. to all the traders that are in the group at the time the user clicks the Apply button). Product Groups/products can be assigned/de-assigned and their maximum quantities modified. All changes become effective by clicking the Apply button. The window supports multiple selection and assignment of Product Groups/products from the group/product table. The Maximum Order Quantity together with the Maximum Wholesale Quantity and the Maximum Calendar Spread Quantity for the selected Product Group/products can be entered through a pop-up. The user can select the single quantities from the context menu or enter them by using the keyboard. A Product Group/product is assigned per default with the same Maximum Order Quantity, Maximum Wholesale Quantity and Maximum Calendar Spread Quantity (futures only) that is valid for the member. If new settings are applied to a trader group, all traders without an assignment in the corresponding Product Group/product(s) result in identical assignments afterwards. All settings of traders that already had an assignment remain unchanged. Assignments displayed in the Product Assignment Maintenance tables are sorted by group name, followed by product ID. For a sub-group, the Asgn and the maximum order quantity columns display double faces and the quantity if all the traders have the same assignment. It displays? if the assignments are different. To disallow a trader from entering regular and strategy orders, wholesale trades or future calendar spreads, the respective maximum quantity can be set to zero. All three maximum quantities are decoupled completely. The maximum limit for on-exchange quantities, wholesale trade quantities and future calendar spreads is 999,999. The maximum quantity can not be greater than the respective quantities assigned to a member. Note: In contrast to the other two quantities, the Maximum Wholesale Quantity is displayed in multiples of the respective product currency unit. Currently, the multiplying factor is 1,000,000 for products traded in KRW and 1,000 for all the other currencies; i.e. the maximum value of 999,999 represents a risk amount of 999,999,000, KRW or 999,999, EUR/ GBP/USD/etc. If a member is not assigned for a product group, the maximum order quantities for the product group itself and for all products in the group are displayed blank in the window. If the trader is not assigned for a product group to which there is a member assignment, the window displays the member maximum order quantities for these product groups and products to the trader.

419 Window Layouts and s Page 419 Product Assignment Maintenance Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the window size and position together with the configuration of the drop-down list-box. Filter settings are not stored. Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Find... Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Import... Opens the Import Table window Ctrl+I Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Refreshes the data in the table. This button becomes a Stop button while long inquiries are performed. Ctrl+F5 Expand Collapse Expands all displayed groups of the Product Assignment Maintenance Collapses all displayed groups of the Product Assignment Maintenance Edit Copy Copies the selection Ctrl+C Paste Pastes the selection Ctrl+V

420 Window Layouts and s Page 420 Product Assignment Maintenance Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Maintenance Assign Assigns selected product(s) to an individual trader or a trader group Modify Modifies the maximum order quantity of selected product(s) for an individual trader or a trader group Deassign De-assigns selected product(s) from an individual trader or a trader group Clear Action Clears unapplied actions Add SubGroup Name of a new group that must be added (group name is limited to 15 characters) Rename SubGroup Renames currently selected group (group name is limited to 15 characters) Delete SubGroup Deletes currently selected group Help On this Window Opens the Help window F1 Product Assignment Maintenance Table Column Asgn Clearer Group Product MaxOrdrQty Displays current assignment level: Building Icon: Product assigned to member Person Icon: Product assigned to trader No Icon: Product not assigned to member Displays the Clearer name for a particular Product Group Displays the Product Group/Product Hierarchy Product ID Long name of the product Maximum Order Quantity

421 Window Layouts and s Page 421 Product Assignment Maintenance Table MaxWhsQty MaxCalSprdQty Modifiable Action Maximum Wholesale Quantity (incl. OTC Flexible Options) displayed as a risk amount in multiples of the respective product currency unit. Currently, the multiplying factor is 1,000,000 for products traded in KRW and 1,000 for all the other currencies. Maximum Calendar Spread Quantity (futures only) Determines whether the Clearing Member are able to change the member's Maximum Order Quantities of the products belonging to the product group. Action which becomes active by clicking the Apply button: Assign De-assign Modify Mouse Usage Row SC-L Any Select one assignment. Product Assignment Maintenance Field Group Identifier Type CT Member Eo Member ID * Group Eo Product Group/Product Hierarchy * Product Eo Product ID * Selection D Inquires a member, member sub-group or a trader Product Assignment Maintenance Buttons Identifier Apply Cancel Inquiry Submits the assignments to the system and leaves the Product Assignment Maintenance window open. Note: This button is only available when at least one product is displayed in the right table. Closes the window with no further action. Inquires for product assignments

422 Window Layouts and s Page 422 Product Assignment Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] - Message Log window Product Assignment Maintenance Import The Product Assignment Maintenance Import window supports the mass import of settings that are manually maintainable via the Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] window. Product Assignment Maintenance - Import window Overview When the window is opened, a file chooser is displayed requesting a file for import. Once selected, the file chooser closes and the filename is displayed in the Bulk Load field. Furthermore, the content of the imported file is displayed in the table of the Product Assignment Maintenance - Import window. In addition to the columns of the imported file, a Status and LineNo column are displayed in the table, detailing the result of the import and the corresponding line number of the imported file. The Product Assignment Maintenance - Import window supports.csv,.xls and.txt files of maximum length 10,000 rows. If the imported file exceeds 10,000 rows, the import process stops and an error message is displayed. Press the Process button again to import the next 10,000 rows, and repeat this process, as required, until all the file is imported. The layout of the imported files must coincide with the layout of files which have been exported from the Product Assignment Maintenance [Modified] window.

423 Window Layouts and s Page 423 Note: Any one imported file can only contain product assignment data on either member or trader level. The import of data on sub-group level is not supported. After the successful import, the data is displayed in the table for review. Lines where import errors occurred are marked in the table with status ERROR. If the row is selected, a detailed error description is displayed in the status bar. Records that passed the syntax validation are displayed with status PASSED. Using the All and Errors radio buttons, the table can be set to display all imported rows or the rows including errors only. The fields Trader, MaxOrdQty, MaxWhsQty, MaxCalSprdQty are optional. If these fields are not populated their value will not be changed during import. The Modifiable flag is not supported. Group and Product are also optional, but at least one of them must be specified. If both are specified, the Group must be the correct product group for the given Product. If Trader is not specified, the settings are applied to the member. If a certain trader should be addressed, the Trader field must be filled in with the complete sub-group and user ID number. Click the Process button to submit rows with the status PASSED to the back-end. If the transmission to the back-end is successful, the respective rows are set to status SUBMITTED. If a Back-End Specific Sub-System or back-end validation fails, the respective row is marked with status ERROR and a red background. A detailed error message is displayed in the status bar if the row is selected. The window can be closed using the Cancel button. If there is still unapplied data, a confirmation dialog is displayed requesting confirmation.

424 Window Layouts and s Page 424 Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort Clear the window settings Opens the Sort Table window Find Opens the Find window Ctrl+F Print Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export... Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Import... Full Table Mode Opens the Import Table window to select a file for import in Excel or CSV format Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window Ctrl+I F11 Cancel Closes the window without any further action Shift+F4 Select Reload Reload the selected file Ctrl+F5 Help On this Window Opens the Help window. F1 Product Assignment Maintenance Import Table Column LineNo Status Member Trader Asgn Line number in the imported file, from which the data of that row was imported. Status of the imported row: PASSED ERROR SUBMITTED Member ID Trader ID of the affected user Assignment state of the member or trader: (space/empty): Not assigned to member. M: Assign to member T: Assign to trader

425 Window Layouts and s Page 425 Product Assignment Maintenance Import Table Group Product MaxOrdQty MaxWhsQty MaxCalSprdQty Action Eurex product group Eurex Product ID Maximum order quantity on-exchange. Note: If this field is left blank, the MaxOrdQty is not changed. Maximum wholesale quantity for OTC business. Note: If this field is left blank, the MaxWhsQty is not changed. Maximum calender spread quantity for futures spreads. Note: If this field is left blank, the MaxCalSprdQty is not changed. Indicates the type of action to be performed: Add Modify Delete Product Assignment Maintenance Import Buttons Identifier Folder Process Cancel Opens the file chooser to select a file. Processes the data. Closes the window with no further action. Product Assignment Maintenance - Import Field Group Identifier Bulk Load All Errors Displays the import file name. Displays all imported rows. Displays only rows with errors. Product Assignment Maintenance Import Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Product Assignment Maintenance Import - Message Log window

426 Window Layouts and s Page User Security Profile Maintenance The User 1 Security Profile Maintenance window allows members to display and maintain the security profiles of users. User Security Profile Maintenance window Overview The User Security Profile Maintenance window is accessed via the Security menu and is used to control the access of users to the exchange s functions. It displays the system functions and the user s current access levels in several tabs. The tabs group the functions by functional areas. A detailed description on the use of the User Security Profile Maintenance window is available in the Eurex User Manual System Security. When the window is opened, the member ID is displayed in the Mbrid field. This field is readonly. The tabs are empty. Only the Cancel button is enabled. The focus is on the TrdId field. 1. For historic reasons the word Trader appears on the window even though the person concerned might be a trader, clearer or supervisor. Traders, clearers, supervisors etc. are collectively referred to as users in the text for this window except when reference is made to a label or associated field name on the window.

427 Window Layouts and s Page 427 Inquire User Access Levels To inquire into a user s access levels, enter a valid user ID in the TrdId field and press Enter. The tabs are populated with the user s access levels. All users are able to inquire their own security profile. Modify User Access Levels To modify a function s access level, it is first selected in the table. The values from the selected row are displayed in the edit line beneath the table. The valid range of values for each access level (0,1 or 0 3) varies from access level to access level. A context-sensitive menu lets the user select from one of the valid values. Click Update to accept the new value. All changes of a user s access levels are submitted to the back-end by clicking Submit or Apply. The system checks to ensure a user does not get a higher access level than Market Supervision has granted the member with whom he is associated. For more information on access levels, refer to the Eurex User Manual System Security. The operation may be cancelled by clicking Cancel. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. The row with the error is highlighted in red. Click the row to display a detailed error message in the status bar. User Security Profile Maintenance Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Print Export Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Print Table window to print all or parts of the table Opens the Export Table window to specify a file to receive the data Ctrl+P Ctrl+E Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this Window Opens the Help window F1

428 Window Layouts and s Page 428 User Security Profile Maintenance Select Field Group Identifier Type CT MbrId D Member ID TrdId Em User whose securities profile should be changed. Reset Password If checked, the user's password is reset. User Security Profile Maintenance Table Identifier Id AccLev Short description of the function RAL position index Resource Access Level. Note: Depending on the access level concerned, valid values are: (0,1), or (0,...,3) User Security Profile Maintenance Edit Field Group Identifier Type CT D Short description of the function Id D New ID (=position index) AccLev E Resource Access Level Note: Depending on the access level concerned, valid values are: (0,1), or (0,...,3) *

429 Window Layouts and s Page 429 User Security Profile Maintenance Buttons Identifier Update Submit Apply Cancel Enters new AccLev data into the table Submits the assignments to the system, and closes the window. This button is only available when the table displays a user's security profile. Submits the assignments to the system, and leaves the window open. This button is only available when the table displays a user's security profile. Closes the window with no further action. User Security Profile Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the User Security Profile Maintenance - Message Log window

430 Window Layouts and s Page PIN Maintenance The PIN Maintenance window is accessed via the Security menu and is used to support the assignment, modification and deletion of traders PINs and administer Eurex s support of trading-on-behalf. PINs are codes used by Eurex to verify the identity of a trader making a request for them to act on their behalf in the event of an emergency or to reverse a trade. This is an optional service offered by Eurex to all members. PIN Maintenance Window Overview The PIN Maintenance window is used to assign, modify and delete a trader s PIN and to administer the available on-behalf support by Eurex. The rights of a trader are displayed in the columns of the table in this window. Move the mouse over the heading of the columns to display a tool-tip with a short description of the relevant column. Depending on the RAL setting, the Trader entry field is either disabled and pre-populated with the trader ID of the logged in trader or editable (for the security coordinator). For more information on the effect of different RAL settings, please refer to the document X Eurex User Manual - System Security. Using the Trader entry field, the member's security coordinator or Market Supervision can inquire upon a single trader or all traders of a member in the PIN Maintenance window. If only the configuration for traders of a certain sub-group should be displayed, it is also possible to enter only the sub-group (as part of the trader ID). If a trader is logged in, his rights are inquired automatically on opening the PIN Maintenance window.

431 Window Layouts and s Page 431 If the PIN Maintenance window is inquired by a security coordinator, the first row in the table always displays the member's PIN and default rights. While a trader can only display his own PIN and rights, the security coordinator can maintain them for all traders of a member. In order to maintain the configuration of multiple traders at once, it is possible to select several traders and modify their settings using the Modify... button and then Apply or Submit to save the change. If there is no PIN assigned to a trader, the member default settings apply. To restrict or extend the rights of a trader, a four-digit PIN must be set. Therefore, the PIN entry field of a trader becomes mandatory if the security coordinator assigns individual rights to the trader by selecting and deselecting the designated checkboxes. Deleting the PIN of a trader automatically resets his rights to the member default. By default, no Member PIN is assigned. This means that all rights to request any trading-onbehalf service of Eurex are given to every trader whose rights have not been configured by the security coordinator. Traders with trader-level rights can request on-behalf services for themselves. If they have subgroup-level rights, they can request on-behalf services for themselves and for all traders within their own sub-group. Traders with member-level rights can request on-behalf services for all the traders of their member. It might be necessary to re-inquire to show the applied changes. Having a PIN Procedure right at member level, automatically includes the same right at subgroup level, and having a right at sub-group level automatically includes the same right at trader level. Consequently, if a right at trader level is unchecked, the same right is automatically unchecked for the sub-group, and if a right at sub-group level is unchecked, the same right is automatically reduced at member level. The security coordinator uses the PIN Maintenance window to maintain the PINs and associated rights for traders. The default PIN and settings in this window can be maintained only by the security coordinators. They can assign PINs to new users, change those of existing users or delete those of users who have left. They can also specify the level at which a trader can act, and specify which trading-on-behalf services traders can access. Traders can use the PIN Maintenance window to perform an inquiry to see their rights to request trading-on-behalf services. Traders assigned a PIN by the security coordinator, can use this PIN to request a trading-on-behalf service from Eurex. From the PIN Maintenance window, these traders can modify their own PIN.

432 Window Layouts and s Page 432 PIN Maintenance Menu Menu Bar Item Short Cut Window Save Settings Saves the window size and position together with the configuration of the drop-down list-box. Filter settings are not stored. Ctrl+S Clear Settings Sort... Restores the window settings to the default Opens the Sort Table window Print Opens the Print Table window Ctrl+P Export Opens the Export Table window Ctrl+E Full Table Mode Activates/Deactivates the Full Table Mode of the window F11 Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Maintain Modify Opens a window that allows the user to specify values which are to be applied to the selected rows of the table. Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 PIN Maintenance Field Group Identifier Type Value/Syntax CT Member D Member String [5] * Trader Eo/D Trader String [6] * PIN Maintenance Table Column Edit Member Member N Trader Trader N PIN PIN Y

433 Window Layouts and s Page 433 PIN Maintenance Table Column Edit Mis-M Allow mis-trade action on member level Y Mis-S Allow mis-trade action on sub-group level Y Mis-T Allow mis-trade action on trader level Y ToB-M Allow trading-on-behalf action on member level Y ToB-S Allow trading-on-behalf action on sub-group level Y ToB-T Allow trading-on-behalf action on trader level Y OTC-M Allow OTC action on member level Y OTC-S Allow OTC action on sub-group level Y OTC-T Allow OTC action on trader level Y Action Action to be performed on this record on applying. N PIN Maintenance Buttons Identifier Inquire Submit Apply Cancel Start the inquiry. Submits the changes and closes the window (unless there is an error) Applies the changes and leaves the window open Cancel any changes and close window PIN Maintenance Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the PIN Maintenance - Message Log window

434 Window Layouts and s Page Help On this window... The On this window... window is accessed via the Help menu and displays the help document for a window. On this window... window

435 Window Layouts and s Page 435 Overview Using the various menus and buttons in the Help window, the user can display help information, set preferences for the online help interface and navigate through the help documents. The table of contents can be used for navigating through the help texts. If called from a window, the description referring to this window opens. The full-text search additionally supports the user to quickly access required information. Note: The results of a full-text search may not meet the user s expectations if the searched term occurs more than 100 times. Help Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the Help window Shift+F4 Help On this window... Obtain information about the Help F About... The About... window is accessed via the Help menu and displays the application information. About... window

436 Window Layouts and s Page 436 Overview The About... window displays all the application specific information that might be of relevance for the user What s new... The What s new... window is accessed via the Help menu and shows the changes new for this release. What s new window What s new... Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Save Settings Saves the current settings Ctrl+S Clear Settings Restores the window settings to the default Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Go Back/Forward Navigates to the previously viewed page Home Navigates to the home page Help On this Window Opens the Help window F1

437 Window Layouts and s Page Auxiliary Windows Print Functionality Print Table The Print Table window enables the printing of the entire table of a window, or selected rows or columns. For the Collateral Transaction Entry [Modified] and Security Information windows, the Print Table window allows the printing of a screenshot. Print Table window Overview If no columns are selected, the Range radio buttons of the Print Table window are deactivated. If All is selected, a maximum of 1000 lines is printed out. The Range and Separation radio buttons of the Print Table window are always disabled. Action The Print... item of the Window menu opens the Print Table window, while the Print Window... item opens the Print Window window. Both windows have an identical layout, with the only exception of their header, and provide the opportunity to define the attributes of a print. The Range radio button group provides the choice of printing all or part of the table. Some overview windows may not allow the selection of rows; only the full table can be printed from these windows. The Orientation radio button group allows the choice of portrait or landscape formatting. The Format pull down menu allows the selection of different paper formats. Currently A4, US letter, and US legal are supported. The Font pane informs about the currently selected font. In the Separation pane the user defines how the rows of the print should be separated. Clicking the Print button opens the Printer dialog of the front-end operating system, which allows printer selection and further formatting, depending on the system setup. Click the: Cancel button to close the Print Table window with no further action. Preview button to preview the print.

438 Window Layouts and s Page 438 All prints contain a header with the parent window title and the trader identification, and a footer with the date, time and page number information. Table data is printed, including column names. If an error occurs, a message is displayed in the message bar. Print Table Entry Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Print Table Entry Field Group Identifier Type CT Range S Selects whether selected part or all of table are printed Orientation S Selects portrait or landscape formatting Format S Selects paper format Font D Displays the currently selected font Separation S Selects the line separation of the print Print Table Buttons Identifier Print Preview Cancel Sends the parent window table data to the front-end system to be printed. Provides a preview of the print Closes the window with no further action Print Table Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Print Table - Message Log window

439 Window Layouts and s Page Print Window It is possible to print a screenshot of the entire parent window. Printing is accessed via the Print Window... selection of the Window menu. Print Window menu item This selection opens the Print Window window, where the user selects how to print the parent window. Print Window Overview The radio button group allows the choice of portrait or landscape formatting. The pull down menu allows the selection of different paper formats. Currently A4, US letter, and US legal are supported. Click: Print to display the Print dialog which allows printer selection and further formatting, depending on the system setup. Cancel to close the Print window with no further action. All prints contain a header with the parent window title and the trader identification, and a footer with the date, time and page number information. The complete parent window is printed.

440 Window Layouts and s Page 440 Print Window Buttons Identifier Print Preview Cancel Sends the parent window data to the front-end system to be printed. Allows to preview the layout of the window to be printed. This window is closed with no further action. Print Window Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Print Window - Message Log window Sort Table The Sort Table window allows users to define sorting criteria for selected overview windows. Sort Table window

441 Window Layouts and s Page 441 Overview Users may choose either the default sorting, or enable the user defined sorting to create their own sort order. For user defined sorting, as many columns as are needed may be added from the available columns to the sorted columns table. For each column, traders may choose either ascending or descending sorting by selecting the column and clicking the according button. The resulting sorted table is sorted according to the sequence of the specified user defined sort criteria, then according to the default sorting order. Action Click: OK to sort the parent window table and close the Sort Table window. Apply to sort the parent window table but leave the Sort Table window on the screen. Cancel to close the window with no further action. The Save Setting function saves any user-defined sort settings. The next time the window is opened, the saved sort settings are used. Sort Table Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Selection Add Adds the selected available column to sorted columns Remove Ascending Descending Deletes the selected column from sorted columns Defines ascending sort order for selected column Defines descending sort order for selected column Help... On this window Opens the Help window F1 Sort Table Buttons Identifier Add Delete Ascending Descending Adds the selected available column to sorted columns Deletes the selected column from sorted columns Defines ascending sort order for selected column Defines descending sort order for selected column

442 Window Layouts and s Page 442 Sort Table Buttons Identifier OK Apply Cancel The parent window table is sorted and this window is closed The parent window table is sorted and this window remains open Closes the window with no further action Find Find window Overview The Find window is used to search for a given text and allows the user to quickly locate individual records, such as orders or trades. Using this text search function avoids reloading data from the Eurex back-end. The filter criteria on the Trading Filter window causes unnecessary back-end processing and network traffic. It is only necessary to load the relevant data once at the beginning of the day. The tables are continuously updated throughout the trading day by broadcasts. To find specific items of interest (orders, trades, give-ups, take-ups) use the Find window to search through the data. This procedure reduces network traffic and does not generate any unnecessary, and potentially costly, back-end transactions. The Find window is accessed via the Position Detail Overview, Position Transfer Overview, Giveup Overview [Modified], and Take-up Overview windows. Action The Find window can also be used to search for text in a table. Enter the text to be located in the Find entry field and, if necessary, check the: Match Case checkbox to specify a case sensitive search. Whole Word checkbox to restrict the search to whole words only.

443 Window Layouts and s Page 443 Click: Find Previous to search for the entered text from the current position backwards through the table. Find Next button to search for the entered text from the current position forward through the table. If a match is found, the cursor is set to the first occurrence of the search text. If no match is found in the direction of the search, it continues at the other end of the table, and a message WRAPPED AROUND is displayed in the status bar. If no matching item is found in the entire table, the message STRING NOT FOUND appears in the status bar. The search stops and the cursor is repositioned whenever the searched for text is found, even if it is just part of a larger text. This means that searching for 123 finds or 123,81. The data is searched in its formatted form, as displayed in the table. This means that searching for 1234 does not find or 12,34. A list of recently used search texts is maintained for each instance of the application. Saving the window settings does not store this list of search texts. Click Cancel to close the window with no further action. Find Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Find Entry Field Group Identifier Type CT Find E Text to search for Match Case Checkbox Match case when searching Whole Word Checkbox Look for whole words only

444 Window Layouts and s Page 444 Find Buttons Identifier Find Previous Find Next Cancel Searches backwards for matching text Searches forwards for matching text Closes the window with no further action Find Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Find - Message Log window Quick Find Quick Find field Overview The Quick Find field on the right end of the toolbar supports quick search functionality. This field is always enabled and optional. If the user starts to type into the Quick Find field, the table in the window shows only those lines containing the search criteria. If columns are selected before the user starts typing into the Quick Find field, the Quick Find only searches the selected columns for the entered search criteria. In order to indicate which columns are used for the search, these columns are highlighted. The text Filtered in the window name indicates that Quick Find filter is active.

445 Window Layouts and s Page Column Selection The Column Selection window allows the user to determine which columns in a table are visible. Position Overview - Column Selection window Overview A window Column Selection is available in windows containing tables. This window can be accessed either via the menu item Columns Select... or the Select Columns icon in the toolbar. The Column Selection window opens as a unique child window to the window from where it was opened. This means if the parent window is closed the child window is closed as well and if the parent window is hidden the child window is hidden as well. The window contains the name of the parent window in its title together with the name Column Selection, as shown in the screenshot Position Overview > Column Selection. If the user tries to open a second Column Selection window from the parent window the existing Column Selection window is activated. Action The Column Selection window contains two lists that represent the status of the columns as shown (on the left side) and deleted (on the right side). Hide and Show buttons are located between these two lists that allow the user to move one or more selected columns into the opposite list. Columns can also be deleted or added using the Selection Hide and Selection Show menu items.

446 Window Layouts and s Page 446 Column names can be selected by a single mouse click. The Shift key can be used to select a block of columns as follows: click the top or bottom of the desired block, hold down the Shift key and click the other end of the block, and the block is highlighted. Individual columns can also be moved from one list to the other by double-clicking the column name. Up and Down buttons are also located between the two lists that allow the user to move one or more selected columns up or down the selected list. Columns can also be moved using the Selection Up and Selection Down menu items. The Column Selection window has OK, Apply and Cancel buttons. Click: OK to communicate the new list of active columns to the parent window and close the Columns Selection window. Apply to communicate the new list of active columns to the parent window that refreshes the display of its table according to that list and keep the Columns Selection window open. Cancel to close the Columns Selection window with no changes to the columns of the parent window. If an error occurs, an exception code is displayed in the message bar. Column Selection Menu Menu Bar Item Shortcut Window Close Closes the window with no further action Shift+F4 Selection Hide Moves the selected columns from the Shown Columns list to the Hidden Columns list Show Up Down Moves the selected columns from the Hidden Columns list to the Shown Columns list Moves the selected columns up in the order Moves the selected columns down in the order Help On this window... Opens the Help window F1 Column Selection Lists Identifier Shown Columns Hidden Columns Displays the names of the columns which are to be visible in the table of the parent window Displays the names of the columns which are to not be visible in the table of the parent window

447 Window Layouts and s Page 447 Column Selection Buttons Identifier Hide Show Up Down OK Apply Cancel Moves the selected columns from the Shown Columns list to the Hidden Columns list Moves the selected columns from the Hidden Columns list to the Shown Columns list Moves the selected columns up in the order Moves the selected columns down in the order The list of shown columns is communicated to the parent window and the Columns Selection window is closed The list of shown columns is communicated to the parent window and the Columns Selection window remains open This window is closed with no further action Column Selection Message Bar Mouse Usage DC-L Opens the Column Selection - Message Log window

448 Window Layouts and s Page Export Table An Export option is available to allow data to be exported to a file. The Export option is accessed via the Windows menu. A dialog box opens, requesting a name and location for the export table file. The table can be exported in.csv, text (.txt) or Excel (.xls) format as per the chosen file type. Export Table menu item Export Table window

449 Window Layouts and s Page 449 In the Clearing GUI the Export function is provided in the following windows: Position Overview Position Detail Overview Position Transfer Overview Give-up Overview [Modified] Take-up Overview Exercise Overview Exercise Assignment Overview [Modified] Notification Overview Notification Allocation Summary Overview Settlement Price Overview Market Supervision Messages Message Log

450 Window Layouts and s Page Confirmation Dialogs Confirmation Dialogs warn the user on performing potentially unintended actions. Sample Confirmation Dialog window The user must confirm potentially unintended actions by use of a confirmation dialog. To avoid accidental logout or file deletion, users are asked to confirm these requests via the Logout Confirmation dialog. To avoid the loss of existing files when exporting table data, the Overwrite dialog window asks users to confirm this overwriting. Close outs which would result in a late closing are signaled. Thus users need to explicitly confirm late closing and are aware of the corresponding late closing fees. Attempts to exercise a non-front-month series of an american style option trigger a confirmation dialog to avoid users exercising such a non-front-month by accident, forgetting to exercise the front-month which might expire unexercised. Confirmation Dialog Window Buttons Identifier Yes No The system proceeds with the execution of the current action The system cancels the execution of the current action

451 Appendix Page Appendix 5.1 Function Keys The following table gives an overview of the shortcuts and corresponding actions as used in the Eurex clearing system. Shortcut F1 F2 CTRL+F2 F4 SHIFT+F4 F5 CTRL+F5 SHIFT+F7 F8 F9 F11 Shift+F11 F12 CTRL+A CTRL+C CTRL+E CTRL+F CTRL+G CTRL+L CTRL+N CTRL+O Action Help Exercise Overview Settlement Price Overview Notification Overview Close Notification Allocation Summary Overview Reload Profile Selection Position Overview Position Detail Overview Full Table Mode Give-Up Overview Take-Up Overview Select All Copy Selected Area Export Find Preferences Login/Logout Market Supervision Messages Position Transfer Overview

452 Appendix Page 452 Shortcut CTRL+P CTRL+Q CTRL+S CTRL+T CTRL+V CTRL+W CTRL+X Action Print Exit Application Save Settings Ticker Board Paste Selected Area Save Window Configuration Move Selection to the Clipboard

453 Appendix Page Mnemonics Window Menu The following table gives an overview of mnemonics, which are not specific for a single window of the Eurex clearing system. Window Menu Menu Item Mnemonic Window Save Settings ALT-W S Window Clear Settings ALT-W R Window Sort... ALT-W O Window Find ALT-W F Window Print... ALT-W P Window Export... ALT-W E Window Full Table Mode ALT-W-T Window Close ALT-W C Select Filter ALT-S F Select Profile ALT-S P Select Product ALT-S T Select Contract ALT-S C Select Reload ALT-S R Select Ext Underlying ALT-S U Columns Delete ALT-U D Columns Add All ALT-U A Columns Select... ALT-U S Columns Freeze ALT-U F Columns Unfreeze All ALT-U U Columns Autofit All ALT-U T Help On this window... ALT-H O

454 Appendix Page Buttons Different buttons may have same Mnemonics when they live in different windows. Button Apply Accept Add Cancel Clear Confirm Detail Delete Modify OK Submit Update Mnemonic ALT-Y ALT-A ALT-A ALT-C ALT-L ALT-C ALT-D ALT-D ALT-M ALT-O ALT-B ALT-P

455 Appendix Page Icon Names of Eurex Clearing GUI The following table lists the icon names of the clearing windows. Window Name Allocation Overview Automatic Exercise Parameter Maintenance Change Password Clearing Board Clearing Filter Collateral Account Overview Collateral Pool Overview Collateral Pool Relations Collateral Pool Status Collateral Security Information Collateral Status Detail Collateral Transaction Overview Column Selection Contract Mapping Contract Selection Contract Statistics Overview CSD Detail CSD Overview Daily Margin Overview Daily Cash Transaction Overview Deliverable Bonds Overview Eurex Help Exchange Rate Overview Abbreviation AllO AEPM CP CB CF CAO CPO CPR CPS CSI CSD CTO Cos CMap CS CSO CSDD CSDO DMO DCTO DBO Help ExRO

456 Appendix Page 456 Window Name Exercise Assignment Overview Exercise Filter Exercise Overview External Underlying Selection Find Flexible Contracts Trade Separation Futures Deliverable Positions Overview Give-up Filter Give-up Maintenance Give-up Overview Guarantee Overview Login/Logout Main Menu Margined Position Overview Margin Requirement Information Market Supervision Messages Member General Information Member Relationship Overview Message Log Notification Allocation Summary Overview Notification Detail Overview Notification Overview Option Margin Parameter Overview OTC Flexible Contracts Clearing OTC Flexible Contracts Filter Abbreviation EAO EF EO EUS Find FCTS FDPO GF GM GO GuaO Login MAIN MPO MRI MSM MGI MRO ML NASO NDO NO OMPO FCC FCF

457 Appendix Page 457 Window Name PIN Maintenance Position Adjustment Position Close Out Bulk Load Position Detail Filter Position Detail Maintenance Position Detail Overview Position Overview Position Transfer Bulk Load Position Transfer Entry Position Transfer Filter Position Transfer Overview Preferences Print Table Product Assignment Maintenance Product Maintenance Product Selection Product Statistics Overview Profile Maintenance Profile Selection Risk Monitoring Maintenance Security Collateral Transaction Entry Security Deposit Overview Settlement Price Overview Sort Table Specific Equity Collateral Assignment Overview Abbreviation PinM PA PCBL PDF PDM PDO PO PTBL PosT PTF PTO Pref PT PAM PM PdS PSO PM PfS RMM SCTE SDO SPO ST SECAO

458 Appendix Page 458 Window Name System Connection Take-up Filter Take-up Maintenance Take-up Overview Ticker Board Trade Separation User Security Profile Maintenance What s new Abbreviation SC TF TM TO TB TS USPM WNew

459 Appendix Page Table of OTC Flexible Contracts Maintenance Codes The table below contains Flexible Contracts Maintenance Codes (alphanumeric 1 format). Valid Values A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U W s/decodes Approve Trade Delivered to CCP Accept Give-Up Delete Trade Enter Trade Full Position Transfer Enter Give-Up Cash Settlement Assignment Capital Adjustment Position Transfer Take-up Delete Give-Up Modify Trade Delete Position Transfer Enter Position Transfer Pending Delivery Accept Position Transfer Expired Trade Settlement Complete Enter Take-Up Close Out Trade Separation

460 Appendix Page 460 Valid Values X Y Z s/decodes Expired Notify Allocate 1 Enter Position Transfer With Cash 2 Take-Up Position Transfer With Cash 3 Accept Position Transfer With Cash 4 Delete Position Transfer With Cash

461 Appendix Page Table of Exchanges Exchange ID XAMS XATH XBER XBRU XCEG XDJI XDUB XDUS XEEE XEUR XFRA XHEL XBUD XKFE XLIS XLSE XMAD XMIL XMUN XNAS XNYS XOSL XPAR Exchange AMSTERDAM ATHENS BERLIN BRUSSELS CENTRAL EUROPEAN GAS HUB DOW JONES DUBLIN DUESSELDORF EEX SPOT MARKET EUREX FRANKFURT HELSINKI HUNGARY KOREA - FUTURES MARKET LISBON LONDON MADRID MAILAND MUENCHEN NASDAQ NEW YORK NYSE OSLO PARIS

462 Appendix Page 462 Exchange ID XPRA XREU XLJU XSSE XSTX XSTU XSYD XVTX XVIE XETR XSWX Exchange PRAGUE REUTERS SLOVENIA STOCKHOLM STOXX STUTTGART SYDNEY VIRT-X WIEN XETRA ZURICH

463 Appendix Page Explanation Front-end trading application provided by Eurex for derivatives trading. Front-end clearing application provided by Eurex for derivatives clearing. Account Type Type of the account where a trade is carried out: "P1" = Proprietary Account 1, "P2" = Proprietary Account 2, "M1" = Market Maker 1 Account, "M2" = Market Maker 2 Account, "A1" = Agent Account, "G1" = Pre-designated Give-up Trade for the A1-Account, "G2" = Designated Give-up Trade for the A1-Account. Allocated Position American Style Option Assigned Position Batch Block Auction Broadcast Capital Adjustment CASCADE CB CBF A long position in an interest-rate futures contract, that, on final settlement date, has been assigned the securities to be delivered. Options that can be exercised at any time before and at expiration day Position of a holder of sold options in an option series that was assigned by an exercise instruction. During the batch phase of the trading day statistical information is updated, reports are generated and data maintenance is performed. The system is prepared for the next trading day and set to the Start phase upon completion of the batch. Traders are able to trigger a Block Auction by entering a Block Auction request. Responders can place Block Auction quotes as an answer for the request. If the requestor decides to accept the Block Auction, a Block Auction trade is executed. Unsolicited messages ("broadcasts") sent to the Member's frontend applications. Adjustments to stock options and stock futures series caused by adjustments to the corresponding underlying based on changes to the respective company's capital. System used by Clearstream Banking AG for the clearing and settlement of securities. Central Bank Clearstream Banking Frankfurt (formerly Deutsche Börse Clearing)

464 Appendix Page 464 Term CET Client Asset Protection Closing Transaction Collateral Pool Context Menu Contingent Future Counterparty CSD DBC DCM EBI EEX EFP-Fin EFP Trade EFP- Index Futures EFS Explanation Central European Time Client Asset Protection addresses the requirements of asset segregation and timely portability by enabling Clearing Members and their clients to individually negotiate the level of protection they want depending on their risk-cost profile. Transaction to close an existing open position. An open long position can be closed by a sell to close the transaction and vice versa. There are three types of pool for margin: Default: Used for proprietary and non-segregated collaterals. Omnibus: Used for omnibus segregated collaterals. Segregated: Used for individually segregated NCM collaterals. The context menu appears right next to the mouse pointer when clicking the defined mouse button. It allows a fast selection out of a distinct set of choices (e.g. quantity, limit). A future product, created in a separation process, which has one index constituent as the underlying. The opposite party to a financial transaction. Normally the counterparty of the buyer of a contract is the seller of that contract. In the case of Eurex, however, Eurex Clearing AG acts as the counterparty to each party to a transaction, thereby removing counterparty risk from the members. Central Securities Deposit former Deutsche Börse Clearing, now CBF Direct Clearing Member E-Brokerage Interface European Energy Exchange Exchange For Physicals Financials Exchange of Futures for Physicals. EFP Trades can only be entered for EEX Futures products traded on the exchange. Exchange for physicals- Index futures, an OTC trade type Exchange For Swaps

465 Appendix Page 465 Term EUA Eurex Market Model European Style Option Exercised Position Filter Futures Style/Premium Posting GCM Good-for-Day Good-till-Cancelled Good-till-Date GUI ID Immediate-or-Cancel order (IOC order) Index future Explanation European Union Emission Allowance The exchange market model defines the mechanism of how orders are matched to become trades in the exchange trading system. It describes price determination, prioritization of exchange orders as well as the type and scope of information made available to market participants during the trading session. Options that can be exercised only on expiration day Exercised long position in an option series. Filters allow the user to display information in the overview window according to pre-defined criteria. For Future style options the (rest-premium) is due on either on expiration, exercise or assignment of the option. General Clearing Member A restriction applied to an order by a participant, when entering the order. A Good-for-Day order is cancelled from the order book at the end of the Eurex system trading day. Validity constraint for an order which is only valid until it is either executed or deleted by the originator or the system on reaching it's maximum validity of one year. Validity constraint for an order which is only valid until a specified date (up to a maximum of one year from the date of entry). It is a generic term for a Graphical User Interface to a computer. Eurex supports a Trading GUI (@X-ceed), a Clearing GUI (@Xtract) and a GUI for equities Clearing (@X-pert). Identification Order which must be executed immediately and complete or as completely as possible. Non-executed parts of the IOC order are discarded without an entry in the order book. A future product which has the constituents of an index as the underlying

466 Appendix Page 466 Term Individual Segregation Inside Market Interval Product Inter Product Spread IPS ISE ISIN ITM Margin Class Margin Group Explanation The Individual Segregation Solution is provided for Non Clearing Members where margin requirements for that given Non Clearing Member are covered by a dedicated collateral pool holding only the collateral of that Non Clearing Member. Overview displaying the best bid and best ask limits with the respective accumulated volumes in the order book. The product of a margin class used by Eurex risk-based margining for the calculation of the risk array. The Inter Product Spread (IPS) is a futures combination type. The buyer of an IPS buys the first and sells the second component similar to the Time Spread Combination; however, the components refer to different financial instruments. Inter Product Spreads are treated as normal products in the Eurex System. Trades made in IPS products are posted to the two underlying legs. Hence, a buy of IPS products results, similar to time spread combinations, in a long position in one product and short position in another product in the same series. International Securities Exchange International Securities Exchange Holdings, Inc., is a wholly owned subsidiary of Eurex. It is a member of the Options Clearing Corporation (OCC) and the Options Industry Council (OIC). ISE offers equity and index options, including proprietary index products, as well as FX options based on foreign currency pairs. ISE also offers market data tools designed for sophisticated investors seeking information on investor sentiment, volatility, and other options data. See: 12-digit international security identification number. In-the-money All index-based products can be brought together in the margin class of the underlying index. In the same way, based on the same type of security can be put together in a margin class. A margin class can contain only products with the same currency. Portfolio containing different margin classes whose underlying securities show a positive price correlation. A margin group can contain margin classes with different class related currencies.

467 Appendix Page 467 Term Market Maker Market Supervision Maximum Calendar Spread Quantity Maximum Order Quantity Maximum Wholesale Quantity Member Member Setup NCM Non-Segregated Position Notified Position Explanation A market maker in a particular underlying is permitted to enter quotes for contracts for that underlying. They also have the duty to answer quote requests. The exchange's Market Supervision ensures an orderly trading and clearing on Eurex. Maximum number of contracts a trader can enter with future calendar spread combination orders. Maximum number of contracts a trader can enter with regular and strategy orders. Maximum number of contracts a trader can enter with Eurex wholesale trades. Market participant. For each Eurex member, Market Supervision sets up and maintains a member resource profile. Non Clearing Member. An exchange participant that does not hold a clearing license. Such a participant must have a clearing agreement in effect with a General Clearing Member or a company-affiliated Direct Clearing Member. The proprietary positions of a Clearing Member or customer who has selected neither the Omnibus or Individual Segregation solution. The Clearing Member uses proprietary collateral to cover client (Non Clearing Members and agent clients) and proprietary business, and is responsible for protecting the client collateral. Position notified for delivery; short positions of bond future which (at the time of the delivery fulfillment) have been notified for delivery by the seller of the future for delivery

468 Appendix Page 468 Term OCC Omnibus Segregation OPM Order Book OTC Basis Trade Entry OTC Block Trade OTC Flexible Contracts Explanation Options Clearing Corporation OCC operates under the jurisdiction of both the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC). Under its SEC jurisdiction, OCC clears transactions for put and call options on common stock and other equity issues, stock indexes, foreign currencies, interest rate composites and single-stock futures. As a registered Derivatives Clearing Organization (DCO) under CFTC jurisdiction, OCC offer clearing and settlement services for transactions in futures and options on futures contracts. See: The Omnibus Segregation Solution separates positions and collateral from Clearing Member proprietary positions, and has positions held in a segregated account and/or on the Non Clearing Member account. The margin requirement is calculated on a net level for the Segregated Agent account, and should a Non Clearing Member select omnibus segregation, the Non Clearing Member s margin requirement is added, and the total margin requirement is covered by the segregated omnibus collateral pool. Option Pricing Model The order book contains all current orders for a product according to their trading restrictions and execution conditions. Simultaneous exchange of cash bonds against futures contracts on those bonds. Eurex allows members to clear futures resulting from basis trades using the basis trade entry function. Offered by the Exchange to facilitate trades in larger amounts of contracts in standardized Eurex options. The Exchange defines the minimum number of options contracts that must be traded. The OTC block trade entry functionality enables a trader to enter option trades into the Eurex System that have been negotiated outside the system directly with another trader. OTC Flexible Options and OTC Flexible Futures are together referred to as OTC Flexible Contracts.

469 Appendix Page 469 Term OTC Flexible Futures OTC Flexible Options OTC Trading OTC Vola Trade Explanation An OTC Flexible Futures contract is a user defined contract. Eurex offers OTC trading facility for trading these contracts. The following contract specific parameters can be defined: Expiry day: All business days, with some special Eurex defined exceptions, which are prior to the latest expiry date of the related regular series, are accepted. Settlement Type: The settlement type can be chosen from the settlement types available for the product. Note: Products with the settlement type notional are not supported. An OTC Flexible Options contract is a user defined contract. Eurex offers OTC trading facility for trading these contracts. The following contract specific parameters can be defined: Exercise price: Exercise price which is a percentage above the highest strike price of all maturities or a fixed lower limit below the strike price of standard series for the particular product. The percentage is defined by Eurex and communicated to members and is common for. Expiry day: All business days, with some special Eurex defined exceptions, which are prior to the latest expiry date of the related regular series, are accepted. Exercise style (American or European): The exercise style of the contract can be American type or European type. Settlement Type: The settlement type can be chosen from the settlement types available for the product. Over-the-counter (OTC) trades are trades that have been negotiated off the Exchange. OTC trades are entered in the Eurex clearing and settlement systems in order to get these trades settled. This can be considered as the simultaneous buy of a call option or sell of a put option and sell or buy of the respective future, even though these events do not occur at the same time. The delta of the options trade is used to calculate the number of futures that can be exchanged. The future contract entered must have the same underlying as the option contract for index options. The future contract used must be the underlying of the option contract for interest rate options. The future price used must be between the daily high and low of the future and the quantity must be greater than the minimum defined by the exchange.

470 Appendix Page 470 Term OTM Partial Execution (of an order/quote) Partial Trade to Close Pool ID Post-Trading Late 1 Post-Trading Late 2 Post-Trading Period Pre-Batch Assignment Pre-Opening Period Pre-Trading Period Explanation Out of the money Only a part of the volume of the order/quote has been executed. The trade adjustment functionality to partially close unadjusted sub trades on the buy side and sell side of the same trade. The pool ID enables Clearing Members to maintain multiple collateral pools, each assigned to an external securities collateral account, and group appropriate cash transactions that reflect the cash collateral balances. The pool ID is used to aggregate collaterals according to the selected segregation model and governs the aggregation of margin requirements, again, according to the segregation model. Optional product state scheduled in the Post-Trading period, which is intended to support all the functionality of the state Post-Trading Full with exception of wholesale trades. Optional product state scheduled in the Post-Trading period, which is intended to support all the functionality of the state Post-Trading Late 1 with exception of give-up/take-up. This phase is divided into a "Post-Trading Full" and a "Post-Trading Restricted" period. All the inquiry functions are available until the end of the Post-Trading Restricted period. In the Post-Trading Full period, market, limit and stop orders may be entered for the next trading day. Exercises of options are only possible until the end of the Post-Trading Full period (unless an earlier deadline is stipulated in the contract specifications). Members receive assignment information for exercised options before the start of the batch. The pre-batch assignment process is initiated individually for each Eurex product by the transition to the product state "post trading restricted". During pre-opening the opening prices of option series or futures contracts are determined by posting buy and sell orders. In this period the potential opening prices are displayed. This is the prelude to Eurex trading. Users can make inquiries on data, or can enter orders and quotes as preparation for actual trading.

471 Appendix Page 471 Term Private Broadcasts Product Assignment Product Currency Product Groups Product State Recoverable Broadcast Reference Price Report Resource Access Level Resource Access Table RTGS Security Coordinator Security Currency Explanation Private broadcast messages contain member specific information. This includes data such as order confirmations or trade confirmations. Each new product must be assigned to the members of Eurex and each individual trader before they are able to trade this product. Currency in which a product is set up. Premiums and Variation Margin amounts are settled in this currency. The currency of the product and the currency of its underlying are always the same. Entities used to facilitate the execution of common tasks applicable to a set of products. There are different product states during the trading day: Start, Pre-Trading, Pre-Opening, Freeze, Netting, Trading, Fast Market, Closing Auction, Post-Trading Full, Post-Trading Late1, Post- Trading Late2, Halt, Post-Restricted, Batch and Holiday. Missed broadcast messages can be re-requested within the same business day. Last product price of the trading day. A report contains member specific (trading/clearing) or general information (statistics). There are also fee reports and audit trail reports. It defines the access of a user to a special window or command. This table describes the functional system areas a resource are able to get access to. For clearing functionality the value ranges between 0 and 3; e.g. "0" (no access) or "1" (privilege granted); Real Time Gross Settlement is a payment system of the Deutsche Bundesbank. The security coordinator is responsible for the Eurex security maintenance functions. Currency in which a specific security is traded.

472 Appendix Page 472 Term Explanation Short Option Compensation The short option minimum is calculated for every outright short option position. It leads to exaggeratedly high margin requirements for almost any type of option combination positions where long positions are involved. The short option compensation takes into account that a major part of the risk of short option positions embedded in complex option portfolios can be compensated either by long option positions or by corresponding futures positions. Short Option Minimum Surplus Suspension of a Member Suspension of a Product Tick Size Tick Value Trade Separation Trade Unit Trade Unit Value Within the calculation of additional margin requirements in option products theoretical values for each option series are calculated under the assumption of worst case market moves. Since the calculation process does not consider any increase in implied volatility an adjustment is made on all short options positions where the worst case liquidating value is lower than a defined minimum amount. These adjustments are taken into consideration if the entire position of the respective margin class bears its maximum close out risk at either end of the margin interval. The number of demanded/offered values exceeding the values asked/offered at the end of a trading day. A suspended member is not able to trade anymore; however, inquiry functions can be carried out. Orders of a suspended member are deleted from the order book. The Exchange supervisor can set a product to "Halt" in order to prevent any further trading or order entry by the members. Minimum variation of a contract price. Value of a tick The trade adjustment functionality to split a trade into maximum of 20 subtrades. Contract size; for stock options in general 10, 50 or 100 shares. For EEX Futures the Trading Unit is calculated based on the number of delivery days within a calendar month. The Trade Unit Value is calculated by dividing the tick value by the tick size and multiplying this intermediate result by the trade unit.

473 Appendix Page 473 Term Trader Subgroup Trading on-behalf Trading Period Traditional Style Premium Posting Transaction Transaction Limits Transactions (asynchronous) Transactions (synchronous) Explanation A market member can divide his traders in subgroups. Traders of the same subgroup function are a closed unit. Each of them has access to the same information and is able to (with the appropriate access authorization) view, change and cancel each order put in by the subgroup. In case of an emergency, market supervision can enter orders as well as delete orders on-behalf of a member. In the Trading phase orders and quotes are matched and transactions are immediately confirmed "on-line". Orders and quotes entered during this time that are equal to or better than existing orders and quotes on the corresponding counter-side of the order book are immediately matched. Options premiums are due and received or allocated at the opening of an option position. For the purpose of transaction limits, "transaction" does not refer to the number of contracts that a given participant may trade within a product, but rather to a processing activity within the system. From a technical point of view, a distinction is made between "synchronous" and "asynchronous" system transactions. Eurex transaction limits refer to synchronous transactions only. In response to the increasing use of quote machines and the rapid growth of Eurex trading volumes, these limits were designed to mitigate the network and system load. Asynchronous system transactions are all those which cannot directly be attributed to an activity by any individual participant. Predominantly, this includes subsequent Eurex System processes carried out as a result of participants' activities, such as the posting of positions after the conclusion of trades or the broadcast of price information to all participants. Transactions are termed synchronous whenever they are initiated by an Exchange participant and thus triggering an immediate response by the Eurex System. In addition to all order-driven or quote-driven transactions (Add, Change or Delete) this includes all inquiries which are not related to data stored in the BOF file interface.

474 Appendix Page 474 Term Underlying VALUES WBAG Xemac XML Explanation Also underlying security; underlying physicals are the basis of options series and futures contracts (e.g. BASF shares, German Stock Index). The underlying of the Bond future is a synthetic government bond. In the case of an option on a future, the underlying can also be a Eurex futures contract. Virtual Access Link Using Exchange Services is the programmable interface providing connectivity to Eurex. VALUES API provides a single point of entry to the full range of the exchange functionality The Wiener Börse AG is the stock exchange of Vienna. Xemac is the collateral management system of Clearstream Banking AG. Extensible Markup Language